Iohn Huighen van Linschoten. his discours of voyages into ye Easte & West Indies Deuided into foure bookes.

The third Booke. (Book 3)

The Nauigation of the Portingales into the East Indies, containing their trauels by Sea, into East India, and from the East Indies into Portingall, also from the Portingall Indies to Malacca, China, Iapon, the Ilands of Iaua and Sunda, both to and fro, and from China to the Spanish Indies, and from thence backe a∣gaine to China, as also of all the coast of Brasilia and the Hauens thereof. With a description of the Firme land, and the Ilands of the Spanish Indies lying be∣fore it, called Antillas together with the Nauigation of Cabo de Lope Gonsalues, to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia. With all the courses, Hauens, Ilands, depthes, shallowes, Sands, drougthes, Riffes, and Cliffes, with their situations. Also the times of the yeares when the winds blow, with the true tokens and know∣ledge of the tydes, and the weather, water, and stormes, in all the Orientall coastes and Hauens, as they are obserued and set downe by the Kings Pilotes, in their continuall and dayly Viages.

THE I. CHAPTER. Of the courses and Viages of the Portingales into the East Indies.

FIrst you must vnder∣stand that all Christ∣endome lyeth on the North side of the E∣quinoctiall line, and Lisbone vnder thir∣tie nine degrées and a halfe, and lyeth with the Iland of Madera Northeast & southwest, the Viage being 172 Spanish miles, and Madera lyeth vnder 32 degrées, and is distant from the Iland la Pal∣ma (which the shippes sayling to India may easily perceiue) 63. miles. The Iland la Pal∣ma lyeth vnder 28. degrées ¼ & from thence you must sayle Southward, as long as time will permit, for commonly when you come vnder fiue or sixe degrées, you find south east∣wardes and then you must saile southwest, as much as you can, vntill you passe the cape of S. Agustine which lieth vnder 8 degrees ½. on the south side that is vpon the coast of Brasilia, from the Ilande la Palma, to this Cape of Saint Augustine are 900. miles the course lying Northeast and southwest, when you are past the point you must sayle South∣west, because the winde is there commonly south and southeast, and from the Ilands of Tristan da Cunlia, lying vnder 34. degrées, on the south side of the Equinoctial you must hold southwest, and when you thinke you haue passed these Ilands, you must sayle till you come vnder 36. degrées, and kéepe East∣ward, vntill you haue passed the Cape de Bona Speranza, and then you must holde Northeast towardes the land, and hauing knowne the land, according to the place you then haue knowne, you shall set your course to Mosambique, or outward about the I∣land of Saint Laurence, from the Cape of Saint Austine to the Cape de Bona Spe∣ranza are 1060. miles, which Cape de Bo∣na Speranza lyeth full vnder 34 degrées and a halfe on the south side of the Equinoctiall, and is East southeast and West, Northwest with the Cape Das Agulhas which is 32.

miles, and Cape das Agulhas, is full vnder 35. degrées, lying with the Cape do Infante East and West, and somewhat East and by North, and West and by South, the course is 26. miles, Cabo do Infante is vnder 34. degrées and 2/••. and lyeth with the Cape Tal∣hado, East Northeast, and West South∣west 19. miles, Cabo Talhado is vnder 34 degrées, & lyeth with Bahija Fermosa East and West 1••. miles, Bahija Fermosa is vn∣der the same hight of Cabo Talhado and ly∣eth with the Ilands Chanos East northeast, and West Southwest, 37. miles, and with the first point called Punta Primiera North∣east and Southwest, and somewhat North∣east and by East, and southwest & by West, the course is 50. miles, Punta Primiera is vnder 32. degrees, and lyeth from the last land called Terra do Natal 50. miles, which is vnder 30. degrées and a halfe, and lyeth with the land called Terra dos Fumos, Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat of Northeast and by North, and Southwest & by South, and the course is 75. miles, the land of Terra dos Fumos is vnder 27. de∣grees and a halfe, and lyeth with the Cape das Correntes, Northeast, and Southwest, and somewhat Northeast and by East, and Southwest and by West, the course is 95. miles, Cabo das Correntes is vnder 24. degrees and a halfe, and lyeth with Insulas Primieras Northeast and Southwest, and somwhat Northeast, and by North & South∣west and by West, the course is 132 miles, the Insulas Primieras are scarce vnder 17. degrees and a halfe, and lye with Mosam∣bique Northeast and Southwest, the course is 52. miles, Mosambique is vnder 15. de∣grees, and putting forth from Mosambique towards India, you must sayle Northeast, vntill you come before the Iland of Comora the course is 80. miles, till you come vnder 11. degrées and then you must yet take your course Northeast, vnto the Iland As Ilhas do Almirante, which are vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side, being past those Ilands, you must take your course North∣east, and Northeast and by East, wherewith you shal come to the Ilands As Ilhas Quei∣madas, which are vnder 16. degrées, vppon the coast of Goa, or India, here you must re∣member that at this time the streames in that countrie doe alwaies runne Northwest, that is towards the Straights of Mecca, or to the red Sea, therefore presently when you are vnder 16. degrées, (to kéepe your right course) you shall stil hold your course a∣foresaid, which is Northeast and by East, or somewhat more, as you finde occasion, your Compasse will alwaies shew you what you may doe, and thus must you sayle for y^e space of 200 miles, towards the coast of India be∣ing sure you goe no lower then 15: degrées, to auoide the drougths called Os Baixos de Pandua, which lie vnder 13. degrees North∣ward, also when you thinke to bee vppon the coast of India, you must still hold aboue 16. degrées, for that the streame and water vpon that coast runneth Southward, & commonly the wind is there out of the North & North∣west, and to know when you are vppon the coast of India, you shal find these tokens, that is 300. miles from the coast you shall see Crabbes, and 50. miles from the coast you find Snakes in the water as big as Eales or Lampernes, which is alwayes most certain, and within 20. miles from the land you haue ground at 80. fadome, and 14. or 15. miles from the shore 70. fadome, you néed not feare to fall on the coast, for it is faire and without danger, and hath good Ankeridge, and all the Ilands and Cliffes vpon the coast, lie close to the Firme land, whereby there is no danger, and all the coast called India, lie North and South, and somewhat North and by West, and south and by East, and you must vnder∣stand that al the coast of India, Persia, Ara∣bia, the Straights of Mecca, or the red sea, the coast of Choramandel, Seylon, Benga∣len, Pegu, Sian, Malacca, Camboia, Cau∣chinchina, China, Iapon, &c. lie on the north side of the Equinoctiall line.

The 2. Chapter The course or viage to East India, made and set downe by the Kings Pilot cal∣led Diego Astonso a Portingall.

SAyling from Lisbone to the Iland of Madera, you must set your corse Southwest and make towards the Iland Porto Santo, & from thence you must passe betwéene the Iland Deserta, and Madera, shunning the Ilands or Cliffes called Os Saluagiens, lying two miles south∣westward frō the Madera, for thereabouts are great drougthes, which by night are very dangerous, you may passe by thē on the East side, & so keepe your course to the Iles of Ca∣nares, and hauing passed those Ilands of Ca∣nares, you must set your course Southward till you come vnder 14. degrées, kéeping 50. miles downwards from Cabo Verde, and from thence you must set your course south∣west and Southwest and by West, till you come vnder 6. degrées, and from thence south∣west, and southwest and by South, so y^t you hold your course 70. miles from the drougth of the ryuer called Rio Grande, & 80. miles

from Saint Anna, alwaies doing your best to get vnder the Equinoctiall line, letting your course stil be somwhat about the south, and if the wind be South, then rather chuse the East, then the West side although you be vnder the line and as long as you haue no Southeast wind, hold Eastward, not once approching the land called I' erra do Malla∣getta, neerer thē 50. or 60. miles distant, and when you haue the Longitude and Latitude whereby you may know you haue passed the Cape Das Palmas, then when you Lauere, make short turnings I meane vnder the line, or on this side therof, least the streame should driue you within the Cape aforesaid, but ra∣ther stricke all your Sayles, then driue in there, for otherwise you cannot saue your selfe neither yet get into India, I haue before shewed you what you shall do being an hun∣dred & fortie myles vnder the lyne, then crosse right ouer, so to passe before Brasilia, for that following the way and course aforesayd, you can not fayle, but you must néedes passe by Brasilia: on the aforesaid coast of Malaget∣ta, the streame (with a new Moone) runneth Southwest, therefore as then you shall not set your course towards Brasilia, being vn∣der the lyne, but when you set your course South West, hold you as long therein as the wynd continueth good, and then vse all speed and diligence, (as I sayd before) to passe the lyne, ouer the syde of Brasilia, thereby to get vnder eyght degrees, vnder the which lyeth the poynt called Cabo de S. Augustin, and then if vnder those eight de∣grees, you desire to leaue the sight of the land, then turne not vpon the other syde, but ra∣ther cast anker, vntill the wynd commeth good, to keepe on your course, and you must vnderstand that the streame on this syde of Brasilia, Cape de S Augustin, and that coū∣trey) runneth to the Antillas (which are the Ilands of new Spayne) wherefore I thinke it not your best way to Lauere, for if you do, without all doubt you will be forced to turne againe vnto Po••tingale•• from thence y^t shall take an other way, vnto the Iland of Mar∣tin Vaas (hauing past the lyne) & the righter you keepe this way it is the better. From the Iland of Martin Vaas, or from the hight vnder which they lie, to the Ilandes of Tri∣stan de Cunha, hauing a fore wind, you shal hold your right course, without any racking or abatement of your reckening: for those I∣lands lie with the others all vnder one longi∣tude and latitude, with the difference that the Compasse hath in those Countries, that is by the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compasse a stryke and a half Northeastward, and when it is an hower after twelue of the Clocke by the compasse, it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelue of the Clocke, and to know when you are hard by the Ilandes, you shall find it by this, that you shall see certaine Birds fly∣ing, fiue and fiue in ranks together, then you are hard by them, and from thence forward certaine birdes will follow you, by the Por∣tingales called Feigions, full of blacke and white spottes, whereby they are easy to bee knowne, béeing South and North ouer this Iland you shall see certaine thinges driue in the sea, by the Portingalles called Sar∣goslo, and is almost like the weedes that is found by Vie••inghen in Holland. From these Ilandes of ••rulan de Cunha, to the cape de bona Speranza, being in this coun∣trie about the eight of Iune, you shall see in driuing the sea, certaine weedes called Sar∣gollo and Trombas, like peeces of thicke reedes, those reedes are short and full of bran∣ches, and are not so long as those that are found, by the Cape de bona Speranza, here you must kéepe on your course till you finde them to increase, and be not abashed thereat, for it commeth by this meanes, that the more it stormeth and is foule weather in the I∣lands the more of those reedes & weedes are smittē down, which w^t the water & the wind that commeth both from behind and ouer the Iland, driue towardes the Cape de bona Speranza, wherefore I aduertise you that if you find those réedes and weedes, to keepe 150. miles further from the Ilandes of Tri∣stan de Cunha, for they are signes of that I told you of before. When you come vn∣der the hight of 35. degrees full or scarse to the Cape de bona Speranza, you shall see Trombas or péeces of thicke reedes in the water, and when you see them, assure your selfe they come from the Cape de bona Spe∣ranza, and you are then past those of the I∣lands, when you find those Trombas, then you are but 3••. or ••0. miles from the Cape de bona speranza. Those peeces of reedes are long almost like Basuynen, but when you are vnder 35. degrées and a half then you see them no more, but certaine birds as great as Rauens, with white and flat billes, with blacke feathers, those flie not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza, and some gray birdes, by the Portingalles called Alcatiases, these are the right tokens you finde: from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas, you must likewise vnderstand, that the trauersing or crosse way from Brasilia, to the Cape de Bona Speran∣za, is much shorter or lesse thē is placed in the sea cards, but let no man seeke to know the cause thereof, as hauing no great matter con∣sisting

therein cōcerning the vosage, & though there were, yet it is not cōuenient y^t other na∣tions and strangers should vnderstand it: you find likewise betwéen the Ilands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza, certaine sea wolues, but being in that coūtry about the last of Iune, it may be you shal not sée them, for then they withdraw themselues from thence, because of the cold, & kéepe vnder the land: but if you chāce to be by those Ilāds of Tristan de Cunha, about the 10 of May, then you shal not passe aboue 35 degrées, be∣cause at that time the West windes do there blow w^t most great fury & tempests, specially with a new Moone, least it happen to you as it did to the shippe called the Bon Iesus, which was ouerwhelmed in the sea by the great waues, that the windes raised, as I my self sayth Diego Afonso, haue seene beeing in the shippe called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza: y^t shall sée certaine birds in the water called Antenas, which are great speckled fowle, then you are by Cape das Agulhas, you shall likewise finde some fish bones, or cuttle bones (such as the Gold∣smithes vse) driuing vppon the water, and when you haue the sight of land, vnder the degrees aforesaid, beeing thirtie miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza, as also com∣ming vnder the 36. degrées, you shall finde those birdes called Antenales, and when you are past the Cape de Bona Speranza, and haue séene land, whether it be y^e Cape de Bo∣na Speranza, or the cape das Agulhas, either beyond, or on this side, then kéepe aloofe from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea, and if you meane to goe to Mosambique, then you must saile North East, that is to the Baixos, or droughts of India. In the course from Brasilia, to the Cape de Bona Speran∣za many birdes follow after you, but as soone as you come within y^e sight of the cape de bo¦na Speranza, they leaue you, & manie times the blacke Rauens aforesaid: that you may be sure to be within the Cape, that is on the east side of India, you shall perceiue the waues of the sea, that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West, doe presentlie leaue you, as soone as you are past the Cape das Agulhas inwardes, vntill you come to others out of the South West, that is in∣ward from the Cape: also by this Cape the needle of the compasse is right and euen: so that when it is noone by the Astrolobie, it is likewise noone by the sunne diall, or the com∣passe both agréeing in one, which is a good signe that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas, or betweene both, that is, the Cape de Bona Speranza, and the Cape das Agulhas, and this is a great signe, as well from Portingall into India, as from India to Portingall: but sayling from Portingall to India, then the néedle of the compasse turneth Northeastward again, 30 miles frō the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique. The coast runneth East and West, and you must bee carefull (being past the Cape das Agulhas sixe or seauen miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras, not to take the way towardes the Cape, but towardes the South West, and South West and by West, because it is ne∣cessarie so to doe to saue a great deale of way by reason of the streames and waters that runne inwardes towardes the land. If it chance you passe the Cape a farre off, and so see not any of these signes, thē take the height of the sunne, and looke on your diall, but you must doe it aduisedly and with a straight thread, and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward, it being noone by the A∣strolabie. The shadow of the sunne diall will not be vpon noone but wil want a strike, and when it is noone by the diall, then it will be halfe a degree past the Astrolabe, which if you find to be so, then assure your selues, you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona Speranza, or das Agulhas, and marke it well, for you shall finde it to be true, and when you set your course to saile within the Island of saint Laurence, you shall find some small white birdes in companies together, they flie about twentie miles from the land, towardes the droughtes of India, and com∣ming vnder twenty degrees, you shall most certainely find the birdes called Garagiaus, and Alcatrases, that are like Sea-mewes, then you hold a good course, and if you sée not any of those tokens, looke well to your selfe, for thē you are hard by the Island of S. Lau∣rence, or vpon the banks of the coast of Sof∣fala, and séeing many birdes, you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India, then take your course North East, and North East & by North, and so hold on till you come vnder 19. degrees and ¼ and from thence Sayle North East till you bee in eightéene de∣grées, from thence you shall runne North, and North and by East, till you come to sixteene degrées, and ¾ beeing vnder those degrees, and séeing many birdes called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8. or 10. then you are but ten or fifteene miles from the Island of Ioan de Noua: therefore vse all diligence both by day and night, not to come néere it, specially when it is with a new moone, and saile North westward, and then you will come by the Islandes named dos Angoxes, and the more northward you run, you shall keepe the better course towardes

Mosambique, being carefull not to come neerer the land then twentie fiue fadomes déepe, for the coast is altogether droughtes & shallowes, where on Don Iohn Periera was cast away, and yet is thirteene fadome déepe round about.

The 3. Chapter. The Nauigation from Cauo das Cor∣rentes, to the droughts called os Bai∣xos de India, & from thence to Mo∣sambique.

AND if you chance to sée the cape das Correntes, being 6. or 7. miles from you, and minding to saile to Mosambique, then saile East Northeast, ha∣uing a sharpe wind, and comming vnder 22. degrées, vnder the which height the droughtes of India lie. You shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus fly∣ing in companies, and if you haue a full wind, then saile Northeast to the height aforesaide, & to know if you be néere vnto the droughts, you shall sée many of the birdes called Gara∣giaus, and Alcatrases flying together, and if you sée many Alcatrases, then you are néere the droughts: but séeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases, then you are twentie fiue miles from thence. Frō thence you must saile Northeast, and Northeast & by North, to 19. degrées and 1/•• and then saile Northeast, to 18. degrees, and from thence north, & north and by East to 16. degrées and 1/•• and beeing vnder this height, you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases, and so assure your selfe to be hard by the Island of Ioan de No∣ua, and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. toge∣ther, then you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence, because there they vse to fetch their foode: therefore vse all diligence to get your selues out of that height of the Island, which is 16 degrées and 1/•• and to bee out of danger sayle Northwest, whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas, which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique, and the more Northerly you kéepe, the nearer you come to Mosambique, but as you sayle from the I∣slands of Angoxas to Mosambique, be∣ware you come not nearer then 25. fadome to y^e Corals where Don Ioan Perreira was cast away, and yet round about it is thirtéene fadomes water, beeing past the Islandes of Angoxas Northeast, then saile Northeast, & by East, which is a good course, alwaies kée∣ping at twenty fiue fadome as I said before. The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Cor∣rentes forwards, may bee done nearer and shorter if you haue the wind Southeast, for then you may sayle along by the Islands ly∣ing vpon the bankes of Solfala, the sooner to Mosambique, and with an east wind vnder, the degrées, and with the signes aforesaide, you must likewise shun the drought of India and the bankes of the Island of S. Laurence that lye towardes the drougths of India, & betwéen those two droughts it is 95. fadome deepe, and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique, in the entrance you must passe by the two Islands of S. George, & S. Iames, and leaue them on the southwest side, keepe aloofe from S. George, about six or se∣uen fadome déepe, and so running forward til you be in, hauing care to keepe off from the bankes where you sée the water breake, till you come close before the Island and fortresse of Mosambique.

The 4. Chapter. The Nauigation from Mosambique to India.

WHEN you depart from Mosambique towardes India, then saile North∣east, whereby you shall discouer the Islande Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosam∣bique 94. miles, or 11 degrées, and ½ where∣of the furthest point Northward is a verie high land, 15. miles from thence you shall sée certaine birdes called Rabo•• de Iuncos (that is tayles of stalkes of berries) for that they haue a long narrow taile, stretching out like the stalke of a berrie, and by night you shall heare the birdes called Garagiaus sing or make a noyse, following your course from this Iland or towards India, you must vn∣derstand) as soone as you discouer the vttermost point of the Iland of Saint Laurence, towardes the North) that the water and streames run North and North∣west, toward the Cape of Guardafu, and to the mouth or entrie of the straightes of Mec∣co, or the redde sea, and you must marke, that if it chance that you sayle with a halfe winde and shoot full, or sayle before the winde, yet therefore you must not recken according to the course you hold, but alwaies take a strike for abatement or cutting off, and being by the winde two strikes because the water and streame driue you continually to the North∣west and looke wel before you, that if you find many heights, it is by reason y^e water driues

you as I said before, & to be assured to fal vpon the coast of India, you must take héede to the needle of your compasse, that yéeldeth a strike and more to the Northeast, and if you recken your course according to the way the shippe maketh, then you lose all that which the née∣dle or compasse yéeldeth towards the North∣east, and that which the water driueth you towards the Northwest, whereby you come too short, and cannot get the coast of India. The streame or drawing of the water to∣wards the redde sea, is from 4. to 7. degrées, wherefore you must alwaies haue great care to be forward, and not to come to short. In those countries you shall alwayes sée many of the birds called Rabos de Iuncos, and when you are néere vnto the coast and droughtes of Pandua, then you see them no more, but one∣ly about 5••. miles in the sea you shal perceiue diuers Snakes like Eales & bigger, driuing in the sea, you must likewise vnderstand that the streame of the water at the Cape de bo∣na Speranza, till the times aforesaid, doe al∣waies runne from the Cape del Gado, or to the cape de bona Speranza southwestward, notwithstanding y^t some streams runne crosse through them that is along the Islandes, as I〈…〉〈…〉 P••••iera, runne Westward, vpon the bankes of Cabo das correntes, to the Riuer called Aguada de Boapaz, the streames run likewise Westwardes towardes the creeke that lyeth by the Cape das Agulhas, at A∣gundi de San Bras the streame runneth to∣wardes the land, and vpon these coastes you shall find y^t the stiffer the wind bloweth out of the West, the more the water and streames runne against the wind.

The 5. Chapter. Of the nauigation and course from Lis∣bone to the East Indies, written & set down by the Kings Pilot, called Rodriges de La∣gos a Portingall.

WHen you put out of the riuer of Lisbone, to saile to the Iland called Por∣to Santo, you must run Southwest, and setting out of Lisbone, you must marke the sunne by the Compasse to proue it, that is in the ri∣sing and setting of the Sunne, and the middle betweene her rising and setting, which is North and South, and as much as you finde the needle of the compasse, to lie northeast∣ward so much you must run southwarde, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉, lyeth northeast and southwest, with y^e riuer of Lisbon, wherewith it meeteth full and euen, when you perceiue or haue a sight of Porto Santo, or the Iland Madeia, sayling to the Iland La Palma, then you shal giue all that which the Néedle of the Com∣passe lyeth Northeastward, and somewhat more, for that it lyeth more Eastwarde then it is set downe in the sea Carde, and from thence to the Island de Ferro, to the which Island you shall likewise winde a little more Westward then it lyeth in the Carde, and hereof fayle not, as being negligent to ob∣serue it, for although you abate ten miles from your course to the Islande La Palma, as it is in the Carde, yet you shall go right vpon it, and hauing past the Island La Pal∣ma, then your best way is to run southward, 30. miles from the Islands of Capo Verde, alwaies giuing all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward, or that you shall runne betwéene two meale tydes, that the one mealetide South, and the other South and by East, setting your course to the South, or the better to vnderstand it, all that which the Néedle of the Compasse yeel∣deth, which may be halfe a strike, and rather lesse then more, and sayling from vnder 22. to 18. degrées, you shall sée gréene water, which commeth from the point called Capo Branco, and from the créeke where the for∣tresse of A••gu••••n lyeth, which gréene wa∣ter if you see it more then two meale tides, then it is a signe y^t you are near the coast: but if you see but a little gréen water, that is lesse then for the space of two mealetides, then you are nearer to the Islandes: and comming vn∣der ten degrees as long as you are by the coast of Guinea, you shall giue the Needle of the Compasse no abatement, or cutting off, because the water draweth towardes the land, whereby the Northeasterne drawing of the Needle of the Compasse, (which may bee a thirde parte of a strike) agréeth with the drawing of the water, and so the shippe runneth southeast, and the water and streame commeth alwaies out of the south, whereby it is driuen vnto the shore. Sayling from 5. to 3. degrées, it is good to keepe off the coast, from 70. to 100. miles, and not more: for being more it would not be good for your voyage: the reason is, for y^t being 100 miles or more frō the coast, thē you haue but few south windes to get the coast againe, but rather haue all the thunders and light∣nings from the East to the South, and south∣east, which kéepe you from getting to the shore, and because those thunders come vpon you on all sides, therefore it is good to runne (if it be possible) from ••0. to 8••. miles, that is to 2••. degrees, and 1/•• where you shall finde a southeast wind, continuing from the 2••. of

Aprill to the 15. of May, but if you stay till the end of Aprill, it may happen that as then you shall not haue the southeast wind, before you be vnder one degrée of the Equinoctiall line. The signes you haue vppon this coast of Guinea, are some of the birds Garagiaus, and if the thunders come out of the East, be∣ing 60. or 70. miles from the shore, you shal sée certaine Swallows and Duckers, & when you haue the southeast wind, and that you make towardes the point or bough of Brasi∣lia, although in the first day of your nauiga∣tion it diminisheth not so much in the height as it should, you must not be abashed thereat, for that which you find to be lesse diminished, is not by reason that the water or streame hindreth you, as many and the most parte of men are of opinion, for that the degrees hard by the Equinoctiall are greater then others that are higher, as you shall well perceyue sayling to India, or comming from thence with a fore wind vnder the line, then the de∣grées diminish but a little, whereby it may be assured that the small diminution or running forwarde is not by reason of the water or streame that runne to the Antilhas or foure Ilandes of the Spanish Indies, comming to the line or a degrée further, then in any sorte turne not againe vnto Guinea, for it woulde bee against your selfe, and thereby you should spende your time in vaine, for that some ships that departed out of Lisbone in my compa∣ny, that from vnder the line they would wind towardes Guinea, which I did not, but con∣trarily made ouer to Brasilia, whereby those shippes came a month later then I did into India. In this bough or crossing to Brasilia, you shall set your course as the wind serueth, and looke well to your Compasse, for that as soone as you are past the line, then the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth halfe a strike and more to the Northeast, and sailing from the 8. of the 18. degrée, then the more the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeast, the further you are from the coast of Brasilia, and saie that you lay East and West with Cape S. Augusten, and that the Néedle of the Com∣passe should yéelde two third partes of a strike Northeastwarde, then you are 150. miles from it to seaward in, which is thus to be vn∣derstoode, that if the Compasse were made in Portingall, & there lay halfe a strike North∣eastward, if it bee good and true, it will do the same vpon the coast of Brasilia, being East and west with the Abrolhos, and about 170 or 200. miles from it, then the Néedle of the compasse shal lie a whole strike or somewhat more Northeastward for that the Meridian (of the Compasse, that in Portingall lyeth halfe a strike Northeast) maketh the same Meridian 100. and so many myles within the countrey of Brasilia, which also likewise doth so agrée with the sea. In this course afore∣saide you see many birdes called Rabos For∣cados, that is hanging tailes, and by all the Islandes of Martin Vaas, you shal sée white Garagiaus or sea Mewes. Now when you come vnder the height aforesaide, hauing a large winde, and that you might saile East Southeast, let the Compasse wind a strike, or a strike and a halfe, which will wind so much comming vnder 30. degrées, and although the Compasse windeth a strike and a halfe, yet you shall not therefore reckon any abate∣ment in your course, more then halfe a strike, for this way is a strike shorter then it is pla∣ced in the sea Carde, and vse all the meanes that you runne not higher then two and thir∣tie or 33. degrées towards the Island of Tri∣stan da Cunha, for you shal haue a better and surer course from very foule weather and lesse stormes, for commonly for the most part you haue the winde there at North & North∣east, which to auoid, take this counsel giuē by me, because I haue well tried it to be true: and comming by the aforesaide Islandes of Tristan de Cunha, you shall sée some of the weed called Sargosso, driuing vppon the wa∣ter, with diuers Trombas, which are thicke peeces of reedes, which when you see, then you are beside the Islandes, you shall there likewise see great sea Rauens, and some small Rauens with white billes, which flie close by the Islands, and when you are right south and north with the Islandes, then the wind∣ing of the compasse Northeastward, begin∣neth to diminish, and lieth but a strike and •• part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Iland you are in the middle or halfe way of the Me∣ridian, betweene Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas: also herewith you must vnderstād, that vnder the height of 35. degrees, little, more or lesse, you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compasse from the Northeast, and when you see the tokens a∣foresaid, you must runne to 35. degrees and •• which is a good height, holding your course east, and east and by north, till you be within 100. miles of the cape de Bona Speranza, then the compasse will winde no more but •• part of a strike, likewise the water wil there draw you northwest or north: now if by neg∣ligence you chance to faile, or by the windes are driuen vnder 35, degrees, then when you are 30 or fortie miles from the cape de Bona Speranza, you shall see many thicke peeces of reedes, and sea wolues, which being vnder 36. degrees you shall not see, bee it full or

scarse, and comming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza, be it vnder 36. or 35. degrées, you shall see a gathering or run∣ning together of the water, that is in the day time, for by night if you cannot see it, because that when you are once in it, then you can∣not perceiue it: there you find many birdes sit∣ting vpon it, by the Portingalles called Ca∣uoitoijns, and from thence to the Cape, there are some sea Rauens, with white billes which is a great signe, for it may be you may find ground, and neuer sée the birdes called Alcatrases, and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza, from fiue and thirtie to thirtie degrées, then you shall find muddie grounde, to the Cape das Agulhas, and when you are past that muddie ground, you shall finde a kinde of yel∣lowish ground, and somewhat more inwarde by the Cape das Vacquas, which is to∣wards the Agua de de San Bras, you haue shelly and stone ground. The Compasse (as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas, must in Lisbone be marked or striked, and must there lie a halfe strike Northeastward, which they must very well know howe to marke, although some of our Pilots thinke it not necessary to knowe how much the Compasse turneth or lyeth Northeast, or Northwest, saying that our predecessors vn∣derstoode not the Compasse, and so marked the coast, whereunto I answere, that in some nauigations it may be excused, but in most part of the voiage or nauigation it is very necessarie, specially from the Northeast and Northwest, as you must saile from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique, as wel in the course as to saile in the middle betwéen the Ilande of Saint Laurence, Soffala, it must haue a strike from the Northwest to saile in the middle of the channell, and this is necessarie to be known by al pylots that saile to India, because oftentimes they find them∣selues sometimes vpon the Islandes, some-that by meanes of the streames and wa-times vppon the bankes of Soffala, and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas, to Mosambique, it is good to saile an hundred miles Eastward, thereby to shun the coast, because of the water and streames that runne southwestwarde, and comming north and south with the Bay called Bal••a Del Goa, then the Needle of the Compasse will be 1/••. part of a strike and no lesse North∣westwarde, from whence notwithstanding you must not goe néerer then 60. miles vnto the coast, continuing your course as I sayde before to kéepe your selfe off from it: from this place the Rauens with white billes will follow you, vntill the Cape das Correntes, be Northwest from you, and so when the said Cape lyeth right vppon that strike, then the Rauens will leaue you, for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes, to the Cape de bona Speranza, & being North and south with the point aforesaid, then the Compasse will bee 1\••. of a strike rather more then lesse Northwestwarde, and in the mid∣dle of the channell a whole strike. Comming by the droughts of Os Baixos de Iudia, be∣ing Westward from them, or not séeing thē, then you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases, that being 10. or 15. miles from them, but being 20. miles off, on the same side, you shall likewise sée some, but the com∣passe will not winde a full strike, but if you were on the side of the Iland of S. Laurence, within 10.12. or 15. miles, then peraduen∣ture you may not sée them, and when in the height of those droughtes (which lie full vn∣der 28. degrées) you sée the birdes called Al∣catrases, then passe not by the side of the I∣land of S. Laurence, for that on that side to∣wards the Iland you shall not see them, but hard by and on Soffala side you shal perceiue them 20. miles from the land: this is to bee vnderstood at the time of the Monsons, which is at the time that the Portingall shippes (that depart from thence in the month of March) do passe by, for they that come in the Monson or winter time, may possiblie not find them: for that it happened vnto me that comming in the Monson of winter, in com∣panie of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde, I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala, and saw not one birde, but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases, and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid, then run no further North or North and by East, vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼. vnder the which heights y^e Islands As Yl∣has Prinneras doe lie, and somewhat more to the West, for that holding your course Northeast, the streame runneth so fast, that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala, and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras, trust not vnder that course, for although you passe by them East Northeast, yet it is false, because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other, till you come to a drie sand, called A Coroa de Sanguase (that is, the Crowne of Sangase,) then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas, East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest. From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places, from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe, but my o∣pinion

is, if it be possible, that it were better not to anker, because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene, if the water breake not vpon them. The signes that are found with∣in 14, miles from Mosambique, is a great thicke land, and a mile and a halfe from the coast, lyeth a banke, where you passe ouer, with fifteene fadome water: the land afore∣said is called Maginquale, and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees, like Pine∣apple trees: from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles, and to Mocango 5. miles, hauing all that way the aforesaid trees, and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore. Now to put into Mosam∣bique▪ you must take your course in the mid∣dle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera, where you shal find 7.8. and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water, and being as farre as the I∣land, so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George, and that of Saint Iames are all one, then you are right against the Islandes, and from thence putting in, you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio, in the Iland of Mosambique, vntil you be in a good depth, which shalbe a channel, stretch∣ing North and South, and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe, then winde Northwarde, alwaies keeping of the point called No••••a Senhora do Baluarte, which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water, without the fortresse of Mosambique, and also from the sandes called Cabaciera, which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique. This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees: in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward, and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro, you must run north∣east, which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees, 1/••. that is, in the end of Southwest, the course from this Island, or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line, certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées, and shall haue the wind Southeast, and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south, so you be∣gin to come from India in the winter time, from the Equinoctiall line, or to the height of Coa, that is vnder 15. degrées and 1/••. you must runne East Northeast, and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde, and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa: the signes you alwaies find in this way, are alwaies about ten degrées, in the night time you haue white and shining water, and from those ten degrees to the coast of India, some∣times you see many birdes that come from the shore, that is from the coast of Arabia, as Quartelles, and other such like smal birds, and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India, then the Compasse begin∣neth to lessen in the Northwest, for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest, and 1/••. part, and rather lesse then more.

The 6. Chapter. To sayle from Goa to Cochin.

FRom Goa to Bate∣cola, you must saile two or three miles from the land, from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep, for it is deeper there then neerer to Co∣chin, for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fa∣dome deepe: from thence it is good to runne Southeast, and Southeast and by South, to the fortresse of Barcelor, and to know if you be by Barcelor, or in the height thereof, you must vnderstand that there are high hils, which beginne at Batecola, and continue to Barcelor, and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde, which standeth in the end of y^e high hilles: on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles, and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie. By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe, about a mile and a halfe from the shore, and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South, southwest and somewhat more into the sea, as the winde will permit you, for there are other Islandes and cliffes, being where you may passe by, (as I saide before) at fourteen fadome water: it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome: from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are no∣thing but Ilandes and cliffes, which hauing past, you come to see the Fort of Mangalor, as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe, from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor: from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar, which is ••. miles, let your course here be south southeast, & at 18. fadom deep: from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles, & y^e course is south southeast & 18

fadome deepe, from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course, and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles, the course beeing south, southeast, and at twelue & ten fadome deepe, which is a good way.

The 17. Chapter. The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall, written by the said Rodri•• de Ligos.

THe towne of Cochiin lieth vn∣der nine degrees, and ••/•• rather lesse than more, and departing out of Cochiin towards Por∣tingall, you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come •• miles from Cochiin, and being there you shall so set your course, that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Ma••ale, you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands, although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes, yet to say truth there are none. Those Islandes being past, it is good to take your course Southwest, till you come to foure degrees, and from thence south southwest, to three degrées, on the south side of the Equinoctiall, from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place. The compasse li∣eth northwest a strike and a halfe, beeing vn∣der three degrees on the south side of the line, then you begin to haue the thunder out of the west, and northwest, with a stiffe winde, and from thence you shall hold south and south, & by west, to ten or twelue degrees, in which you shal haue the wind southeast vnder these twelue degrees, the compasse holdeth north∣westward a strike and •• parts, but shall not therfore be made any abatement in your rec∣koning: for it is often found that the water or streame doth there run to the west, which would then be two faults: for that as I vn∣derstand it in this course, you must account all that is said the ship hath gone, because you shall likewise find streames that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees, (as I said be∣fore til you be vnder 15. degrees, thē you haue the winde sometime south southeast, then you must not lie westward for it is not good, but rather runne east and east southeast, alwaies keeping good watch to the eightéenth degrée, vnder the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Baxios dos Garagiaus, and hauing a south-East wind, then it is good to hold your course southwest, vntill you discouer the Island of Diego Rod••ges, and if it lieth right before you then you shall sée some of the birdes cal∣led Alcatrases, and some hearbes called Sa∣•• driuing in the water, and there the compasse goeth no higher, but beginneth from thence againe to diminish or lessen, when you are past this Island or the point thereof, then runne southwest, and southwest, and by west to 26. degrees, vnder the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence, & as soone as you are vnder this height, then you shall hold your course west, southwest to 29. degrees, and from thence west and west and by south, and to know when you are north and by south with the I∣sland of Saint Laurence, that is with the middle of the vttermost land on the south side, then marke the compasse well▪ and if you bee by the countrey aforesaid, then your compasse will bee a strike and 1/•• one from the other, northwestward, from thence you shall hold your course, as winde and weather serueth, for being from about the 15. of Aprill, till the last of May, it is necessary to haue the Firme land on boarde: for that there, at those times you haue the winde North, and north∣west▪ and being in the monthes of Februarie and March, then the winde is east and south, where you must rule your course as the wind serueth, and being right with the land north, & south, then the compasse shall leaue a strike rather more than lesse to the Northwest, which is a certaine signe to bee right against it, but if it be more, then assure your selfe you are not by the land, then beeing 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land, you shall see gréene wa∣ter, but you finde no ground. The compasse that I speake of shall be sixe, and euen at the Cape das Agulhas, with those that make them leane northeastward in Portingall, a halfe strike rather lesse then more, and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas, and he∣therwards, as long as you haue not muddie ground, you are not at the Cape das Agul∣has: wherefore spare not often to cast your lead, for it will be for your owne good. Pas∣sing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza, it is not good to saile north∣west, as long as you haue ground, for that therewith you should not passe the Cape de Bona Speranza, but being past it, then runne northwest, til you come to 16. degrees, vnder the which height the Island of Saint Hele∣na doth lie, or to 16. degrees and 1/•• and when you come to that height, then run west and somewhat southerlie, or the first meale tide west, and by south, because of the compasse of the sea in some streames, for I thinke you shall finde no more heights, although you should sayle west, and by south, and sayling on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further, but no more, and when you perceiue the Island and cannot reach it by day, then strike all your small sayles, holding about 5.

miles from thence, in such manner, that in the night time you hold west, and west, and by north, there the compasse beareth full northeast halfe a strike, and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza, to this Island, with the aduantage of the compasse as it ought to be, you shall find that it lieth aboue seauentie miles more westward, then it standeth in the Sea Card, departing from this Iland to saile to Portingall, and to sée the Iland called As∣cention, you shall run northwest, and north∣west, and by west for 70. miles, then you shal goe somewhat Easternly as some doe then it wil be needful to saile 100. miles northwest, and by west, and from thence northwest, vn∣till you come by the generall wind, but come no nearer vnto the land, for then you should not make a good voiage, and although the south winde doth continue longer in this course, which bringeth you to twelue & four∣téene degrées, on the north side, yet leaue it not for that, neyther put close vnder the coast of Guinea, when you haue the general wind although you might more westernly, neyther leaue off therefore to follow your course, for it will be large enough, althougl, sometimes it scanteth, because you are close by the land. It is good to kéepe 150. or 200. miles from the coast: for although that by the sea cardes you finde your selfe to bee two hundred miles from the land, notwithstanding you are a good way nearer, the reason whereof is, that you sayle from the point of the Island of S. Helena, which lieth in the sea carde, and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles west∣ward, as aforesaid, and although the pointes doe assuredly lie towards the Island Flores, it therfore maketh no reason that it is not so, as I say, for that in the course through the sea, where you finde the hearbe Sargosso, the winde being there alwaies northeast, the sea or streame runneth to the Antilhas, or fore Iland of the Spanish Ilandes, whereby the ships doe so little multiplie in the course of Sargosso, & if these waters and streames doe chance to meete the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso, it happeneth often times that the ships beare too loofeward, but very seldome, and it happeneth oftentimes, that by Guinea the streame runneth north∣ward, and being somewhat neere the land, then the water draweth you presently to the land, also the winde comming most out of the northwest and north, which letteth you from sayling northwest, and being to Sea∣ward you shal rather haue a northeast wind, and although you haue many meanes to kéepe you from going close vnder the coast of Guinea, I set this downe here, because I haue noted it my selfe: for that all the ships, in what course soeuer they be, which present∣ly winde themselues to kéepe aloofe from the coast of Guinea, being in the course of Sar∣gosso, they haue no full winde, but onelie northeast windes, and sometimes calmes, which sailing to lee ward you find not, where you haue the winde east, and east southeast. All the shippes that come from the Antilhas or Spanish Ilandes, the scarsest windes that they finde are out of the East, where∣by you may vnderstand, that when you hold farre off from Guinea, it is no cause of hauing a longer Voyage: but you shall the sooner finde a better and fuller winde, and so when you come vnder twentie degrees, and that the compasse keepeth steedie to twentie fiue degrees, then you are not to lee ward, there you beginne to sée the hearbe Sargosso, whereby that hearbe is called Sargosso, and make no reckning of being too loofeward or too léeward, for there is no certaintie thereof: so when you saile north and northeast, and that the néedle of the compasse lieth not north westward, thē be wel assured that the Iland Flores is right before you, continuing so till you come to the Iland of Fayael, (which is one of the Flemmish Ilands called as Ilhas dos Alcores.) The compasse that within S. Helena was full halfe a strike Northeast∣ward, will be full if you marke it well, and when you come vnder thirtie sire, or thirtie nine degrees, and ⅓ then you shall see the I∣land Flores, with some Torteaur in the wa∣ter, and being fortie miles from the Iland Flores, towardes the coast, then you shall sée the birdes Garagiaus and Duckers, and the compasse will in a manner be euen, and if there be any difference, it will bee somewhat northeastward: for from the Iland Flores to the Iland Fayael, the compasse is full as six, as I said before.

The 8. Chapter. The course and Nauigation from India, to the Cape de Bona Spe∣ranza, set downe by another Portingall Pilot.

WHEN you depart from Co∣chiin, to sayle for Portingall, you must doe your best to get vnder tenne degrees

and a halfe, till you be 50. miles West south west from it, whereby you will bee scarse vnder 10. degrées, vnder the which hight ly∣eth the Ilands Mamales, for the streame will alwaies drawe you to the middle of the Channel, betwéene these Ilands and the I∣lands of Maldiua vnder 9. degrées & a halfe, you must passe full forward without séeing a∣ny of those Ilands, and go shoare vnder 9. de∣grées & a quarter, although in the Cards they place many false Ilands. And if you chaunce to set sayle from Cochin the 20. of Ianuarie, little more or lesse, then run so that you may passe the Ilands on the southwest, and south∣west and by south, vntill you bee vnder the Equinoctial line, because you go late to sayle, and it may be that the wind and weather wil not serue you so well, to holde to Sea ward from the Iland of Brandaon, then you may hold your course betwéene the Ilands called Dos Irmaos, lying vnder 4. degrées on the south, and from thence you must take your course to the Ilands of Pedro Mascharen∣has, and so following your way, if it chaunce being vnder 4. degrées southward you haue much thunder, lightning and rayne, because commonly it is found there in the moneth of Februarie, as I my selfe haue tryed, vntill 14. degrées, then doe your best, to get vnder 14. or 15. degrées, for commonly vnder 15 or 16. degrées you shall find southeast winds and then put no further into the Sea, but passe betweene the Iland Brandaon, and the Iland of Lopo Soares, which is a good course and as soone as you are past the Iland, then take your course by the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa, betwéene the which Iland and the Iland of Pedro Mascherenhas, you haue a good way, so that you come to passe 14. or 15 miles from the Iland of Saint Laurence, from thence set your course West southwest till you come vnder 29. degrées, and then run West, and West and by South, to 34. de∣grées or as farre as you will, by this course running in this sort, comming within 50. or 6••. miles of the land called Terra do Natal you shall see many Birdes, and the more it stormeth & is foule weather, the more Birds you shall see, and if you see many, then be as∣sured you are farre from the land, and when you loose the sight of them, then looke well to your selfe, for the closer you are by the land, you loose the sight of them altogether, vnlesse it bee the blacke Rauens with white billes, & the neerer you are to the land the more you shall see of them, although they are likewise seene at the least 20. miles from the shore, but feare not, when you begin to come to the Iland of S. Laurence, but hold the course abouesaid, and when you beginne to discouer the mouth of the Chanel, betweene Saint Laurence and Mosambique, then you pre∣sently find the runing of the streame towards the Cape de Bona Speranza, and feare not in that country to hold your course southwest for commonly after you haue the wind south, and as much as you haue runne west North∣west, so much you haue furthered your way, but take heede you keepe still from the coast, and so you will make a better Viage, for the streame will driue you to the Cape although the wind helpeth you not, and this is to bee vnderstoode, that when you come late from Cochin, you shall alwaies thereabout finde great West windes, also you must know, that (in March and Aprill, all the way from the furthest point of Saint Laurence to the Cape) commonly there bloweth North and Northeast winds, and if for a day or two it bloweth out of the Southeast, or South, it is a great wonder, therefore make no account of it, for at those times they blowe verie sel∣dome, in all the way aforesaide to the Cape, and the néerer you come to the Cape you find the more northerly windes, but when the North wind commeth mist and fléet, then be sure of West windes, for it is the nature of them in those countries, and you must vnder∣stand, that if you arriue in those countries in a Schrickel yeare (for they are much more dangerous then other years, because the con∣iunction of the heauenly Planets and bodies as then are different, as also the inferiour bo∣dies, that are subiect to the superiour, where∣by they are gouerned:) then you shall finde from 30. degrées vpwards, that as soone as you haue a northerly winde with a small or miseling rayne, that there followeth great and foule weather, then looke well to your selfe, and take great héede, least it fall not sud∣dainely vppon you, for it by vnaduisednes it should fall forwards vpon you, it were not possible for you to find any meanes to keepe your selfe from being ouerwhelmed in the sea without the speciall fauour of God, for that they come with most great furie and outra∣giously, but if you chance in the beginning of Februarie to bee by the furthest point of S. Laurence 70. or 80. miles, inward to the Sea, then take your course to the Cape Das Agulhas, for then you shall find the windes alwaies Southeast, so you passe not further into the Sea then 36. degrees, which Naui∣gation you shall make departing out of In∣dia, in the ninth of December, you haue ground by the Cape Das Agulhas at twen∣tie and twentie fiue miles from the land at a hundred and a hundred and thirtie Fadome déepe, vnder thirtie sixe degrees and a halfe.

The 9. Chapter. The Nauigation or course from Monte De••••n to Portingal, which is the chiefe hill in India, and lyeth in the countrie of Malabar, sixe miles Northwarde from Cananor, and from Goa sixtie one miles Southward.

DEparting from the hill or Monte Delijn towards Por∣tingall, by the way without the Iland of Saint Laurence so set you Northeast, & south∣west, with the hill Monte Delijn, taking your course East, and East, and by South, and then you shall come by an Iland lying vnder 10. degrées and a halfe, fiftie miles from Monte Delijn, and then you must take your course Southwest, and Southwest and by West, and then you shal come 25. miles beyond this Iland, vnder the hight of 9. degrées and frac34;. taking care not to goe more southward towardes the Iland of Maldiua, from whence halfe a mile it is déep and faire, and as soone as you are past this I∣land whether it be early or late in the yeare, then runne southwest and southwest and by South, vntill you haue past the line, and if there you finde the wind West, then runne South, and South and by West, if you can, if not southward, which is a good way, and in this course you hold fréely without feare, if in this course from 13. degrées vpwards, you find diuers Birdes called Garagiaus, flying in companies together, feare not therefore to follow your course, & being late in the yeare, then alwaies keepe on the South side, there∣by to auoide the drougthes called O•• Baixos de Lopo Soares, and Garagiaus, lying vn∣der 16. degrées holding this course you may boldly sayle both by day and night, for you shall find no let as I my selfe haue well try∣ed. The 16. degrées not being past, you must also passe betweene the drougthes aforesaid, and the Iland of Brandaon, and comming to the hight, there loose a nights sayle to bee the surer, and make your account that when you find many Birdes called Garagiaus, with o∣ther speckled Birdes among them, flying in companies together, then you are 40. miles beyond the Ilande, from whence you shall saile southwest, and southwest and by South, for certaine meale tides, and it being early in the yeare, when you set sayle from India, then auoide all those Ilands and drougthes, and take your course to Sea wards towards the Cape Das Agulhas, and if it chance that about the seuenth of Februarie you find your selfe 100. miles little more or lesse, from the furthest point of the Iland of S. Laurence, that is vnder his hight as I haue béene, then runne West southwest vntill you bee vnder the hight of the Cape de Bona Speranza, take héede to the streame, that might deceiue you, because there in Februarie, they runne verie swift, by reason of the East windes which as then blow verie swiftly, & so runne your course to the Cape de Bona Speranza till you be vnder 36. degrées and a halfe, and when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas, then looke when it is noone by the Astrolabe, and if as then it is likewise noone by the sunne Diall, or not wanting aboue the thicknesse of a thréede, then it is a good signe, as well outward, as comming backe to Portingall, for ther the néedles of the Compasse are right and a like, and being vpon the one side or the other, they will lie either Northeast ward, or Northwest ward, as you are past the Me∣ridionall line, and so much it differeth from equalitie with the Sunne Diall, also when you come to the Cape Das Agulhas, or fur∣ther forward, then looke vpon the water, and if it be gréene, then turne backe againe vnder 36. degrées and a halfe, and cast foorth your Lead, and you shall find 30. fadome deepe, and being vnder 36. degrées 2/••. degrées you shall find 90. fadome, and then you shall not sée many blacke Rauens with white billes, nor Alcatrases, but on both sides of the Cape Das Agulhas you shall sée many, both on the coast and 20. miles to Sea ward, but not fur∣ther, and you shall find the water (so that you be not vpon the depthes aforesaid) light and gréenish, as also some of the Sas-been driu∣ing in the water, and as soone as you haue found grounds, without séeing the land of Cape de Bona Speranza, then runne still a∣long by this ground till you loose it, and then bee assured that you are past the Cape Das Agulhaas, then holde your course West Northwest, and so you shall find 12. miles from the Cape, and when you begin to leaue it, then you shall begin to sée thicke Reedes swimming vppon the water, for the space of ten or fiftéene miles from thence. In the course aforesaid, and when you sée them, it is a good tooken and you may be assured to haue past the Cape de Bona Speranza, when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then marke the Sunne Diall, and the water of the ground, and they will shew you when you are there, for by this Cape, the néedles of the Compasses are fix and euen, and with∣in or without that Cape, they lie either Northeastward or Northwest ward, as I said before, the Nauigation from the Cape

de Bona Speranza to Portingal is without danger to the Equinoctiall, for that you al∣waies find a Southeast wind, and from the line to Portingall it is dayly sayled, whereby it is commonly knowne to euerie simple Pi∣lot, yet such as are desirous to know it, may sée it in this Booke, where it is set downe, as also in mine owne Viage from India to Portingall where it is particularly declared till you come to the towne of Lisbone.

The 10. Chapter. Of the right tokens and knowledge of the Cape Das Correntes and the Ilands as Ilhas Premeiras and of all the Hauens and coasts of Mosambique.

THe bankes of Soffala begin at the Cape de S. Bastian, and reach to the Ilands Pri∣meras all along the coast, and the coast lyeth North and South to Soffala, and hath somwhat of North and West, & South and East, herein are some ryuers, but onely fit for small shippes, the ryuer called Mataca, or Monemone lyeth vnder 21. degrées and a halfe, it is a small ryuer, beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe, and for a marke hath a high trée stan∣ding on the South side, and along the shore some Sandie dounes, which in sight shew like Ilands without trées, on the North side lie certaine shallowes, you enter into the Ha∣uen Northwest on, that is on the side where the trées stand, and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fa∣dome déepe. Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vn∣der 20. degrées and a halfe, and on the South side hath a high Palme trée, and the land on the same side is like a hooke, and if you desire to put into Quiloane, although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes, you may well doe it, being high water, but you must take heede of a drougth, lying thrée myles from the Hauen. This Hauen at high wa∣ter is fiue Fadome déepe, and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water, with muddie ground, you enter therein West, Southwest, and Southwest and by West, and the drougthes aforesaide lie East, Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane. From Mataca or M••nemone to Quiloane you shall see land, at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe, and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe, then you shall be fifteen myles from the land, & shall find Corall vpon the ground, and from thence inward small sands, sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East, without the poynt or hooke, til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe, and till you sée Soffala: and if you desire to stay there, then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome, which is 6. or 7. miles from the land: the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare, therefore you can not put into it with∣out one of the countrie Pilots, and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side: & sailing frō thence to Mosambique, you must runne East, till you come to fourty fadome water, and from thence East north east, running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras, you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast, find smal, thinne, blacke sand, mixed with the earth, although you sayle close in sight of the land. Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees, and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½, and the riuer of Cuama vn∣der eightéene and ••/4: and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama, North East and South West, beeing thirtie myles, and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama, to take in fresh water, you must enter with a small Boate, for within it is all fresh water, from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras, you runne along the coast east and West, and somewhat East and by north and West and by South. There are two sights of land, and beeing vnder eighteene degrees, you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land, for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small: the course is fif∣tie miles. The Riuer called Dos Bonis Si∣nais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾, and hath these markes, that is vppon the North east syde: at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées, and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand, and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes, there is a sand Hill or Downes, which farre off sheweth like an Iland: the entrie is on the South West syde, along by the sand: the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome, and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water: you can not see the entrie as you are without, but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land, that hath a heape of trees stan∣ding vppon it, which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe, and the neerer you drawe to the land, the lesse you see thereof, so

that beeing in the Riuer, you see nothing at all, because it is hindered by the other bran∣ches. The Channell of the Ilandes Pri∣menas, and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one, and you sayle East, North east, and West south west, and it is 30 myles, with tenne or twelue fadome deepe, and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land, and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind, you may freelie inough goe close vnto it, for it is deepe and passing good ground.

The first of y^e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees & ½, & if you desire to run be∣twéene them, then runne Southwest from the Iland, and you shall freelie enter the cha∣nell without feare, for it is déepe inough, for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland: and if you desire to put in there with a west wind, then goe close to the Iland, running to the middle therof▪ towards the south syde, where you may anker, within the length of a great shot, at 6 or 7 fadome déepe, and desiring to passe either in or out be∣twéene the droughtes (which lie Northeast) you may very well doe it, and though you beare all your sayles, kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland, then to the droughthes in the middle Iland, for it is all one vpō what syde of the Iland you sayle, for there is no cause of feare, but onlie where you sée the wa∣ter breake: and desiring to anker by the mid∣dle Iland, you may fréely doe it, and that close by it, for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind, but not with an East wind: in the middle way, on that side which lyeth against the firme land, there standeth a heape of trees, by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you, if necessitie requireth, and lyeth a little inward from the strand, and if you can not well goe farre in∣ward to the lake, doe but digge in the strand, and you shall presentie find fresh water, but it must be when it is an east wind▪ for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore, that you are not able to stay there with your boate. The middle I∣land, which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea, but from thence to the drou∣thes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles, and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles, and is all one course with the Ilandes: you may fréelie passe by the land, with what shippe so euer you will, for it is déepe inough: all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares, one running through the other, al déep and good ground: so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land, at the least eight fadome déepe, but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes. There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa, which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides. These Ilandes of Ango∣xas are 4, and betwéen the two middle Ilan∣des ly the aforesaid sand drougthes, wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them, for they are dangerous. There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa tow∣ardes Mosambique, which euerie springtide is couered with the sea, hauing other sandes round about it, that are alwaies couered with the sea, therefore I wish you to take héed of them: you may from thence runne along the shore, where it is déepe water, from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mo∣sambique, there is a hauē, called Os Coarai∣as, that is the Corales, from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif, which is very dangerous, and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it, and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it, wherefore you must take héed vn∣to it, for many shippes haue striken vpon it, and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it: when you passe it, you must put 3 miles from it in∣to y^e séa, North east & northeast & by East, be∣ing by night, but by day you may sayl w^t more securitie, and looke about you, yet nothing go∣ing neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe: in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte, and following your course North east, you shall come right vpon the I∣lands of Mosambique: if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte, then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land, til you be at 15 fadome, and there you may an∣ker, for it is good groūd, yet but in few places, only vnder the point of Musicatte, at 20 fa∣dome and more, you shall haue faire ground: the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west, be∣ing 18 miles distant: from thēce to Mosam∣bique you runne North east along the coast: the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes Northeast & South west and some what North east and by East, and South west and by West: the land of the I∣landes Premeiras, on the side of Mosambi∣que lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ & you runne along by those Ilands and sands, East and West, and East by North and West & by south: and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse, within a length of a great shot of the Ilands, yet bee not abashed, but beware of the outside, which is full of stones and other filth, whereby no meanes you can anker, as being nothing but wood & ston••: if you chance to be in the mid∣dle way betwéene the Ilands & the drougths, with an East wind, then you must passe in

& out betweene the first Iland & the drougth, which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras, on the side of So••••ala, as also from the third Iland towardes Mosam∣bique, running along the West side at 7.10 & 12 fadome déepe: the other drougthes lie in the middle way, vnder the stone cliffes, therefore you néed not feare them, but be∣twéene the Iland from the trees, that are vp∣on the East side, you can by no meanes passe, for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes. From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras, and Northeast and south west, with the first Iland, 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe, hoth in lēgth & breadth, the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras, lieth the Riuer Quilimani, where the Coast reacheth East and West, and somewhat East & by North, and West and by south, and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land, where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani, which you must take héed of, for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea, and if you find your self inwards from Ca∣uo das Correntes, you may at all times an∣ker, for it is good ground, because you are vp∣on the banks, and haue no cause to feare, be∣cause the wind blowing from the land wil al∣waies helpe you, whereby you may put into the sea, as you thinke good.

The 11. Chapter. The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago, that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob, which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala.

HE that desireth to sayle from India to Po••to Piqueno or the small hauen, lying in Bēgala, I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon, he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill, holding his course along the shore, to a place called Briniao, which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin, (that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast, southwest∣ward) & from thence holding his course south, till he be vnder 6 degrées & ¾, and from thence South east to 5 degrées and ⅔, and being ther he must runne East, till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon, for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla (that is the poynt of the Galley) is the farthest land from thence lying in the south, vnder 6 degrees: therefore if you hold your course East, till you be vnder 5 de∣grees and ⅔, you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon: this way and course you must alwaies hold, setting out of Coch••••, from the 10. of Aprill, to the 20. of the same, (as I sayd before,) for yf you depart later from thence, you must stay longer, because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South, at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest, and Northwest, blowing verie strong and blustering: whē you sée the Iland Seylon, you shall sayle along the coast, East and West, and somewhat East & by North, and West and by south, to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees, and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr. & ½ 7 miles distant one from the other, in the same course of East and West, and East and by North, and West and by south, from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth, are al∣most 28 miles. Beeing 10 or 15 myles be∣yond the drougthes, you shall sayle North∣east, till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½, from thence running North, whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land, about tenne or twelue myles from the land, called O pagode de Iorganatte (that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte, which is a verie good course for this voyage: when you perceiue this land, which hath certaine high Hilles, you shall see some round Ho∣uels, that are rounder and higher then the Hilles, standing vppon them, called Palur, by the which you shall passe along North∣east, and Southwest, and somewhat north∣east and by East, and Southwest and by south, vntill you come to the thinne and low land, and passing by it, you shall come to a Riuer, which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand, and an other plaine with a ho∣uell, hauing on the one side somewhat further in the shew of an other thicke Houell with trées, and kéeping on your course til you come right ouer against y^e riuer, thē the houels séem to be right ouer against the other thicke lād: it sheweth thus when you are about a myle & ½ & to the sea ward from it: frō this riuer to the first Pagode or Idole, there is about three or foure myles, and from this Pa∣gode forward you finde no more high hils, like that you haue past before, and passing straight from thence some of them shew as if they had tables or plaines vpō them: this Pa∣gode lieth ful vnder 20 degr. your best way is alwaies to looke out for it, as being requisite for you thereby to make a good voiage: beyōd this first Pagode, there stādeth an other Pa∣gode,

as great as the first, with 2 or 3 small Pagodes standing somewhat further: from y^e first Pagode to y^e secōd is about 4 miles, and the coast from the one to the other lyeth East and West, here you must not kéepe too close to the shore, for you shall hardly put off again because it maketh a créeke, likewise before you come to the first Pagode you must kéepe off from the land, because two miles before you come at it, there lyeth a small drougth, stretching a mile into the Sea. From the first Pagode to the seconde, you sée certaine houels and trées, and from the second Pago∣de to Sataguan, it is a lower land, all waste and wilde ground, being altogether bare to the point called a Punta das Palmerias (that is the point of the Palme trees, and you run West along the coast, from the Pagode a∣foresaid, to a point with a Riffe (lying 12. miles from the point of Palmerias) there ly∣eth a riuer, the point aforesaide reacheth a great halfe mile into the Sea, you runne a∣long the coast Northeast, and from the afore∣said Riffe point to the Palmerias, the coast runneth Northeast, and Northeast and by East, and to knowe the Riffe and the lande thereof you must vnderstand that the land of the Riffe, is greater and thicker then the o∣ther land of the Cliffe, and maketh show of an Iland, and presently somwhat further you shall see nine or ten trees, shewing like round houels, from the Pagode to this Riffe are a∣bout 12. miles, from thence forward you shall runne along the coast at nine & ten fa∣dome deepe, vntill you come to the said Pal∣merias, whereof the fore part of the land is verie low, hauing a bare houel, which shew∣eth it selfe like the Arenas Gordas, or redde Downes, lying by Saint Lucas de Bara∣meda, in the coast of Spaine, frō this donne or houel to the Palmerias, it is altogether a low and bare land without any trees or bu∣shes, the Palmerias were wont to be ten or twelue Palme trees, now there is but one, hard by the same Palmerias on the side of Sa∣taguan there stande certaine Houels, and from thence forwards, you haue no pointes, hookes, trees, nor any more bushes, but the land for a mile way is nothing but like a Riffe. And when you see the point of Palme∣rias, then you shall holde your course East, vntill you bee 12. Fadome deepe, and from thence Northeast, till you find eight Fadome and a halfe, and being in the daye time, you shall presently see land, which shal be beneath all the Riffes, and if the land be couered with any dampes or mistes, you shall then not see it before you bee at 4. fadome deepe. This course you shall hold with a Compasse, that faileth not, for if it doth, you must make your reckening thereafter, this land whereby you shall passe is a flat low land, without either bush or tree, and passing forward along the coast, you shall vpon the East side perceiue a long blacke Houel, like a Champana with∣out a Mast (which is an Indian Caruell) and somewhat further from this Houell, there are a companie of trées, which are about thrée or foure, that shew greater then the ho∣uell, these trees stand somewhat low, and a little from these trees beginneth the Riffe of the countrie of Orixa, which hauing seene, you shal presently see the water to Seaward breake, which is vpon the drougthes of Ben∣galen, for there the Chanell is smalest, and behind you leaue many Riffes on the side of Bengalen, which doe all lie to Sea ward, wherefore you cannot see them, and passing by them, you approach the Riffe of the land of Orixa, for although you sayle close by, you neede not feare other then that you see before your eyes, the depth is three Fadome, with small blacke Sand in the bottome. On Bengalen side you shall haue foure or fiue fa∣dome water with muddie grounde, on the which side you must not goe, for that beyond that muddie ground, you should come to a banke of Sa••••, comming from Bengalen, when you find this ground, you shall (if néed be) come Northeast and by North, vntil you be at thrée fadome, for this is the right way, the aforesaid Riffe of Orixa being past, you shall presently find more depth, and if you de∣sire to runne along by the land of Orixa, then set your course right vpon the first point, that you sée before you, the least depth you shall find is thrée fadome, which is the right way vntill you be close by the land, where you shal find 5. or 6. fadome déepe, and if you néede a∣ny wood to burne, then goe on the other side of the land of Bengalen, for there the wood is better then on the side of Orixa, but hauing done you must again put to the side of Orixa vntill you bee past two ryuers, lying on the same side of Orixa, whereof the first is liker a Créeke then a ryuer, the other lyeth about a mile further in, which hath a great mouth or entrie, two or thrée miles further beyond that Riuer, there are some flowing Beken with trees, & a mile beyond them, there is woode or wildernesse full of thicke trees, like Palme trees, from the beginning whereof you must crosse ouer to the other side of the land, called Guinette) right vppon a tree, standing on the same side, which is higher then all the rest, and standeth on the left side of the riuer called Chandecan, from thence forwarde it is all shallowes, wherefore you must passe

further therabouts with a ful sea, if you desire to passe through the channell of the land, you shall take your course as I said before, & from Palmieras to the Northeast, you may runne at fiue fadome, and being by day you shall runne at thrée fadomes, and running at this depth along by the land, although you come sometime to lesse depth, yet you néede not feare, with the which course you shall sée the Riffe of Orixa, and when you sée it, you shal make towardes it, and make 2/••: parts of the way towards the land, and a third part to∣wards the Riffe, and so you haue the right way as aforesaid.

The 12. Chapter. An other description of the same course, from India to Porto Piqueno, or the small Hauen of Bengalen, set downe by an other Pilot, large and better des∣cribed, with the whole situation and course thereof.

SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Pique∣no, in the kingdom of Bengalen, outward about the Ilande of Zeylon, you shall take your course a∣long the coast of India, till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin, which is the furthest point of the land of In∣dia, from thence taking your way crosse o∣uer, for from thence forward it is a good countrie, and make the shortest crosse you can, thereby to goe sure, and not to fall in∣wards, or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon, and when you sée Barreias, which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fif∣téene or twentie myles, and from thence for∣ward you shall shorten your way, as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées, and be∣ing there, you shall sayle Eastwarde, as much as you thinke conuenient, that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle. which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side, lying vnder sixe degrees, when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle, to be assured thereof, make towards the Iland, to know it, before you come to the drougths, betwéene Tanadare (which is fyue myles from Punta de Gual∣la) and the first drouth, where commonlie all the shippes know the land, such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen, or to any of the Hauens thereof, as Porto Piqueno, or Porto Gran∣de, that is, the small or the great Hauen, where the Portingalles doe traffique, and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie, goe as close vnto it as you will, but not pas∣sing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land, because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore, whereof we know not certainely the danger, besides the sandes, betwéene the which and the land you may passe through, as hereafter shal be shewed, and sayling thus as I haue sayd, along the shore, you must vn∣derstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land, and when you are further to landward in, you begin to see certaine hilles, that is thrée great hilles, right against it, and then you shall presently sée the first drougth, betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe, for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland, run through that way: in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe, of faire, & in some places stony ground, and you néed not feare any thing, but onelie that you see before your eyes. This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land, you see a houell standing alone, and no more in all that country to be séene, 6 miles further from that first great drougth: there lieth an other small drougth, which is distant, Northeast, & Southwest, and somewhat northeast and by East, and southwest and by West: this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼, about 2 miles from the land: and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land, you may well doe it, for it is •• or 6 fadome déepe at low water, with sandie ground, which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes, as well going as comming backe again, but if your ship be great, then it is better to sayle about further into the sea. Those drougths or sandes béeing past, then runne along by the land, and neuer put from it, for it is your best course to goe close by it, and passing by the I∣land of the hilles, and the high land, you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest. This hill is called O Capello de Frade, that is, the Fryers coule, and lieth full vnder 8 degrées: I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade, because you come vpon no direct line: this fryers coule maketh a point of lād, frō y^e

whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea, whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles, and you run by the coast north and south, which is all low land with a bankie ground, and from thence you shall see no land, but the land that lieth inward fiue miles. Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer. Trinquanamale is a great hauen, beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth, & all low land, but very déepe round about, he that will anker therein may lie vnder cer∣taine Ilands, and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua, the other to it is all low land, to know Trinquanamale a farre off, at the mouth thereof on the north side, lieth a yellow Sandie Downe, and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes, two long hilles rising vp, and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie, and no other high land, neither behinde them, nor before thē in all that coast, comming by Trinquanamale, and hauing knowne it, you must then presently crosse o∣uer, for there it is best to follow your course, and from thence you must runne North, and North and by east, alwaies reckning the de∣clining or winding of the compasse, and if it be in the monsons of the winds, in the month of August, then you shall sayle full north, be∣cause as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea, and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees, which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Gua∣do variin, lying on the coast of Choraman∣del, which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa, and being vnder 17. degrees, from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land, to make a good voiage, alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées & ½ with∣out séeing land, because that vnder 19. de∣grées, there lieth a riuer called Puacota, frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea, there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship, which may easily be seene, for it lieth a∣boue the water, you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes, all this coast from the point of Guadovariin, is altogether great thicke land, and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota, to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles, and you runne by the coast Northeast, and Southwest, aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill, called a Seira de Palura, that is the hill of Palura, which is the highest hill in all that coast. This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees, and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira terra alta, that is, the last high land, you keep the same course along the shore, and is in length seauen miles, and lieth full vnder ninetéene degrees, and ⅔. I set downe this description of the last high land, because such as sayle along by the coast, may vnderstand that there all the hilles and high landes doe end, and from thence forward it is altogether low land, and sandie strandes, till you come to the place called as Palmerias, or Palme trées: from the last high land, or Der∣radeira terra alta, to the riuer called Rio de Manicapatan, the coast runneth northeast, and southwest, and reacheth 5. miles, and to know when you are right against the Riuer of Manicapatan, you shall sée a high trée standing alone vpon the sea side, and is a very flat land on the sea side, hauing a bankie and shallow ground, the trée standeth on the left hand of the entrey into the riuer, from Ma∣nicapatan you runne along the coast East, Northeast, and west southwest, to the Pa∣gode de Iorganate, that is the Idoll or tem∣ple of Iorganate, and reacheth thrée miles. This Pagode of Iorganate lieth vnder 20. degrées and ¼, from this Pagode of Iorga∣nate, to another great blacke Pagode or I∣doll, the coast runneth east and west, & some∣what east and by north, and west & by south, and reacheth 7. miles. This blacke Pagode lieth not full vnder 20. degrees and ½, from this blacke Pagode to the riuer of Cayega∣re the coast runneth northeast, and southwest and somwhat northeast and by east, and south west and by west, and reacheth 10 miles, the riuer of Cayegare lieth not full vnder 21 de∣grees, and about 4. miles before you come to it, there lieth 5. houels which shew like a Ha∣uen of the Sea, built with Cottages, in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid, there lieth two sandes, running a good mile southwestward, and at the entrey therof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for halfe a mile into the sea, the entrie of the riuer is 4. fadome déep, and you goe in and come forth northwest and southeast, the sandes aforesaid, as you enter, lie on your left hand, and there the depth run∣neth along. To know Cayegare a farre off, you must vnderstand that when you haue passed the houels aforesaid, then Cayegare sheweth like an Iland, hauing three or foure trées higher then the rest, and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode, and somewhat beyond this Pagode, there is a little wood, verie thicke with trées, which séemeth to bée part of Cayegare, and other wood there is none beyond it, by the saide Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downes of red colour, with some water Beecken from the Riuer of Cayegare to the point cal∣led a punta das Palmeiras, the Coast

runneth northeast, and southwest, and some∣what northeast and by east, and southwest, & by west, and reacheth eleauen miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias, you shall sée certaine blacke houels standing vppon a land that is higher then all the land there abouts, and from thence to the point it beginneth againe to be low ground, and right ouer against the houels you shall sée some small, (but not ouer white) sandie Downes, the markes and tokens which you shall finde being right against the point de Palmerias are, that vpon the point there is neyther trée nor bush, and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees, it hath notwithstan∣ding right forth, but one Palme trée. If you fall vppon it by day, being by Caijagate, and desire to follow your way, then saile at the depth of twelue fadomes, northeast, & north∣east and by east, alwaies with your lead rea∣dy in the hand with good care and diligence, and being at 16. fadome, you shall presentlie winde northeast, vntill againe you finde 12. fadome, alwaies keeping at that depth, till you finde but 7. fadome, and lie thereon by night, where you shall anker till it be day, and then hoise vp anker, running the same course of Northeast, and northeast and by north, till you come to foure fadome, and comming thether you shall send a man into the top, to know the land. This coast reacheth East northeast, till you come to a houell, which sheweth like a Champana without a mast, with a boat following it, those Champanas are Caruels of India, wherewith they sayle in the sea, and along the coast, this is the best marke you finde vpon the coast of Orixa, and alwaies take good héed to your depthes, and if they begin to increase, that is, aboue fiue fadome, then you shal presently turne againe to 3. and 3. fadome and ½ scarse, and this is the right course: for that if you saile still at 5. and 6. fadome, you should in the end come on ground, & when you see the houell called Chā∣pana, (as I said before) you shal runne along by it till you sée thrée trées standing together, yet somewhat distant each from other, which trées are called as Aruores da Conhecensa, that is the trées of Markes. Right against those trées lieth the riffe of Orixa, and being to seaward you shall sée the water breake vp∣pon it, on Bengalen side, and you cannot sée the markes aforesaid but in cleare weather, and if it be mistie, darke, or cloudy weather, then haue the lead readie, without neglecting it for you must runne at 3. and ½ and 4. fa∣dome déepe, and you must vnderstand that on the side of Bengalen you finde hard sandie ground, and on the side of Orixa muddie and small blacke sand. I set this downe because I my selfe haue passed ouer it with great ships, being past the riffe of Orixa, and Bengalen, you shall sée the Iland called a Ilha dos Gal∣los, that is the Ilands of Cocks, & you must runne right vpon it without feare, for it is deepe inough, and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks, therfore I counsell you to goe neere to the Iland of Cocks sayling along by it, whereby you shall presently come to a ri∣uer called Rio de Chamdequan, which ha∣uing past, you shall from thence crosse ouer to the side of Orixa, where you shall see a hooke or point of the riuer Angellijn, this point of land will lie northward, and comming the∣ther you shal alwaies haue your lead in hand, and the depth that you shall finde in those pla∣ces, are 3.3. ½ and 4. fadome, but beeing full sea it is deeper, which wil continue till you be right against the riuer of Angelijn: for from thence forward you haue many depthes, and being right against the riuer of Angelijn you shall runne along the shore till you come to a riuer called Gilingoa, & being right against that riuer, I wish you not put too farre from the shore, towards the right hand, for there you finde a sand drougth, whereon Bartholo∣meus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast a∣way with a ship full laden, as hee put out, therefore I aduise you to keepe on the left hand, for there it is deepe enough, from this riuer to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water, you may haue wood to burne, and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette, where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest, vntill you be close to the other side. Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side, the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. & ½ and thrée fadome déepe, till you be on the other side, for there you finde manie depthes, from this place forward you néede no other aduise, for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee, you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood, but I aduise you once againe, that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare, then runne along the coast, till you come to the point das Palmerias, and from thence to 17. fadome deepe, frō thence holding your course northwest, and north∣west and by north, this way must be folow∣ed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe, and then running the same course, till you come to 4. and three fadome, and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather, you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa, but if it be darke and mistie wea∣ther, then runne no more towards the land, keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome, and ½ run∣running

East, for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in, and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes, and if it bee night being at seuentéene fa∣dome, then runne towards the 2. Ilands, and see you anker not, for it is badde ankering there, and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras, running in by night, you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day, wherewith as then you may go in, & if you chance to be there with a small shippe, then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½. till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa: and when you begin to be right against it, then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto, for it is deepe enough, and from the side of O∣rixa it is all banks and shallow ground. The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande, that is to seaward from you, and from thence you must make right with the Island A Yl∣ha dos Gallos, or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn, where you may freely sayle, for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe, but it must bee with a small ship as I said before.

The 13. Chapter. The course from India to the hauen of Aracan, which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande, or the great hauen, lying in the countrie of Bengalen.

SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan, you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon, in manner aforesaid (as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno) running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes (lying full vnder 6. degrées) and vppon the point of the lande, which runneth East and West, comming by this point or hooke, you shall from thence put off from the land, running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward, to come out vnder the Islande, and then let your course be Northeast, and Northeast & by North, till you be vnder 12. degrées, and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne Northeast, till you be almost vnder 20. degrées, which is the height of Aracan, and if then you sée no land, you shall runne East vnto Aracan, vnder the same height of 20. degrées: thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe, wher∣vpon the water breaketh, and at low water is vncouered: it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships, both waies: and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece. The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees, and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it, you shall there find twen∣tie fadome deepe, sandie grounde, and being at 19. degrees and ½. toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground, at the least 6 miles from the shore, and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground, you must be careful at 19 de∣grees and ½. not to runne in with the lande, but do as I said before.

The 14. Chapter. The course from India to the hauen of Martauan, lying in the kingdome of Pegu, with the situation of the coastes.

SAyling from India to Martauan, or to y^e king∣dome of Pegu, you shall hold your course (till you be past the Island of Sey∣lon) as they doe that saile to Bengalen, and being a∣bout the Island, you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon, whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées, and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. de∣grées, you runne on the East side of them, Northeast and Southwest, from the Ilands d' Andemaon, to the firme lande, are aboue 60. miles, and running to Andemaon, you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side, and being past you must (as I said before) make towardes Martauan, (which lyeth vnder 16. degrees) and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande, but better at 13. de∣grees, because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan, (where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest, and if you make with the lande being at 14. de∣grees, you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by, for it is all ouer very deepe, for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore, besides the Island Pulo Comudo, which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan, betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes, notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes, you shall make to∣wardes the side of the Islande, but not too close, where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep, and on the side of the firme land

you haue many sands and shallowes, passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan (be∣ing past that Iland) you shall passe along the shore, where you shall see certaine cliffes ly∣ing towards the sea, which shew like Alma∣dias (which are Indian Scutes, by them v∣sed in y^e riuers) which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan, and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land, and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land: this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum, that is in Pegu spéech, the Lord of Vegarum, for Xemiin is Lord, and Vegarum the name of the land: from thence Northward the land is high, in some places hauing créekes, cliffes and Islandes: before you come to the hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land, that serueth for a marke, hauing close by it two Palme trees: and about two miles fur∣ther you shall see a thicke top of lande, vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an I∣land, which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land, till you be right against it, and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth, and being past this Iland, you shall sée a white houel, which lyeth likewise on the South side: within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish, and before you come to the hauen (comming from the Ilande of Comudo) about a mile, or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land, you shall see a round Islande full of bushes, called A Ilhas de Cebollas, that is, the Island of Onions, by the which Island on the south side thereof, there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake: from this Island to the hauen of Martauan, there are about two miles, & comming from Pulo Comudo, you must put off from it towards the land, holding your course as aforesaid, as not hauing any cause of feare, but onely of that which you sée before your eyes, you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North, there is no other Ilands nor cliffes, which is a verie good marke of this creeke, for that being on this side thereof, you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another, but from thence forward you see not any, as I said be∣fore, but you must bee sure not to passe be∣yond the hauen of Martauan, for that being at twelue fadome, not long after you should fal vpon the drought. This hauen of Marta∣uan is about a mile or a half and a half broad, hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea, and is an Iland called Momua: you may see it as you passe along the shore, from Pulo Comuda, towardes the hauen, you must still keepe at twelue fadome, and comming to 8. or 9. fadome, then you shall anker, for then you are in the hauen; and put no neerer to the shore, neither runne not fur∣ther from the creeke to the banke, for then you shall find lesse depth: this riuer of Mar∣tauan runneth Northeast & Southwest both out and in, but you may not enter therein without a Pilot, for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock, which draweth the water vnto it, there∣fore you cannot enter without a Pilot: also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen, on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke, where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe, which you shal knowe by this, that is, in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish, which you may see, and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ••/4;. and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees: vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands, betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe: also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees, there lyeth some Ilandes, and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar, southwarde there reacheth an Iland: also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast, meeting with some gatheringes of water, you neede not feare them, for it is nothing but the wa∣ter it selfe without any sands, although there lyeth some vpon the coast: there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande, which the in∣habitantes call Viacondam, which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it, but very little fresh water, and nothing els but Pine trees, wherefore you neede not go into it.

The 15. Chapter. The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca.

HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson (which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether) in the Month of Aprill, then (to make a good voyage) you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill, and being out of the hauen, you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées, and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees, and being vn∣der

that height, then you shall runne South∣east almost to fiue degrées, and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Sey∣lon, and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓. and 5. degrees, and ••. from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola, which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin, in the Ilande Sumatra, and comming to the Iland of Gomespola, if you feare not the A∣cherins, (which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra, and deadly enemies to the Portingals) then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra, to the Cape called Taniamburo, lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola, and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca, running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao, which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées, and ⅔. and distant from Malacca 40. miles North∣west and by North, for that such as discouer and come to this Iland, maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca, and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan (which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½. lying with Pulo Sambilao, North and by West, 12. miles, & neere Pulo Batun there is ano∣ther Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles, & vnder 6. deg.) might peraduenture find Southeast windes, which blow much on that coast: therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage, wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin, to make a better voyage.

The 16. Chapter. An other & larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca, with the description of the coasts.

SVch as desire to saile from Goa, or out of India to Malacca, must put 20. miles into the sea, that he may saile without y^e Ilande of Seylon, vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nico∣bar through the middle of the channell, which lyeth vnder 7. degrees, and ½. and in that countrey you must looke to the streame, because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen, and with an East wind into the sea, about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes, there is such a concourse & brea∣king of water and streames, as if there were sands. Whē you com to y^e middle of y^e Ilands of Nicobar, ther you find a channel, lying vn∣der 6. degrees and ½. the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe, where you may passe through without feare, as hauing nothing to fear, but y^t you sée before you, the depth you find there is 12. & 13. fa∣dom, & at the end this channel, by y^e North I∣lande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an I∣land, where you may passe throgh w^t y^t grea∣test shippe that is: the South end of this I∣lande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼. and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées: if you go through the middle of the channell lying vn∣der 6. degrées, you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands, whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland: two of them are great and high, the other small: the fourth lyeth di∣stant from the Ilande about thrée miles, and is a great round Iland, flatte on the top, and Northward you shall see another Iland, ly∣ing vnder 8. deg. the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe, flat at the end, and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée ano∣ther Iland, lying hard by that vnder 8. deg. a flat land, distant from the other about two miles: from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles, and there you néed not feare any thing: at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell, at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland, I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar, thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of A∣cheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra, which are continually thereaboutes, and are deadly e∣nemies to the Portingalles, but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before, although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼. or 8. degrees and ••. for you may passe without danger, for they are all channelles or thorow fares: being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before, you shall take your course to∣wards the Iland Pulo Cuto, you runne be∣tweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West, and somewhat East and by South, and West and by North: the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2/••. to know Pulo Cuto, comming out of the Sea towardes it, vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land, on the shore very low: they are thrée Ilands together, hauing on the South side, on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncoue∣red, & on the North side an other mouth or o∣pening, running between the great Ilande & the Ilande of the sea: in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water, lying by a long point of lande: you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera, which is a small round Iland, without trees, lying vnder 5. deg. and ⅔. the course be∣ing about 100. miles, you run East South∣east, and West Northwest, from Pulo Pe∣ra

to the Iland Pulo Pinaon, are 15. miles, and are one from the other East and west, & somewhat East and by South, & West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande, full vnder fiue degrées and ¼. the marke thereof is, that it is high in the middle, hauing on the North point a round houell, and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande, and comming along by the lande, it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand, at the end wher∣of lyeth an Iland, where there is a place of fresh water: on the South point it is lowe land, making an other Iland. Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North & south, there you must looke well to your selfe, for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke, reaching to a point or booke of high land, which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles: vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe & somewhat more, but towards the land lesse: & when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east, & east & by north, then you shal see Sambilaon: the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sam∣bilaon is 22. miles, and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg. East & West from Pulo Sambilaō, 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland cal∣led A Ilha das Iarres, which is a smal round Iland ful of trees, and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water, but verie little, but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof, the grea∣test wherof nearest the land lyeth in the mid∣dle, in the which on the North side there stā∣deth a houel, on both sides whereof are sandie strandes, wherein are fresh water: likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle, haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands, in the middle whereof where there is an opening, you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands, as well on the sea as the lande side, as also through the channel running be∣tweene them, you may freely passe without feare, for it is deepe enough, & you may anker in sight of the land at 20. & 25. fadome deep. If you desire to passe through the great chan∣nell of Pulo Sambilaon, then you must run south & south and by East to y^e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru, which lie vpon the coast of y^e Iland Sumatra: they are 3 smal flat Ilands, full of bushes and woodes, and when you are within a mile of these Ilands, you shall sayle southeast, southeast & by east, & east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep, towards Pulo Parcelor, which is a high hill lying vppon y^e coast of Malacca, shewing far off to be an Iland, it standeth in a flat land, whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it: frō Pulo Parcelor to y^e point called Cabo Ra∣chado, that is, the clouen point lying ful vn∣der 2. degr. & ½. you saile to Malacca East southeast, & West Northwest, along y^e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels, but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca, you shall presently discouer the I∣lands that lie about halfe a mile from Ma∣lacca close by the land.

The 17. Chapter. To saile from Pulo Sambilaō, or through the great channel to Malacca.

SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru, lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra, you shal hold your course south, for the space of 13. miles, whereby you shal come vpon y^e banke, so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward, as from the Iland das Iarras, (that is the Iland of pots) southeast, & southeast & by south, for you come out al at one place, & whē the Ilands de Aru lie west, & west and by North from you, then cast out your leade, and you shal finde sandy ground, frō thence you shal hold your course southeast, stil casting out your lead, & finding 10. fadome, (kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground) you shal runne southeast, & southeast and by east, but finding 16. & 17. fadome sandie ground, then winde towards the side of Malacca, to 12. & 13. fa∣dome, setting your course againe southeast, & southeast and by east, & if you finde your selfe to be at 10. fadome, then turne againe to the southeast, alwaies séeking to be at 10.12. & 13. fadom, for it is the best ground and depth of y^e channel, & when you see a round hil right before you (which sheweth like an Ilande) y^t is Pulo Parselar, to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch, notwithstāding you shal not let to passe on your way, not cō∣ming nearer to Pulo Parselar, then 2. miles Northeastwarde, for then you are past the drougthes aforesaid, from thence forward put towards the lande, about a mile distant, hol∣ding your course southeast, towardes y^e point of Cabo Rachado, & before you come within 3. miles thereof, you find a Riffe lying foure miles from the coast, which is but 4. fadome deep at high water, & to seawarde frō thence there is a channel of 10. fadom deep, running from the Island of de Aru to Pulo Parselar, you shal vse all the meanes you can to haue the greatest Ilande de Aru, Southwest and southwest & by west from you, holding your course southeast, alwaies at 18. & at the least 17 fadome, & if you wil put from Pulo Par∣selar, to the Ilandes de Aru, you shal let Parse••ar lie Northeast, & northeast & by east,

from you running northwest, & Northwest and by West, alwaies at 16.17. & 18. to 15 fadome deep: this way is not otherwise to be done, for I haue past so my selfe, and founde it a very good way.

The 18. Chapter. The course from Malacca to Goa, with the stretchings, and situati∣ons of the Coastes.

DEparting from Ma∣lacca, to Goa or In∣dia, your best course is to saile a mile, or a mile and a halfe a∣long by the coast of Malacca, alwaies hauing in sight the strikes and neather partes of the Trées that stand vpon the land, till you be at Pulo Par∣celar, and from thence you haue from 16. to 27. and 28. fadome déepe, but you must re∣member not to passe aboue 14. fadome, ney∣ther on the one side, nor the other, and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence, you finde 2. or 3. droughts of stonie cliffes, reaching about halfe a mile into the sea, lying right ouer the cesterne, or the Kinges Bath, by the Portingales called Tanque del Rey, you shall likewise looke that you goe not neere the chéeke of Cabo Rachado, which Cape lieth vnder two de∣grees, and ½ vppon the same Coast of Ma∣lacca Northwest, and by North ten miles distant, as well vpon the Southeast, as the Northwest side, and goe not neare the land by a mile at the least, as I said before: there you haue a good mile and a halfe to the prin∣cipall part of the channell that runneth to Parcelar, and passing by Pulo Pacelor, and desiring to crosse ouer from the droughts, you shall kéepe off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles, because that from it there reacheth a banke that iutteth about halfe a mile into the sea, being (as I said) about two miles frō the land, to passe ouer the droughtes being with a flood, then Pulo Parcelor shall lie East∣ward from you, and at an ebbe, East, North∣east: therefore it is néedefull for you to haue great care of the tides, that you be not decei∣ued, & comming in this sort into those parts, you shall runne west Northwest, kéeping ei∣ther on the one side or the other, as the tides fal, and if you crosse ouer the sea Pulo Par∣celor, it is best for you to kéepe east, and east, and by south from it, and being in the middle way to the Ilands of Daru, lying close vpon the coast of Samatra vnder 3. degrees, west, Northwest, and 30. miles from Malacca: then if you see Pulo Pacelor, let it be betwéen east southeast, and east & by south from you, and yet you haue a good course, and comming towards Pulo Parcelor, you must haue it to lie northeast and southwest, being two miles from it, but when you leaue it to make to∣wards the Ilands of d' Aru, then it is best to haue it east and east, and by south, and being in the sight of the Iland of d' Aru, making to∣wards the great Iland, you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without dan∣ger, for it is all deepe ground. The depthes you shall finde by the droughts aforesaid, pas∣sing through the Channell, are from 10. to 11. fadome, but not aboue, and the greatest depthes you shall finde running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16. and 17. fa∣dome, and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9. & 8. fadome of small fine and blacke sand, or muddy ground, yet your course is good, for you shall presently againe come to 12.13. and 14. fadome, and hauing this depth and ground, and holding the course a∣foresaid, although at some castings, you finde small fine white sand, yet your course is good, but if you finde great sand or shels, then you are out of the channell, and when you finde the ground full of black shels and great sand, I counsell you to seeke againe for fine small and blacke sand, or muddie ground, for the ground of great sand and shels is out of the channell: therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead, to assure your selfe, it is like∣wise good to know the depth with two leads vpon each side of the ship one, with good and carefull ouersight, alwaies hauing your an∣kers ready, with a cable of 12. or 15. fadome long, if need be, therewith to help your selfe, & because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor, I thought it good likewise to set downe vnder what height it lieth, although it is sufficiently set downe us the Sea Cardes, it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca, Northwest, and by North, about fiftéene miles distant, ful vnder thrée degrées: also you must remember, that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor, to the Iland of d' Aru, being in the middle way, you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East, and East, and by South from you, and beeing somewhat nea∣rer the Islands, then Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast, that is as you goe neere the Islandes, for that running in this sort you haue a good course, and are sure and safe from the droughtes, and if by night you passe ouer the droughts, then you shall marke the land in the day time, as I said be∣fore, hauing a good winde, alwaies looking to your tides that they deceiue you not, dri∣uing you vpon the one or the other side: for there the streame runneth verie strong, as

well in the flood, and as in the ebbe, alwaies ruling your selfe according to the tides, and holding your course in such manner, that you may cast out your lead, and as the aforesaide great Island of d'Aru lieth Southwest from you, béeing about two miles from it, then you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it, so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra, holding your course as aforesaide, towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare, because the monson, or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea, and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent, you shall doe your selfe great hurt, and pro∣cure great hinderance in your Voyage: the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao, and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground, and in some places sand, and passing by the Iland of d'Aru, then you find from 40. to 50. fa∣dome déepe, from the Islandes of Pulo Sam∣bilao, to th Islands of Pulo Pinao, you shall kéepe along by the shore, not once putting from it, shunning a banke, (lying right ouer against the land called Barus, betwéene Pu∣lo Sambilao, and Pulo Pinao) which is muddie ground, and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water, you shall still vse your lead, and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land, nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward, because diuers times there commeth great blasts (out of the hilles of Queda) from Northeast, and north, north∣east, and sometimes sharper, & many times runne further from the coast, as I said before, and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra, where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare, and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao, and be∣ing by them, or at the heigth and length of them, and hauing the monson (that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you) you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pe∣ra, which is a good course: but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum, it is better: for from this place you must take your course towards the channell, vnder 7. degrées and ½, but hauing the monson, as aforesaid, although it be somewhat backe∣ward, you shall loose your time: for the mon∣son at the first is sometimes sharpe, and after that beginneth to be larger, as you turne or winde from the land or coast. With this course you shall runne to the channell, and passe it vnder seauen degrées, and ••/2 and be∣fore you come vnder seauen degrées and 1/2 to seauen and 2/•• or lesse hauing past the Ilands, you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½, because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north, and north Northeast: in your course towards the Island of Seylon, you shall runne vnder sea∣uen degrees and ½. and vnder seauen degrees, with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon, to a place called Matecalou, which lieth too loofeward off the sands, there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land, you must likewise vnderstand, that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon, the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea, likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest: whereunto you must haue great regard, and béeing at the Island Seylon ha∣uing it in sight you shall not loose it, but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome, (looking well before you, and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous, the fore∣most of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley, without any other then only those you sée) to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome, and in the halfe way or middle there∣of and the land, you shall finde the depth a∣foresaid, and another Sand that lyeth behind you, which is the first, and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it, and they say you may passe with small Shippes be∣tweene it and the land, béeing foure fadome déepe, but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward, it is from thence to the land a mile, and you may goe neare it at sixtéene & eightéene fadome, and if you fall vppon it by night, you must saile onlie with your Fouke∣sayle, when you are in sight of vnknowne land, kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land, and not aboue thirtie fadome to Sea∣ward, from this sand you shall runne along y^e coast at fiftéene, sixtéene, twentie, twentie fiue, and thirtie fadome, but in such manner, that you loose not ground, for you may haue a Calme, and so by that loosing of ground, the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua: wherefore you must haue good regard, vntill you come to Negumbo, which is in the Island of Sey∣lon, and from thence it is good to crosse o∣uer to the Firme land, and comming to Ne∣gumbo, you shall not put off from the land, vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie, for from that time forwardes, then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes, and being from the fiftéene of Fe∣bruarie forwardes, you may put from the shore (that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon,) to the Portingales Fort called

Columbo, as it falleth out best for you, least it happen to you as it hath done to ma∣ny other shippes that for want of care, were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua: from this last sand to Tanadare, and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla, along the Coast and sea side: the Countrie is almost all of one higth, and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land, you see 3 high trees, and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands, and you may still runne along the shore without feare, till you sée Tanada∣re, which is verie well knowne, and deceaue not your self, for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla, but the markes and right tokens thereof are, that it hath a thyn point of land striking out, in forme lyke a tongue, with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea, as farre as you may throw a stone: this point of land or tongue striking out, is full of Indian Palme trees, which shew verie faire, and a myle or two before you come at it, this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees, further into the sea, but the Palme trees are thicke, and shew verie faire, and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes, not necessarie to be described, and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees, in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode, that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles, from this Pagode, tow∣ardes the North syde, you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth, which are good markes, and the right knowledge of that Countrey: you must not goe too close vnto the shore, for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea, but not farre: when you see the downes aforesayd, then you must runne at eyghtéene & twentie fadome déepe, for that if the wind beginneth to calme, and your ground to be deeper, you must cast an∣ker, for if you neglect it, you should presentlie fall on ground, because the streames and wa∣ters doe runne verie strong to sea ward: from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles: this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek, and from the south syde thereof, there ap∣peareth certaine great houels of redde earth, that lie within the Créeke, and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke, and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land, from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand, but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land. From Bel∣leguao to Gualla are fyue myles, and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde, ful of Palme trees, and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land, all of stonie cliffes: and when you make towardes Gualla, you shall perceaue a high land full of woods, and a playne desert, and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees, and if you haue occa∣sion to anker in the bay, you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe, but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there. From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla (which are twelue myles) you runne from the one to the other, North∣west and Southeast, and somewhat North∣west & by West, and Southeast and by east, and all the way along this Coast to Gual∣la, is not to be sayled, but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead. From Gualla to the point called Belitote, is fyue or sixe miles, which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees (and right ouer against it a∣bout half a mile there is a great Cliffe) and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes: along the shore, by the point of Gualla, are two sandes, whereon the water breaketh, the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea, about ¼ of a myle, and the other is right ouer against the bay, on the North syde, running a small myle into the sea, and of this you must take great care: you may well passe by it in the night, at twentie fadome deepe, so that you need not feare: vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long, speciallie when it is high water. From thence you shall take your course vnto Co∣lumbo, as the Coast reacheth, and from the Iland of Verberijn forward, the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes, and béeing hard by Columbo, about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo, you may anker at eight or nyne fadome, but by Columbo you cannot doe it, but if you haue great occa∣sion, then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land. There you finde stonie ground, and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe, inwardes to the sea, and that in most places, therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker, first prouing with a lead: the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small, and in other places great sand, which is the surest, and in some places it hath redde sand, and lykewise places of white and blacke sand, which are tokens of the ground along the Coast, vppon all the which ground you may anker. The right markes and tokens of Columbo, (which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort) are these, y^t is, when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam, so called (which is a high hill, higher then any other

in al the countrie about it,) shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse, then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels, and begin to sayle by thinne flat land, which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen, the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson, are North Northeast, Northeast, and sometime East Northeast, and also East, the Viracoins (which are the winds that blow out of the Sea,) are many times North, and Northwest, I write this, that men should not wonder to find them so, in that place, likewise you finde there West Northwest, and West Southwest windes, according to the coniunctions of the times, when men are in that coast, the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west, throughout all India, at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea, which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night, and come out of the Sea, to∣wards the land, and therefore by the Portin∣gales they are called Viracoins, that is wind out of the Sea, and from midnight to noone, the winds blow out of the East, which come ouer the land into the Sea, as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage, and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man, to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these coun∣tries, when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos, or land winds, if they be not Northeast, then you shall not set sayle before midnight, & if they be not full, to Sea ward, then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you, to put to farre into the Sea, for that you could not well get the land againe, because the Viraco∣ins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest, doe often stay late, & blow but slowly. From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn, to the East side of the Cape, towards the land, called das A∣reas Gordas, that is of the fat or thicke Dounes, which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn, on the side of Choramandel, for it is good to put on there because of y^e streame, which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas, as also some part of the way to the Cape, you finde ground (and many times sée the land because it is long) at 40. fadome and lesse, and if you come inward from the Cape, being by night and find ground, then you may fréely passe o∣uer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe, for as you come right against the Cape, then the ground is ful of white Sand, and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward, from Areas Gordas to the Cape, for from Areas Gordas inwards, the ground is ful of banks, and small blacke Sand, and you must runne a mile, a mile and a halfe, and two miles from the shore, vpon the ground and depthes afore saide. And when you passe by Cabo de Co∣morijn, to Coulaon, you shall holde your course along the coast, about a mile from the shore, that you may Anker, and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome, but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome, alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor, which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon, and being in the night time, the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon, is to find the ground full of bankes, for from Coula∣on to Batecola (that is by Onor not farre from Goa) the ground is bankie, and you may Anker at 8. fadome without feare, from Batecola to Goa, the ground in some pla∣ces deeper, whereby you may gouerne your selfe. Touching your Ankerage, from Co∣chijn to Cananor you néede not feare, onely to take héede of the Iland called Ilha Caga∣do, lying Southward from Cananor seuen miles, and thrée miles Northward from the fortresse of Mangalor, there lyeth a row of Ilands, Cliffes, and Rockes, along the coast vntill you come to the fortresse of Barcelor, from thence to Batecola you haue certaine Cliffes, but they are close to the land, and the two Ilands of Batecola, you may passe be∣twéene the first of them, and the Firme land without feare, for it is 15. or 16. Fadome déepe, a little further lyeth the Iland of Ho∣nor, close to the Firme land, then followeth the Ilandes of Angediua, which reach as the coast doth, and if it bee late in the yeare, you shal not put farre into the Créeke of An∣cola, for as then there is no Terreinhos or land winds, to driue you out againe, therfore it is then better to runne something far from the coast, for you haue many times the Vi∣racoins or Sea winds somwhat farre off, and being néere the shore, they would not much helpe you. This must be from the twentie of March forward. If you chance to be by An∣gediua and had néede of a Road, or harber, you must enter into Angediua on the North side, as far from that land, as from the Firme land, and rather somewhat néerer the Iland, then the Firme land, where you haue a good Road or harber, for there many times diuers shippes doe winter, being constrained there∣vnto, within it is sixe fadome déepe, a little further from Angediua, lie foure or fiue I∣lands, from the ryuer Sanguisijn, close by the Firme land, and from thence about halfe a mile further forward lyeth the Iland of Goa

Velha, (that is old Goa) and then there are no other Ilands heerein to bee noted. You must vnderstand that oftentimes it happe∣neth, that along the coast, you shall find the wind Northwest, and North Northwest, without chāging which bloweth very strong with the which wind I aduise you not to set sayle, although it blow out of the North, but if it be cleare day, then you may hoyse Anker, and put to Sea wards and if the wind com∣meth not about, to Northeast, being foure miles from the land, and before noone, about nine or ten of the clocke, you shall Anker till it be noone, till the Viracoins or Sea winds come, therewith to sayle againe towards the land, for in this sort you shall get aduantage to loofeward, although it bee with paine and labour, as likewise the time will shewe you what you shall doe. I must further aduertise you, that when you are by the coast of Sey∣lon, it being about the fifteene of Februarie or past, then you néede not sayle, further then to the Ilands Verberijn, and from thence to the Cape de Comorijn, for as then you néede neither to feare water nor streames, to driue you outward, yet you must not bee negligent therin, for some yeares the stormes come later & sometimes sooner, as the winds blow, whereof you must be carefull, and be∣ing the fiftéene of Februarie, or past, you must remember not to runne inwards, but kéepe out, for as then the streames runne in∣wards, which might deceiue you, and the la∣ter it is in Februarie, the stronger they draw inward, comming to Cochijn betwéene the 15. and 20. of March, you may wel get from thence to Goa, although the Viage is some thing doubtfull, but being past the twentie of March, I would not counsell you to do it for that of late many years together, there hath béene vpon the coast of India (in Aprill and May) diuers blustering stormes of crosse winds, blowing towards the coast, with darke and cloudie skies, which would bring you in great danger, therefore against that time it is best to chuse a good Hauen, neuer∣thelesse, God can send faire weather & winds when it pleaseth him. To put into the Hauen of the fortresse of Barcelor, in the coast of Malabar aforesaide, you must vnderstande that when you see a round Houell vppon the end of the hil of Batecola, towards y^e North∣east, and Northeast and by East, then you are right against the fortresse of Barcelor & may put in at 7. fadome, so you haue the for∣tresse East, and halfe a stricke to East and by North from you, and you shall sée all the Cliffes lying along the coast, to the Ilands, as Ilhas de Saint Maria, which are altoge∣ther stonie Cliffes, but they stand close to the land.

The 19. Chapter. A description of all the Hauens, places, coastes, and Sands vpon the East and South side of the Ilands Seylon, with their heights, courses, stretchings, & si∣tuations, with the course from thence to the fortresse of Columbo holden by the Portingales.

FIrst I will beginne with Trinquanama∣le, which lyeth vnder nine degrées, vppon the East side of the I¦land Seylon, eight myles from thence Southwarde lyeth a smal ryuer, and before you come at it, putting from Trinquanamale, ther are some Ilands that with Birds fileings looke white, and in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid lie two smal Ilands, full of trées, from Trinquanamale to this ryuer the course is North and South, and North and by East, and South and by West, and running along the coast towards this ryuer, then you shall leaue the Ilands a∣foresaid on the land side, sayling without thē, for that betwéene them and the land are ma∣ny stones and Cliffes, this ryuer and Trin∣quanamale lie distant from each other eight or nine miles at the furthest. From the saide ryuer (with the Ilands in the entrie thereof) to the ryuer of Mataqualou are 12. myles, and lieth vnder the hight of seuen degrées and 1/••. The course from the one to the other is Northwest, and Southeast being past this ryuer, comming betwéene the Ilands & the mouth therof, you may go as néere the shore as you will, for it is without danger, & with∣in a great shotte of the land it is 20. fadome déepe. From Mataqualou, about fiue or sixe miles, the course is North and South till you come to the point or hooke, and from this point fiue or sixe miles further you runne a∣long the coast North and South, and North and by East, and South and by West, fur∣ther forward towards the first Sand about fiue or sixe miles, Northward, there standeth a woode of Palme trées, and comming right ouer against it, the coast runneth North Northeast, and South southwest, and some∣what North and by East, and South and by West, from those fiue miles to the first sand, the course is North East and southwest, and

Northeast and by East, and Southwest and by West, and before you come within foure or fiue miles of these Sandes, you shall sée some Houels and hillockes of red Earth, a∣long the Sea side, & inward to the land there appeareth certaine high hilles, whereof one of them lying most Northward hath a Ho∣uell striking out of the toppe thereof, which séemeth to bee a blocke house, being of redde Earth. You may passe betwéene the first Sand and the land at seuen or eight Fadome déepe, alwaies kéeping as farre from the land as from the Sand, for they are a good myle distant, and running about by the Sea, you shall find Sandie ground round about it, this Sand lyeth vnder 6. degrees, and from this first Sand about 6. or 7. miles southward, there is yet an other Sand, and the course from this one to the other is east, Northeast and West southwest, along the coast, this se∣cond Sand lyeth scarce vnder 6. degrées, be∣twéene the which and the Firme land are 12 and 13. Fadome déepe, all good ground, and from the last Sand to a Créeke called A••alla the coast runneth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, 4. or 5. miles further forward frō this Créeke, there lieth an other Créeke called Hulpulam from whence to Tanadare are about 7 miles. Tanadare is a point of the land, whereon there standeth a woode of Palme trees, and when you are right ouer against it, you shall see a white Pagode (that is a Temple of the Indian Idoles) and on the North side of this Pagode, stand certaine Houels, of white and red Earth, and passing before it, you shal not goe to close to the shore, for there abouts are certaine Sands, and beeing past this point, then goe presently at 20. Fadome deepe, for it is al good and cleare ground, and if it should be calme there you may Anker. From Ta∣na dare to Belliguon are about sixe myles, Belliguon is a verie great Creeke, on the South side wherof are certaine Houels of red Earth, that stand within the Creeke, for that you cannot see them, before you haue fully discouered the Creeke, and on the North side it hath two Ilands, lying close by the land, & on the South side of those Ilands along, ther lyeth a Riffe, or Sand. From Belliguon to Gualle are fiue myles, all this way from the one to the other, the land is altogether close and full of trees, along the Sea side, about halfe a mile from Belliguon to Gualle, there lyeth a stonie Iland, close by the land, and an other on the South side of Gualle, and ma∣king towards it, you shall sée a high flat land full of trées, and an euen wildernesse, and on the North side of the bay, there standeth a great wood of Palme trées, vppon the Sea coast, and within the Hauen you shall see a white house, which is a small Chappell of the Virgin Marie, passing from Belliguon to Gualle (and comming right against this point) on the South side towards the Bay, you must put to Seaward thereby to shunne a Sand wheron you shall sée the Sea breake, and to Anker you shal runne North & North Northwest, in such manner that you may al∣waies sée certaine Cliffes (that lie on the North side) and inwards from the Bay, you shall sée the Palme trées, which will be vpon the south side towards Belliguon, which lay hidden by the point, there you shall finde 14. and 15. fadome water, and running till you come to 13. fadome, & finding sandie ground, you may Anker, for to Seaward it is alto∣gether stones. From Tanadare to this Ha∣uen of Gualle, (which are twelue miles) the course is Northwest, and Southeast, and Northwest and by West, and southeast and by East, this Hauen of Gualle lieth vnder 5. degrées and 1/••. from thence passing along the coast, you sayle about the Portingalles Fort called Columbo, this course I haue already sufficiently declared, in the Nauigation from Malacca to India, therefore it is néedlesse here to be rehearsed.

The 20. Chapter. The righr course from Malacca to Ma∣cau in China, with the stretchings of the coasts.

DEparting from Malacca, to the Straights of Sincapura, and so to China, you must set your course to the Ilands cal∣led Ilha Grande, lying thrée miles from the Hauen of Ma∣lacca, passing (for more securitie) without a∣bout the Ilands: from those Ilands to the ry∣uer called Muar, are thrée miles, which hath for a marke a Houel full of trées, on the south east side, without any other high land there∣abouts. From the riuer of Muar to the riuer called Rio Fermoso, you run along the coast Northwest and southeast, and Northwest and by West, and southeast and by East, the course is nine miles, this riuer of Fermoso is great and faire, hauing in the entrie 6. and 7. Fadome déepe, and also within, you enter in∣to it by the foote of a high hill, on the South southeast side, and it lyeth on the South side of Malacca, it hath certaine bankes, sticking out into the Sea (from the point lying North

east, which is a flat & plaine countrie) which you must shunne. From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon, the coast runneth the same course, southeast and by East, and the Iland Pulo Picon lieth halfe a mile from the coast, hauing thrée Ilands by it, two on the Sea side, and one vpon the land side, but you must not passe betwéene it and the land, for there are many Sands, it is distant seuen miles: southeastward towards the Sea from Pulo Picon, there lyeth a great and a ve∣rie high Iland, with many Ilands about it, called Pulo Carimon, along by the West side of the same Iland, towards the straight of Sabon, which is the way to Sunda, and the Iland of Iaua, the nauigation and course whereof I will in an other place set downe, therefore for this time it shall not be touched, and will procéede to our matter aforesaide. From this Iland of Pulo Picon, to a pointe of land that stretcheth out, called Taniam∣buro, you runne East ward by the coast, be∣ing about thrée miles, this point maketh a hooke, and from thence forward the coast tur∣neth inward like an arme, running frō thence right southward, about a mile frō this point lyeth a riuer, and a little mile further for∣ward there is an other ryuer, with a great mouth, where there lyeth an Iland, called old Sincapura, being deepe and faire ground, this ryuer issueth out againe in the Hauen of Iantana, where Antonio Mello by chance did once enter with a ship of eight hundreth Bhares great (each Bhar waighing thrée Quintals and a halfe Portingall waight) & came out againe at the ryuer of Iantana, from this ryuer the land runneth downe to∣wards the South (as I saide before) which maketh a hooke, where the mouth or entrie of the first straight (y^t you must passe through) beginneth. The land on the North side of this entrie is higher then the South, which is low and flat, hauing a Houell of trées, striking out about all the rest, there is the end or fur∣thest point of that land, for that going East∣ward on, then you finde Ilands and stonie Cliffes, which first reach southward, and thē againe come Eastward out, making the forme of an arme, from the said point of Ta∣niamburo, to the mouth or entrie of this straight, the course is 5. miles East & West, at 7. and 8. fadome déepe. Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China (passing by Pu∣lo Picon in the beginning of y^e month of Iu∣ly) he must go néere to the side of the great I∣land Carymon, because y^e winds of the Mon∣son of Iaua (which are at y^e time) doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra, likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon (and being past it) you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you, with y^e marks aforesaid, in this way you find manie depths, & passing along by Taniamburo, thē the land of y^e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other, which is a common and certaine marke, but hold you to loofeward, the better to enter at your plesure. This first straight at y^e entry hath two riffs, on each side one, which come from the point or hooke of the land, the land on the south side (from the entry thereof) is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward, which make the straight, & to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other, & at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10. & 9. fadom deepe, and being so far in (that the land on the South side (which are Ilands) make but one point, then on the other side before you, you shall see a hooke or point, whereon there stan∣deth a small red Houell, which when you see, then you shall turne from the right hand to∣wards that smal Houell, because it is the first Iland, which you then haue past & from that Iland forward, there beginneth an other I∣land, between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe, or Sand, which with a low water is part vn∣couered, & reacheth into the middle of y^e cha∣nell, where you must run with the Lead con∣tinually in your hand, which will shew you where you are, & comming to the point afore∣said of the small Houell, then put to the land on the right side, which is Ilands (as I saide before) for it hath only betweene the Iland a∣foresaid, the said Riffe, and then you shall run Eastward, about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome, & from thence for∣ward, y^e row of Ilands (whereby you sayle) reach South Eastward, and presently some∣what further, on the right hand of the same Iland, you shall see a round Iland, running a little out from the other, which will bee vpon your right hand, by the which you shall passe along, with good watch & there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe, muddie ground. The land on the left hand which is the North side, is Creeks and open ground, and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South, on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you, you shall kéepe from this North side (which is nothing but Creekes) for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes, running as I said before, along by the Ilands on the right hand, & comming by the aforesaid round Iland, on the right hand, at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe, you shal sée a smal flat Iland, with afew trées, hauing a white sandystrand, which lieth east and west, with the mouth of y^e straight of Sincapura, which you shal make towards, & when you beginne to come néere it, then the

straight beginneth to open & discouer it selfe, you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow, so to auoid the riffes & shallowes of the North side, as also not to fal towards y^e south side of the mouth of the straight, with the ride that runneth ther, for you haue many depths and foule ground, you must alwaies hold on y^e North side, where there is a sandie strand, of the length of the shotte of a great péece, at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water, & as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground, to Anker in if need be, and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y^e straight, which you haue not, passing further frō then•• for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground, lying on the South side thereof, as aforesaid, & once againe I aduise you, not to passe (frō the end of the strand) to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes, as aforesaide. The mouth or entrie of this straight, entreth betwéene two high hils, be∣ing as broad as a man may cast a stone, and reacheth Eastward, & is in length about the shot of a great péece, y^e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½. déepe, in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe, which sheweth like a Piller, this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it, the Varella of China, & on the South side, a good way from the mouth therof▪ it maketh a créeke, in the midle wher∣of lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side, the length of a small shot, it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side in∣to the Sea, making an Iland, this opening is shallow all ouer, seruing only for smal Foists to passe through, in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is, lieth a Cliffe, or stonie place two fadome vnder water, which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke, as the point of the land reacheth, and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell, being past this Creek, the land hath a hooke of a ho∣uell faling downward, where the straight en∣deth, & in passing about this, there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground, & when you haue past about it, y^e land from thence reacheth southeast, on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end, there are thrée Créeks, whereof the two first are small, & the third great, it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y^e red Houel, where the straight endeth, this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke, which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered, & rea∣cheth frō the one point to the other, you must be carefull not to fall vpon it, & all that which lieth on the North side, and without y^e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground, & without danger. In y^e issuing of the straight, beeing without it you haue two Riffes, whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight, about the shot of a great péece towards y^e East cō∣ming from the land on the north side, & stret∣ching southward, the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight, reaching Eastward so y^t they make a crosse one throgh the other, and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them, the chanel y^t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe, the ground with∣in y^e chanel is muddie & without sand. This I haue particularly noted vnto you, for their in¦structions y^t hereafter shal passe through that way, for that the discriptions of the Nauiga∣tion or course thereof, heretofore written & set downe are very short, and obscure, for such as haue not past through that way, wherby ma∣ny ships haue run on grounde, stricken & pas∣sed many dangers, & some cast away, but re∣turning to our matter, and folowing y^e course aforesaid, whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight, then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side, because of the sands aforesaid, that lie within y^e straights, alwaies with your Lead in your hand, looking rounde about you, for y^t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel, it is 4. fadom and ½. also because it is so narrow y^t you can hardly cast out your Lead, me thinketh it is your surest way, vpon each Sand to set a Scute, or other mark, that may serue you for Beakens, so to auoide them, and going a little further by the Creeke, which hath the opening that com∣meth out of y^e other side of the Sea, wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water, then kéepe presently towards the houel, on y^e right hand, that maketh the point of the Creeke a∣foresaid, wher also runing along by your Cō∣passe, as before by the land on the left hand, somwhat neerer to it, thē on the other side, til you be out of y^e straight▪ alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side, right against this Houel, for it is ful of stones and Cliffs, as I said before, likewise you must shun the east side, right against the issuing of the straight, for that the shot of a great peece from thence, it is altogether cliffes, as afore∣said, & whē you are out of the straight, & desire to Anker, then make towards the South side along by the land, that you may get out of the streame, you must Anker at 6. fadome, for if you stay in the streame of the straight, you

may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y^e ship, or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand: at this road you are right ouer against a strand, where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth, & being out of the straight, in manner as aforesaid, you shal take your course along by the land, vpon the right hand, alwaies casting out the lead, and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom, neither to the land, nor towards the sea, and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight, you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep, and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes, that stand at the end thereof, and a sandie bay lying against the ho∣uel, being half way frō the other houel, which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay, behind the which, that opening which is in y^e straight, commeth out again: then hold your course eastward, at 4. fadome, not turning to the one nor the other side, for you should pre∣sentlie find both drougthes & sands: the chan∣nel is muddy ground, and you must still haue the Leade in your hand, vntill you finde other depth, which wil not continue long, and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel, for it will shew you both the channels, whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome: thē beware of the south side, vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight, for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome, & frō thence to dry lād, for it is al riffes & sand: this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana, which is the North syde, and you run along east & west, it is in distance a∣bout 8 miles, but you must not passe betwéen it & the land: the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire & good ground, at 15. fadom sandy groūd: in the middle of this way from the straight, to the Ilands, or litle more or lesse, lieth the riuer of Iantana, which hath a great mouth, the entry thereof being along the land on the east side, where great shippes haue many times entred, & on the West side, where there standeth a houell of red earth: it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer, reaching about half a mile into the sea, vpon the which many ships haue fallen, wherfore take héed of it: from the point of the Iland abouesaid, lying at the end of the land of Iantana, there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea, well 2. great miles, and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it, only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it, which is presently séen and discerned: and when it is rough wether, then the water breaketh all ouer: betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell, all stonie groūd, and the shallowest place that I found therein, was 5. fadome, & ½, and then to 7. fa∣dome & 1/••, and then againe I found 6. or 8. fa∣dome & ½, and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece, right ouer, if you will passe this Channell, you must runne half a myle of from the Iland, & come no néerer to it, for if you should you would run on ground: it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it, vnlesse they were compelled thereunto, as it happened to Francisco Dagmar, that there ranne on ground, and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe, because he ranne to néer the Riffes, and that the wind scanted: two myles from these Ilandes, Southsouth∣east, lyeth Pedra Branca, (that is White stone) which is an Iland of white stone, rockes and cliffes, and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes, on the South side thereof, on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton, which is verie long: in the middle whereof there is a high houel, where∣vpon there is déepe ground, but not good to anker for such as come from China: round about Pedra Branca, and close by it, there are 6. fadome déepe, good ground, but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it. I haue alreadie told you, that in pas∣sing through the straight (when you are o∣uer the sandes, at 15 fadome, in manner as aforesaid) you must sayle Eastward, towar∣des the Ilandes, which you shall presentlie see, as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana: and when you begin to come neere them: thē you shall keep towards Pedra Brā∣ca, and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes, for two causes, the one be∣cause the windes at that tyme, when you sayle to China, doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton, which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest, and if the winde should scant, and fall into the Southeast, as often tymes in those coun∣tries it happeneth, being on the syde of the Ilandes, you could not passe by the Riffes, whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca, and the Ilandes, or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there, and that the Monson (that is the tyme of your voyage) to China would bee spent: the other is, that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde, or with few sailes spred, then the streames would driue you vpō the Riffes, before you could auoyde them, as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses, whose Pilot was Go••••alo Vie••a, who by the water was driuē vpō 10. fadome, where he ankered, and then after he came to 7. fadom, where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe: for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca, or the white cliffes aforesaid.

Frō Pedra Branca to the Ilād Pulo T••nge y^t run north & south, & north & by east & south and by west the course is 13. miles: this Ilād is high and roūd, hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées: it lieth by the coast of the firm land, & betwéene it & y^e firm land, there is good sayling, but it is not Oorbaer: this Ilād lieth with Pulo Timō northeast & southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pu∣lo Tinge, you shall take your course from Pedra Branca, a great myle Eastward, and from thence North and north and by East, alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes, & being at 14 fadome, being as you gesse in that country, you shal present∣ly kéepe off from it, into the sea, being before it, & you néed not feare any thing, but y^t you sée before your eyes: in this course to Pulo Tinge, in the sight of the Iland, there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands, which shal lie on the land side frō you, and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge, then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon: the Ilād of Pulo Timon is great & high, and on the side whereunto you sayl, are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes & ankers: because in those coun∣tries they vse such kind of wooddē ankers, and it is commonly couered with mistes & clouds, and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground: therein are 2 places, wher you find good fresh water, one being on the side of the land, in the middle of a long strand, a little inward to the land, where you find a good réed, but whē you come early thereunto, as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly, it is dange∣rous to anker there, because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries, therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place, where you likewise find fresh water, on the East side towards the sea, rūning right vpon the face of the Iland, & along by the East side, and being past a cer∣tain houel, that maketh a hooke, you shal find a sandy Bay, where you must enter into the land, and when the point or hooke lieth south∣east, you may anker, where you may lie for the Momson, and there you shal haue 20 fa∣dome déepe: there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish, and in the same bay, there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea, also on that syde you haue much better wood, & néerer to fetch, & there you ly safe from west winds, on that side of the land you haue certain Ilāds along the coast, & from the north point of this Ilād Pulo Timō, about the shot of a great péece, there lieth an other Iland, and by the South point an other, & likewise about 3 miles south eastward, ther lieth 3 other Ilands, wherof y^e one is great & roūd y^e other 2 being somwhat smaller, & are called Pulo Laor: the Iland of Pulo Timō lieth vnder 2 degr. & ⅔ on y^e north side of the Equinoctial, & 12 miles northwest ward strō it, lieth the riuer Pan, in the firme land, ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward, there lieth a small Iland, hauing an euen round trée in the middle: & half a mile frō it, it is 6 fadom déep groūd. Frō Pulo Timō to Pulo Condor the course is North north∣east & Westsouthwest 115 miles, Pulo Cō∣dor lieth vnder 8 degr. & ⅔, it is a great Ilād, with high hils, hauing close by it 5 or 6 I∣lands, and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe, which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle: it is ouer al good groūd at 10 or 12 fadome déepe, and on the North∣west side it hath a place of fresh water, it lieth north and south, with the riuer of Camboia, (which is called the hauen of Malaios) 12. miles distant, but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther, for whē it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and north∣west, w^t some thunder, whereby you may not stay with one sayle only, for that being with∣out sayles, it would strike you to ground, and cast your ship away, when it is early in the yeare, thē you haue East winds. From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y^u shal alwaies find ground at 35 & 38 fadome, and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor, you shall sayl north northeast, not accounting any winding of the compas, for if y^u should do so, you should run on the south side, to seaward, and run by without séeing it, which is an euill course, for that y^e winds alwaies in this course doe blow frō the side of the land: and if it chance that be∣fore you sée the Ilād Pulo Condor, you find y^e water thicke, troubled & foule then cast out your lead, & you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water, with a soft muddy ground, & so runne half a strike in that course, til you come to 17 fadome, and being there, then rune northeast, and being at 1/1 6 fadome, before you sée the I∣land, thē hold your course East & East and by north, alwaies at 16 fadome déepe, whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland, wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor, full of bushes, a mile or thereabouts distant from each other, and if it be possible, you shall not runne betwéen them: for that without them and close by, you finde good ground. I haue layne there at anker, with a calme, about a mile from the Iland, which lieth néerest the land: there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest. From this Iland Pulo Cōdor to y^e Ilād Pulo Secir, the course is Northeast and Southwest, & north∣east, and by east, and Southwest & by West, 45 miles. This Iland is low and long land, reaching North and south, and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland, lying halfe a

myle from the land: you may passe betwéene it and the Iland, on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye, where once a Iunco, (that is to say, an Indian or Chinish great ship) was laid on the shore to bee new dressed, be∣longing to a Rouer of Patane, (a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Ma∣lacca, towardes the kingdome of Syon) I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay, it is all good ground: this I∣land is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles: if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor, without seeing it vnder 8. degrees, you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep, with black muddy ground, & much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water, and being 12. miles past it, at the height of eight degrées, and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water, at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe, and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth, which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées, & ••. to this place you shall holde your course Northeast, for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe, but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain, thinking to get the coast of Champa, & when you come within two miles of the Ilandes, (lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir, you shal find muddie thick water, & comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde: those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars cal∣led Tomsitom, three miles distant from each other, you runne along East Southeast, and West Northwest: the East Ilande is high and round, on the sea side being calme, in the vpper part therof it hath the fashiō of a Cap, such as y^e Mandorijus (which are the Lords of China) doe weare: halfe a mile from it ly∣eth a Cliffe like an Ilande, and hath on the West side reddish cliffes, and on the north side an other Iland: round about all these I∣landes and cliffes there is no grounde. I set this down for that I haue sailed all this coun∣trie and noted the way, as also all whatsoe∣uer I haue declared in this discourse: we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes, for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes, and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles, let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side: from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly, to discouer Pulo Secir, and from thence to the coast of Champa, for you must know that the streames (from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes) runne East∣ward, by which meanes you runne present∣ly to the coast, as hereafter I will shew: and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde, th••n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa, which wil driue you ouerthwart, from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir, there are no sands nor shallows, as many men suppose, the worst you find, is that there is no ground, these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast: from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa, and if you passe by it on the south side, then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast, till you be in sight of the coast, and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe, and if you passe by it on the North side, you must runne Northeast, and Northeast and by North, and not higher to loofewarde, to shun the drougthes, whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away: and if in the night time you passe by any land, then cast out your lead, and finding fifteene fadome water, then put no neerer to the land, but presently runne East Northeast, as the coast lyeth, for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast, 4. mile from it. The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes: you run along by them East north east, and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and ••. and before you come within two or three miles thereof, the sandie strand and high way endeth, for this point is a verie high land, reaching Southwarde in, so that it maketh a Cape: from thence for∣ward it is altogether verie high land to Va∣rella, with great hils: within this point to∣wards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke, and two miles on this side before you come at it. There lyeth close by the land a smal, long, and low Iland, all of harde stony cliffes and rockes, which a farre off shew like a towne: from this Iland to Pulo Secir, there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe: vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands, 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid, there is a riuer called Sidraon, where you may en∣ter with shippes of 6••••. Barhes on this ri∣uer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa: it hath for a marke a long houell w^t 2. tops: I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid, and found 8. fadome deep, al∣together euen stonie ground, with much of the hearbe Sargaslo, whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe, and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe. When you are by the coast of Champa, then you shal runne East North∣east: within two or thrée miles at the furthest

it is altogether faire and good anker ground, to the point or hooke aforesaid, you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side, not pas∣sing betweene it and the land: from this point to another point are 12. miles, & you runne Northeast, and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point: this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast: betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes, the first wher∣of is the hauen where you lade blacke woode, which is called De••raon: from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North, and seuen miles before you come to y^e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town, and two miles further there is an I∣land of stonie cliffes close to the land, which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth, whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador, or the fisher, and if you desire to runne to the Varella, (being past the Iland) you shall presently be neere the land, where you haue a great strande with faire grounde. This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea, and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller, which may be seen far off, therfore it is by the Por∣tingalles called Varella, (that is, a Cape, Backe or marke) at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in, all of muddy ground, & 15. fadome deepe, you cannot sée it far off, because the one lande runneth through the o∣ther, but as you passe by the strand aforesaid, and beginne to come neere the Varella, then the creeke beginneth to open, which hath a verie faire entrie, and within hath two run∣ning streames of verie good fresh water, hee that commeth thither with a ship by my ad∣uise shall not put in there, because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again, for there the wind is scant: you may wel anker without at y^e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done, or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had, that stand on the other side of the hill, to∣wards the North, at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea en∣deth, where you begin to find a verie great strand: to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill, and as you run along towardes it, when you compasse it a∣bout you shall see a small sandie bay, with the aforesaid great strand and place of wate∣ring, where you may anker when you will, for it hath good anker grounde, but it hath a great inconuenience, and mischiefe, which is, that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portin∣galles, and sea Rouers, therefore you must keep good watch, with great care when you, fetch fresh water, as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine: this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées, this land of Varella is a hooke, and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North, and north and by West, for the space of 48. miles, & from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower, then that you haue past, hauing in many places sandie strandes, where men may anker: ten miles from Varella forward, a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir, and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground, & in the middle of the Iland on the lande side, there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh wa∣ter, where if need be you may anker, for it is good ground, and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altoge∣ther faire being a small mile in length: from this Island about twelue miles Northward, the land maketh a point, and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke, and in∣ward to the Northwest where the high land endeth, (which from this point inwarde run∣neth to the West) it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fa∣dome deepe, within the hauen hauing sandie ground, with a great mouth or entrie, and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe: this riuer runneth further into the land, & 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village, where you may haue great store of victualles and other neces∣saries: in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell, and on the West side a low sandie strande, you must enter right forth in the middle, and although it is verie wide, yet being within you must make your self sure w^c ankers & cables, speci∣ally from the west side, for y^t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds, which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer: in this Riuer is much fish: also in the land there is much wild flesh, with Swine, Tigers, Rhinoceros, and such like beastes: the countrey people were of good nature, but we haue giuen them cause of su∣spition by our bad dealing with them: fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land, and you may passe betweene them and the lande, twelue miles from these Ilandes, there ly∣eth other Ilandes by the lande, where there are some places of rounde sande with a san∣die strande, and there is a small Riuer, where you haue much Catte (that is, Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it grow∣groweth,

and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton, wherewith many haue deceiued thē∣selues that runne crosse ouer, when they saw it and tanne on ground, Pulo Caton is a long Island, with two high hilles at the ende thereof, and in the middle low, so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes, it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes, stretching north∣west, and southeast, on the southeast side it hath a Riffe, where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further in∣to the Sea, on the land side it hath fresh wa∣ter, and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles, and ••/2, the channell betwéene both hath thir∣tie, and thirtie fiue fadome déepe, with good ground, right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer, with a great mouth or entrey, being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe, it is verie well inhabited, and built with houses, in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship, this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔, and North Northwest, a mile and a halfe from it, there lieth another small low Island, and you may passe betwéene them both, North, Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello, full vn∣der 16. degrées and ⅔, this Iland Champel∣lo is great and high, hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out, it lieth north northwest, and south southeast, it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle, that in the southeast being much higher then the o∣ther, it hath likewise many trées, on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island, with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof, on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water, and is distant from the Coast about two miles, it is a very low land along the sea strand, and West North∣west from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe, in the Hauen it is sandie ground, where much traffique is vsed, but the people are not much to bee trusted, from this Iland of Champello Northwest, for two or three miles it is full of trées, & two miles further, the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees, and thrée miles be∣yond this point, lieth a great créeke, which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or clo∣sure, and is all cleare ground, where you haue much victuals and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha, this créeke was called the Enseada, or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie, it hath much wood, & verie good to make ships of, fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha, which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of wa∣ter, all sandie ground, in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether, and to Champello you runne Northwest. This Iland of Champello hath a good road, and safe harbour, but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest, and although the wind commeth from the land, notwith∣standing it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land: you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea, there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous, which reach as the land doth till you bee vn∣der 17. degrees, and run nearer to the north∣east, at the end whereof, in the way to Chi∣na there lieth 8. Islandes, three great, & fiue small, all full of trées and sandie strandes, but without fresh water betwéene them, & round about it is altogether flat and foule way, so that as soone as you let fall the anker, the ca∣ble is presently fretted in péeces, betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe. This information was giuen me by certaine peo∣ple of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme, because they ankered, and all their cables brake from the ground, & they saued themselues in the boate, & run through all those Islandes to find fresh water, and could sée none: you run from the hooke or point of those sandes, to Pulo Ca∣ton Northeast, and Southwest, and North∣east and by east, and southwest and by west, for they lie like a bow: therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation, that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Ca∣ton, running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles, but returning againe to the course from Va∣rella to Pulo Caton, when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward, then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton: for that if you come thether early in the yeare, you haue the west windes so strong, that if you should be far from the coast, they would carrie you by force vpon the sands, without any remedie, as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus, you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton, and if you chance to be on the side of the land, you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth be∣twéene the Firme land and the Iland, which is two mile and a halfe broad, all faire and good ground (as I said before.) Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Ay∣non North and South, and North & by east, and South and by West, somewhat more then 50. mile. This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées, and ½, & reach∣eth from the point aforesaid, southwestward 12. or 13. miles, and from the East side lyeth the way from China, which you run North∣east,

and north east, and by north to 19. de∣grees, and ½, and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees, and ½, from the North∣east side in such manner, that the Iland is in forme foure square, & the channell betwéene it and the Firme land, is in the narrowest part 6. miles, where there lieth a hauen called Anchio, hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē, yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe, seuen miles eastward. From An∣chion lieth a créeke with good harbour, and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land, there lieth a great Riffe and sandes, but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island, which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland, at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen cal∣led Taalhio, at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland, and from this high land a∣foresaid, it runneth 12. miles northwest∣ward, and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side, and inward hilles and ho∣uels from the end of the land Aynon, on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓, to the I∣land Pulo Gom in the same course of north∣east, and northeast, and by north are 8. miles, and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land, it is a high land, in forme like a Bell, and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good har∣bour, wherein the ship Santa Crus lay, from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes, called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast, and northeast, and by north, being fiue miles, Pu∣lo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small, sepera∣ted one from the other without any Trees, from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast, and Northeast, and by North, to the Ensea∣da dos Ladroins (that is the Creeke of Ro∣uers,) from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe, which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea, and vpon the east side ther∣of about halfe a mile from it, there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground, and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer, whether many ships doe saile▪ and put in a lit∣tle further from this Iland lieth another Ri∣uer, wherein I haue béene, which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China, and with a southwest winde is discouered, and threre also runneth strong streames, the en∣trie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land, it is faire and good ground, and being about this point of land, you shall run till you come to a sand bay, where you shall anker, for within, it is shallow and sandie, on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land, and from these 2. riuers, 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great, it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes, from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea, wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall, from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast, there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground. The land of this creeke, on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile, (it is shallow but muddie ground,) you goe to the Hauen of Comhay: whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay, thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come, it is like a créeke that is very great, hauing another point or end of high land, which reacheth North and South, and right ouer against this hauen on y^e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it, and is distant from the afore∣said point of Enseada dos Ladroins or créek of Rouers, 7. miles southeastward. This I∣land Sanchoan is great, high, and full of hils, among the which there is a crooked hill with high houels on the top thereof, like the ioints of a mans fingers, when his hand is closed, which is a sure and good marke. This Iland hath many trées, great creeks & hayes, where in times past men vsed to traffique: betwéen this Iland, and the Firme land lieth 4. or 5. other high Ilands, without bushes or trées, which lie vnder one course with the Firme land, and the Iland Sanchoan in such sorte, that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward, and from thence reacheth to∣wards the land, northwest and southeast, so that a farre off it séemeth to bee all one land, these are the first Ilands of Canton, which lie vnder 21. degrees, and 1/••, from thence to Lamon you saile outward about the Ilands east northeast, and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages, which make those Ilands, through the which you may passe with ships, the best channel is that which runneth along by the Iland of Sanchoan (which is the furthest outward to the sea) of 6. and 7. fadome déepe, it hath in the entry therof vpon the same Iland, a small Iland full of bushes, and on the northwest side lieth two great high Ilands, which make the mouth or entry, and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small Ilands and hillocks, before the Ilands aforesaid towards y^e land lieth an other Iland, making another mouth or entry betweene this, and the two Ilands aforesaid, from this Iland to the land is the third mouth or entry, through these two entries great ships doe passe with the tides, it is altogether soft muddie ground, to know the Iland of Sanchoan, besides the

markes aforesaid, or to know if those Ilands lie before or behind, you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward, and that from thence you runne towards the land northwest and southeast, & from thence further east north east, and west south west, and marke the course with your compasse, and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backeward, and if you be so far to seaward, that you sée the one coast reach∣eth east north east, and the other northwest, then you are right ouer against it, by this meanes I found it out, for I was the first that marked it, and such as know it learned it of me. The course from Pulo Caton to∣wards China is thus, you shall not saile a∣boue 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed, and being past then runne north northwest, or northwest, vntill you finde an opening betwéene the I∣land and the Firme land, and as it beginneth to open, then runne halfe a strike north north east, towards the point of the Iland Aynon, and passing betwéene the Iland Pulo Caton and the Firme land, you shall keepe the same course, because the streame in that monson runneth towards the créeke of Cauchinchi∣na, and with this course you shall sée Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence, and it may bee that if you come thether at a spring tide, or with a slacke winde, that you will be driuen further inward, when you per∣ceiue the land then marke your compasse, and if the coast reacheth east northeast, then kéep that course vntill you thinke you to bee past it, and if the coast stretch northeast, and north east, and by east, as the Iland lieth, then run so, till you may wel discerne the land, & being 5. or 6. miles from thence, & that from thence you desire to sayle to Sanchoan, then runne with the same course for halfe a strike north northeast, whereby you shall sée Pulo Tio, & if you be 4. or 5. miles frō thence to seaward, then runne northeast, & northeast & by north, and if you be but two miles from thence, thē run your course for halfe a strike betwéene northeast, & northeast, & by north, with this course you shal come to the Iland of Sancho∣an, & shall sée the Iland called Do Mando∣riin, which is a small round and high land, & lieth 5. or 6. miles from the Ilands, & if you desire to put into the Hauen of Macau, then runne north east, & east, and by north, run∣ning to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sancho∣an, & when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Ilandes, then you shall finde muddie ground at 25. fadome déepe, & when you sée the Ilandes (looke well to your selfe as I saide before) you must goe neere them, and run along by them: about a mile distant, from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles, & there are fiue channels or passages: the first betwéene the Iland Sanchoan, & the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad. This Iland of Vasco de Faria, lieth nearer the land thē Sanchoan, & hath a high pointed hil, & on the sea side a high round houell, being be∣twéene it and the hill very low land, so that a farre off it sheweth like two Ilands, & when you are hard by it, and that you begin to dis∣couer the flat land, it sheweth like a channell, and not farre from it towardes the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it hath two or thrée small Ilands. This Iland lieth north and south with Sanchoan, a mile from it lieth a small long Iland without bu∣shes, which all along the Iland hath a croo∣ked rigge or backe descending at the end, this Iland is called Pulo Baby: by this Iland, a∣long by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rocke somewhat aboue the water. I here place all these markes and tokens of this channell, be∣cause it should the better be knowne, to such as haue occasion to passe through it, which they may boldly do, & being past the Ilands, of the Iland Vasco de Faria, the first that you then come to sée, is in the fourth mouth or entrie, which openeth not because an Ilād lieth right before it, 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Ilandes along by the Iland, (which you shall leaue on the West southwest side) all vpon a row, and a farre off séeme to runne one through the other, but when you are right ouer against them, then they lie as I saide before, they are fiue or sixe in all both great and little: from these Ilands about two miles East northeast, there lieth two Ilands close together, stretching North and South, by these you haue others vpon the same row towards the land, all in the same strike or course, in the entrey hard by those two I∣lands, there lieth a great high and round I∣land betwéene the aforesaid row of Ilandes, the Ilands aforesaid, there is a good hold or o∣pening through the which you haue the nea∣rest way to Macau: for the better know∣ledge wherof, about three or foure miles fur∣ther, (east north east) there are thrée Ilands distant from each other, which from the land all in a row doe reach into the Sea, whereby they lie further outward then the other which you passe along by, so that they ly right ouer against you, and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau, and begin to put into it, it is altogether opē (with∣out any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed a∣bout) sayling right towards the firme lande, which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence, where the mouth or entry is, whereby you goe to Caton, by the Portingalles called A•• Orelhas de Lebre (that is the hares eares.)

In this entery it is 8.9. and 10. fadome déepe, and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide, the streame runneth so strong & stiffe, that no wind will serue to get vp: ther∣fore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp, vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side, & so inward, shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water, putting to sea∣ward, for that you cannot passe betweene it, and the Ilands with any ship, also you shall finde ano••••er Cliffe vpon the west side, being in the middle way, & séeing right before you a small and low Iland, lying in the same rowe of Ilandes, in the East as you goe, then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chā∣nell that runneth to Macau. This entery reacheth East and West, and may be about a mile broad, you must make to that smal I∣land, and leauing it vpon the North side, you must hold your course betwéene it and the o∣ther Ilands, and so put in, alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland, where the depth will begin to lessen, and much more whē you are past it: for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground, the land lying vpon the south side of the channell, is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other, which reach east and west, and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland, which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite, and hath a créeke or bay that strech∣eth Northward▪ at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side, betwéene which and the I∣land it is drie and shallow ground, and before you come to this Iland, there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the wa∣ter, to seaward towards the middle of the chā∣nell: therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south, and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne, with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker, thē you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen, kéeping close to it till you be in, where you shall find foure fa∣dome and ½, or 5. fadome déepe, shunning the west side, for there it is all ouer, bankes and sands, and along by the point you finde mud∣dy ground▪ this point or hooke is a high land, and from thence inward, about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of sād, and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water, reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses, and before you come to it, in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe: therefore you must hold vpon the east side, and runne along by it till you anker, it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe.

The 21. Chapter. The course from the Kingdome of Sion, to China, with the situation of the pla∣ces.

DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Si∣on or Sian, you shall holde your course Westward, and comming to it, you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Ban∣colea two miles from the land, and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fa∣dome déepe, notwithstanding you must passe without it, as farre aboue it as you can, this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest, and somewhat northeast and by east, and southwest and by west, and being against the coast, you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground, and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid. The Coast vpon the shore is low land, hauing in∣ward a small houell, stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward. This low land maketh a point reaching out∣ward, lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land, which séemeth to runne inward to the sea: but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon, at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees, and comming to the aforesaid land, you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east, and west inwards to the land, hauing manie sharpe rockes, there the land maketh a point or end, which is commonly called the point of Cuy, thetherto the lande reacheth South∣east, this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. de∣grees and ⅔, and betweene it and the afore∣said thicke land that lieth behind you, you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground, when you are past or about this point of Cuy, then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles, and then you must sayle south east, and southeast, and by south, whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands, being long & flat, ful of trees, & lieth ful vnder 10. de∣grees, which will be on the east side, all this way you must take care not to fall to lee∣ward, and being by this Iland aforesaid, you shall run southeast, and rather hold aloofe to the south, then to fall to the west, because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part, and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first, and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land. The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed

towards the sea side, & Eastwarde it descend∣eth towardes a black lande, which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place, lying full vn∣der 9. degrees, & ½. This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy, southeast & northwest and so you must runne 25. miles. Pulo Wy are two Ilandes, whereof the greatest rea∣cheth North and South, hauing a high ho∣uell on the South side, and on the North side two low houels▪ with a valley in the middle: thus the West side sheweth, but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde, with a small valley in the middle, making 2. rocks, shewing like two men: the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side, somewhat distant from the other, making a channell betwéene both, where you may passe through, for it is fayre grounde: this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes, from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe, which you must a∣uoide, for all the other places are good and faire, being twelue fadome déep: close by the Iland, and in the greatest Iland on the south West side, there is fresh water with a sandie bay, and when you make towardes this I∣land, comming to it you shall finde therea∣boutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground, and if you find muddie grounde, then you are hard by the land: from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles: this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées, and along by it, it is banky and muddy grounde: it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy, East Northeast and West Southwest, stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the ha∣uen of Camboia, which is twelue miles di∣stant: this hauen is called Dos Malyos, (that is of the Malaquiters, or those of Ma∣lacca) lying right ouer against Pulo Con∣dor, which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast, and northwest & by North, and southeast and by South, from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer, being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen, on the side sandie grounde, and in the middle muddie ground: the Chinars that saile frō Sion to China passe by y^e north side of Pulo Wy, and when they are right ouer a∣gainst it, then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid, running the same course to Pulo Condor, which they see vppon the North side, when you are right against this point or hooke, then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde, and somewhat fur∣ther 13. fadome sandie ground, but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land, but rather kéep at 14. fadome, for it is surer: & take heed of 2. Ilands, that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor, which will bee on the South side, and right before you, you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor, lying vnder 8. degrées, and ⅔. and you runne with Pulo Wy East & West, and somewhat east and by south, and west and by North, and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side, and so it should be on your North side, then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof, alwaies taking héede of the a∣foresaid Riffe of the Ilandes, ••••king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor, with good regard of the Ilandes: the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point (pas∣sing by the South side of Pulo Wy, within 3. miles thereof) you shall finde 16. fadome deep, and keeping your course to Pulo Con∣dor, at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the I∣landes, being 6. miles from Pulo Condor, but rather take the depth (for more securitie) of scarce seuentéen fadome, whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor, within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest, and when you are in sight of the Ilands, then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will, leauing the Ilands on the North side, if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa, thē runne North Northeast, and Northeast and by north, which will bring you to the sea coast, and to shunne the sands whereon Ma∣thias de Brito fell, which lie 4. miles from the land, if you runne along the shore at 13▪ fadome, then you come vppon those sandes, but when you are past them, all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground, and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China: the sands aforesaid lie vp∣on the coast of Champa, runne with Pulo Condor North and South, and North and by East, and south and by West, and almost halfe a strike more.

The 22. Chapter. Of the course from the Island Pulo Con∣dor to the hauen of Sian.

FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy, there are about full 20. miles, lying from each other East and West, and some∣what East and by North, and West and by south, and to go to Pulo Wy, hold your course right west, not recke∣ning any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse, and being founde what more thē halfe way, you shal finde a banke of muddie

ground, of 8. or 9. fadome deepe, and being northward in the sterne of the shippe, you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande, this banke a∣foresaid being past, it will not bee long be∣fore you shall see Pulo Wy, right ouer a∣gainst you, and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side: you must vnderstand y^t this land of Camboia maketh a point frō whence the banke aforesaid runneth of, from this point to y^e hauen of Sian, you run along the coast north northwest by y^t which lyeth many Ilands, stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½. In this countrie ly the most and greatest I∣landes, one by the other, and there make a hooke, for the land hath a créeke called A Ens••••da de Lian, which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½. the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾. and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth in∣wardes, reacheth east northeast, and hath many trees, w^t a sandy strand: frō this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees: you cannot passe bee∣tweene the first Iland and the land, for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second (or the better to bee vnder∣stood) betweene them both, there is a small channell, but very deep of 60. fadom water, and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke, little more or lesse, about half a mile from the land on the inner side, there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth, which at low water may bee seene, you run from this point to the hauen of Sian, along by the land north and south: the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along, they are not ouer great, neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water, and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile, and nearer you shall not goe, neither runne in betweene them and the land, but let them lie on the east side, comming to Pulo W••, vntill the tenth of February, there you find much east wind, whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall, therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands, that ly along by the coast, being sure not to put in betweene them, keeping this course north northwest, along the shore, as I saide before, and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland (which is full vnder 12. deg.) without seeing any more Ilandes, then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Ly∣on▪ and being there, you shall presentlie set your course Northwest, & Northwest and by North, to get out of the creeke, least the streame should driue you inward▪ & with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid, lying on the north point of the a∣foresaid créeke, & it is in crossing ouer twelue miles, & as you begin to see the coast on the o∣ther side, lying before the créeke northwarde, the Iland stretching in that sort as I said be∣fore, being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether, & being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore: these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian, as aforesaid, and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands, one running through the other along the coast: these Ilands haue no trees▪ & are of red earth, and comming to the end of these Ilands, then put to the shore, vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you, then take your course right North, wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian, which lyeth frō these Ilands 10. miles distant. The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees, & without any sandy strands, but altogether of soft muddie ground & dirte, & hath likewise a banke of muddie ground, rea∣ching two miles and a halfe southward: whē you enter first vpon this bank it is hard mud∣die ground: you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide: and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground, ther is no danger, for you must come vpon drie land to put out, or in with the tides, comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian, in manner as I said before, sai∣ling northward, & as they ly southward from you, being in the night time, you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde, for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer a∣gainst the hauen, so that you shall plainly sée it, for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer, & you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground, & all with the tides and south winds, which will bring you vpwards at pleasure.

The 23. Chapter. Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon, & Pe∣dra Branq••••.

DEparting from the point of y^e hauē of Camboia, & being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea, you shal hold your course Southwest, whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying be∣tweene Pulo Co••dor and Pulo Wy, from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest, not once putting South∣ward, because of y^e strong streams, y^t run to y^e

Iland of Bornon, and if the wind begin to be calme, and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe, you may well doe it, for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe, ther∣fore leaue not sayling Southwest ward, for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon, the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great, high, and full of trées, and hath verie good fresh water, and if you néede, there you may haue it, right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland, when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon, on the Northeast point you shall sée a round I∣land, and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland, or betwéen it and the Firme land, you may wel do it, for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place, and comming to Pulo Tymon, you shall hold your course South, and somwhat South and by West, towards Pulo Tynge, which is a verie high & rounde Iland, much like a Doune, or a sheafe of Corne, it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South, and South and by West, you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe, & from thence you begin the course to Sincapura, running about thrée or foure miles Westward.

The 24. Chapter. Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon, & the straight of Sincapura.

WHen you depart from Macau to y^e other coast, you must put out at the East chanel, if the wind bee Northwest, if not, then you cannot passe, that way, but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel, which is a good way to passe out, running from the point of Varella, right vn∣to the land on the other side of Macau, to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida, and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side, then you shall runne along to a point of land, which is the end thereof, where the Iland of Castro lyeth, from this point the banke hangeth off, for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro, then to the point of land that you runne not on ground, for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand, and the depthes on the right hand, with a spring tide, at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe, and being without the banke, you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole, running as then to the point of the banke, to shunne the Cliffes, which will presently bee seen, for that the water breaketh vpon them) vntill they be on your right hand, being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following, and hauing also departed from Varella, being a Harquebush shot from thence, you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio, (that of the Meercatte) and being ouer against it, passe close by it, for it is a good way, for the north winds which you find there abouts, and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce, the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell, and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast, to the Iland of Castro, and when you are out of the chanell, you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands, if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon, and when you are within eight miles of it, being to Seaward from it, then you haue good sayling, for I doe alwaies hold this course, and passe well with it, being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon, you shall runne Southwest, for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands, and being there, you shal then runne South∣west, so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon, and then againe run∣ning South southwest, and South, & South and by West, by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto, which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind, being in sight of the I∣lands of Ieronimo Pretto, and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir, and hauing a bad wind, not being North, then the time will shew you what you haue to doe, when you see those Ilands, you may goe neere them if you will, for it is faire cleare sandie ground, at fifteene Fadome, from thence to Pulo Cambir, the coast runneth North & South, and somewhat North and by West, & South and by East, this Iland Pulo Cambir, is long and flat, and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines, the bushes thereof being euen and alike, right ouer against the points thereof, Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer, which is the ryuer of Pu∣lo Cambir, if you come thether in the Mon∣son of South winds, you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good. You shal like∣wise vnderstand, that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South South∣west, and then you shall likewise sée the I∣lands of Ieronimo Pretto, but it must bee w^t a Compasse y^t is fix, I aduertise you once

more, that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir, about thrée or foure miles from it, there lyeth certaine Ilands, and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there ly∣eth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water, that show like Bucks hornes, you may frée∣ly passe betwéene all the Ilands, and that I∣land for it is faire and good ground. From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South, & somewhat North and by West, and South and by East, it is twelue miles distant, this Varella is a verie high tower, standing vppon a point of land, that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea, by this Varella there is a Ha∣uen, which you cannot sée, as you come out∣ward towardes it, because the one land run∣neth through the other, also vppon this point sticking out on the south side, there is a place of verie good fresh water, in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water, vpon an other san∣die Strand, the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands, and when you come thether to fetch water, it must be with a good tide, for there you haue no Anker ground, but verie close to the shore, the best way is, to put into the Bay, for it is a good Hauen, I haue béene in it, and it hath good Harber, for North and South winds, with 14.15. and 16. fadome déepe, sandie ground, and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land, you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground, this ha∣uen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées, in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir, there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella, from the point of Varella to these Ilands, the coast runneth North and south, and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir, you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast, and South Southwest, this I∣land Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land, (because it lyeth on the coast, for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward) is a stonie Iland, without bushes, hauing in the middle a pointed hill, like a Varella, it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea wa∣ter, to know Pulo Sesir, being a mile or two from it, vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening, this countrie is good to passe along by it, for the space of two miles, where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Se∣sir, for it is an euill way, because you haue but 4 fadome déepe, with stonie ground: Pu∣lo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees, and the course from Varella to Pu∣lo Sesir is about 50 miles: from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west, and southwest & by south, at 18. and 20. fadome deepe, whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor: but I ad∣uise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor, to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouth¦west, at 18. or 20. fadome deepe, and when you find 15. fadome, thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia, and shall not sée Pulo Condor, but on the land side: but for your better way, you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome, and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor, which is a great Iland, hauing many Ilands roūd about it, and in e∣uery place much anker ground: there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side: it lieth vnder 8 degrees & ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pu∣lo Condor are 50. miles, and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome, muddy ground: in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast: it sheweth like 3. hilles, which stand in the space of two openings, which are in the middle of the land, and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland. From thence to Pulo Tymon, you shall take your course south, and south & by west, at 28. and 30. fadome, being from the one to the other 115. miles, and you shall alwaies runne, as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points cal∣led Pulo Tingaron, southsouthwest, because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon, & leaue not that course at any hand til you see it, for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon: this is a good course, and I ad∣uertise you againe, that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon, in the middle betweene them both, you shall find 25. fadome deepe: in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome. Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr. and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland, hauing o∣ther Ilands lying by it: on the North syde it hath fresh water, in a sandy strand, where the ships that come from Sunda, to goe for Chi∣na, take in water: being in sight of Pulo Ty∣mon, you shall passe on the out side therof, till you passe by the south poynt, along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland, which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you: and as soone as you are in the channell, on the southwest syde, you shall see an other high Iland, called Pulo Tinge, to the which you shall goe, within a mile and a half, or two miles thereof, and being there you shall take your course southward to Pe∣dra Branca, or the white Cliffe, at 18. or 20. fadome deepe, alwaies with the lead in hand: & if in this course you come to lesse groūd, thē put to sea ward, till you be at 18 fadome, a∣bout

4 miles distant from the coast▪ to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana, where the Ilands lie, which you shal presently sée, hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca: but when you sée, you shall make towardes it, which you must keepe on the lee side, for y^t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton, wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca, for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers, and you shal still sayl with your lead in hand, and when you find 15. or 16. fadom, thē you are at the end of the riffe, and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pe∣dra Branca, and comming to 18. fadome, then put no further to the sea: and running in that sort, till you sée Pedra Branca, run∣ning as then to the poynt of the land, that you shall sée on the land of Iantana, which is the land on the North side, which you shall passe along by, till you come to see redde Ho∣uels, lying at the Hauen of Ior: and before you come to the hauen of Ior, you shall hold off from it, not putting into the hauen: for there lyeth a Banke, but you must passe the redde Houels, and runne towardes the land, which is a sandie strand: and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura, you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Bran∣ca, you runne to the land of Iantana, without turning to the other side, for there it is verie bad ground, and the wind would hinder you to get ouer, and if you desire to run on the in∣side of the Iland Pulo Tymon, you may wel doe it.

The 25. Chapter. The course from Malacca to Sunda, lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior, with the situation of the countrie.

SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca, to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa, your course lieth Northwest & Southeast, and Northwest and by west, and southeast and by east, which is 13. miles: all this way, if you will, you may anker, and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe, good muddy ground. This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca, within the entry, on the Southeast side hath high land, and on the Northwest side low land: it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe: when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde, keeping from the Northwest, for ther you shall find shallowes. From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon, which lyeth in the same Coast, a myle from the land aforesayd, you runne Northwest and Southeast, and Northwest and by north, and Southwest and by south: betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd, and the course is 6 miles: from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon, which is a great and high land with trees, with some Ilands round about it: you runne North and south, and north and by west, and South and by east, and are distant 5. miles: from the I∣land Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra, you must make towardes this Iland, and from thence run along by it, on the west syde, for it is good way. On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth cer∣tain Ilandes: from these Ilandes two myles forward, lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon: there the channell is at the narrowest. From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon, that is y^e straight or narrow passage of Sabon, and be∣ing as farre as that Iland, you shall hold a∣bout half a mile from it: from Alonalon, to the great Iland of Sabon, are about 2 miles, in the middle of this channel, there lieth other smal Ilands, that shall all lie on the East side from you, hauing good regard not to fall vpon them: whē you run through this channel, you must be aduertised, that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe, vnder the water, whereon a ship did once strike with her Ru∣ther. Comming by the Iland Alanolon, on the Southwest thereof, that is on the syde of Sumatra, you shal see two small Ilands, with an other somewhat lesse full of trées, bee all rampard, with certaine cliffes lying by them: and whē those Ilandes are southwest & south west & by west frō you: thē you shal hold your course South, where you shall find nyne fa∣dome water, alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon, which is the east syde, for it is shallow, but run in the middle of the chan∣nel, for it is good ground: half a mile off from the Iland Sabon, lieth a small Iland, called Pulo Pandha: this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe, and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you, thē hold your course southward, and you shal find 9. fadome deepe, running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon: the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past, you shall find hard ground, holding your course South vn∣till the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you, where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker, if you will, and when the afore∣sayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd, then on the West syde, you shall see two

Ilandes or Cliffes, whereof the first hath some trees, and the other (which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar, in the Iland of Su∣matra) hath no trées: they close one to the o∣ther: from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes: when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra, you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward, as I saide before, holding your course along the coast of Sabon, about halfe a mile from it, where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground, vntill you come to a small Iland, ly∣ing hard by the coast of Sabon, hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it, you shall keepe outwarde from it, leauing it on the side of Sabon: there likewise you haue muddie ground, and the shot of a great péece further off, the depthes will presently begin to lessen, to seuen and sixe fadome, and ½. from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon, lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar: those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra, right in the face of this point, about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes, which at full sea cannot be séene: they are called Ba∣totinge, betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe, and betwéene them both nyne fadome: you may passe with a shippe betweene them, and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra, you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe, to make towards these cliffes, and also to passe by them you shall take your course, (as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do, passing along by Sabon, with your lead in your hand at seuen, sixe, ½. & ••. fadom deep, and thether the depths will lessen, being all muddie ground, which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon, and with a point of the lande of Sumatra, being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar, called As Bocas de Campar, from whence the one land lyeth with the other, East and West: in this coun∣try are the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge, being here, the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome: which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you, and from thence putting to sea, towards the side of Samatra, leauing Sa∣bon side being carefull to kéepe from it, for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you, but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto, you shall likewise take heed on both sides, as wel of Sabon, as Suma∣tra for they are all ouer, from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes. These two Cliffes aforesaid being past, which you shall almost leaue behinde you, you shall pre∣sently runne to the land of Sumatra, with the lead in your hand, not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land, nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward, with your lead neuer out of hand: for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes, then by the compasse. When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon, then you haue ano∣ther Island, called Pulo Dure, which reach∣eth to another Island called Pulo Boyon, & then another Iland called Pulo Buron, which lie so close to Sumatra, that they séeme to be all one land, at the end of this Iland Dure, lie 3. Ilands, one great and two small. This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sa∣bon, (where the two small Cliffes lie) north, northwest, and south southeast, they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles, with 6.7. and 8. fadome water muddie ground, & when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron, which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra, then run southeast, and southeast & by south, and following that course, vntil you come to tenne fadome, then runne South∣east, vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro, from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles, which is without the channell, and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you, then run south, and south, and by east, to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas, whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side, the middle Iland hath nothing at all, and the third Iland that lieth most southward, hath an Iland lying by it on the North side. These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanian∣baro somewhat further, lieth an other point, called Tanianbaro, which is very euen with the sea, betwéene these 2. points lieth the Ri∣uer of Andargyn, and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West▪ & betweene both the points are 9. miles. When you sée this point, then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra, because there are many créekes, from this point, you make to the Ilands Ca∣lantigas Northwest and Southeast, and is in length about seauen miles. These I∣lands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall, & on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes, both a∣boue & vnder the water: therefore you must put off from them to seaward: for that be∣tweene them & the Iland of Linga it is ve∣ry foule and dangerous, if you will goe from

the Islandes Calantigas, to the Island Va∣rella, then hold your course Southeast and Southeast, and by East, whereby you shall come to it. They are in distance 9. miles, and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe, and close by the land sixtéene, and seuentéene fadome on the North side, but on the South side it is lesse. This Island hath fresh water, it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra, called Tani∣anbon, from the which point to the Island are two miles, and you runne North North∣west, and South Southeast, and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point, lea∣uing the Island to seaward. On the backe bord side, in the face of this point, lieth thrée Islandes, whereof the greatest is called Iambe, but along by the land of Samatra, you haue neyther Islandes, nor Cliffes.

To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon, then run Southeast, at seuen fadome muddy ground, and with this course you shall sée the hill cal∣led Monte de Manopyn, which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca. When you sée this hill, then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra, because of the créekes, and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra, leauing the hill on the northeast side, not comming any nearer to it, for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it, and when you are right against the hill Ma∣nopyn, thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon, lying vppon the Coast of Samatra, a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon for∣ward, there lieth a smal or thin point of land, and on the south side of the same point, there are many cliffes & rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water, which make the riffes aforesaid: wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe, or two miles from it, & be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes, for that from many depthes, you will at the last fall on ground, as it happened to a ship, which sai∣ling on that side, close to the Island Banca, at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones. You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bo∣cas de Palimbon, or the mouthes of Palim∣bon, for they are altogether shallowes and sandes, let your Lead be still in hand, and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½, to the land, vntill you be past them, nor aboue eight fadome to seaward, and if you come to eight fadome, then rather kéepe at lesse depth (as I said before.) You runne from this hill Ma∣nopyn) which standeth in the Iland Banca) to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon (that lie on the other side of Samatra, north north∣east, & south southwest, and is in course fiue miles. From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon, which reacheth southeast∣ward, and sometimes eastward, and in other places southward, till you be past through it, being past the hill of Manopyn, about two miles beyond it, you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon, with the Lead in hand, keeping a mile from it, at 5. fadome and ½, and goe no nearer to it, for they are altogether shallowes and sandes: wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½, and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome, holding your course in this manner, till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon, & being there, you shall make with the land of Samatra, till you be within halfe a mile thereof, where th•• land about a long mile right out before you, maketh a point, and being by this point, you shall sée another point, which is distant from the first point 4. miles, and the course from the one to the other is east southeast, & west northwest, and beeing at this second point, about a mile beyond it on the same coast lieth a small riuer, and betwéene this point and the riuer, you runne halfe a mile of the shore or coast of Samatra, alwaies with your lead in hand. From this riuer aforesaid, you shall put from the coast, from this Riuer to another point, (lying 5, miles forward) it is altogether bankes, and shallowes with muddie ground: therefore you shall still saile with your lead in hand, & goe no nearer then 5. fadome to the coast of Samatra, for if you doe you run on ground, and at this depth you shall run to the aforesaid point that lieth be∣fore you, & right against it on the other side of the Iland Banca, hath a point or hooke of high land, where the channell is at the smal∣est, and comming by this point aforesaid, you shall presently finde more depthes. When you come to this point aforesaid, then runne south southeast, holding that course till you come to the Iland of Lasapara, which lieth right before you, being distant from the saide point 9. miles. This Iland is small and low land, being round about full of sands and shallowes, and when you sée it, then runne South and South and by east, within two miles of the land, on the south side of Sama∣tra, and sixe and seauen fadome, for it is your right way and course to passe before that I∣land, and if you finde ten or twelue fadome, then turne againe to the coast of Samatra, séeking for fiue fadome, that you may runne at sixe and seauen fadome, and beeing there keepe that course, leauing the Iland of Lasa∣para,

on the east side, and when you begin to enter therein, then run southward, and being right against the Iland, then your depthes will begin to lessen to 5. fadome, but bee not abashed, for it is the right depthes you find in that place, and when the Iland is Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it, from the Iland Lasapara twelue miles for∣ward, there is an Iland (lying close by the Land of Samatra) that maketh a smal créeke or bay, and for a marke it hath this token, that the trees thereof are higher then those of the coast, and séeme little woodes: you runne from this Iland to Lasapara North North: east, and south southwest, from the which I∣land there runneth a Riffe, reaching two miles and a halfe into the sea: therefore if you desire to saile thether, being in the night time, you shall run southward with your lead in hand, at 8. and 9. fadome, and though you come to 11. fadome, yet your course is good, but you shall not runne vnder 7. fadome, and as you thinke you are past by the Iland, then you shall take your course againe towardes the land, and there you shall finde 8. and 9. fadome, & comming to this Iland in the daie time, you shall put so far from it into the sea, that you may onely sée the toppes and vpper parts of the trees, and when it lieth North∣west from you, then you are past the Riffe, & then againe runne in with the land at 8. and 9, fadome déepe, as aforesaid: for the right way and course is alwaies along the Coast: beyond this Ilād forward, there lieth a gréene creeke vpon the coast, which you shall shun: for there it is altogether shallowes, and the corner therof towards the south hath a thick point of land, that sticketh further out then al the rest that are there abouts: within this hooke toward the créeke lieth a Riuer, from whence there commeth a banke, reaching 2. miles into the sea, and is foure fadome deepe, all hard sand, in that countrie where I haue passed: therfore I aduise you not to leaue the depthes of 8. & 9. fadome, which is the right course, and you passe from this Iland to the aforesaid Riffe, south, southwest, and North, Northeast, being distant ten miles from this point of the creeke, to two Ilandes (lying on the same coast of Samatra forward) you run in the same course of north northeast, and south southwest, and is in course ten miles, in all this way you shall finde 9.10. and 11. fa∣dome. These Ilandes are distant from the land 3. or 4. miles, and comming to these I∣landes, then the land and coast of Samatra maketh a thicke crooked ridge or backe, and if it be cleare weather you shall sée right before you two high landes, wherof one lieth south∣westward from you, which is the land of Sa∣matra, and the other southward, which is the land of Sanda, part of the Iland Iaua Maior. From the two Ilands aforesaid, you shall al∣waies hold your course along by this crooked thicke ridge of the coast of Samatra, & being at the point thereof, then the land beginneth againe to be low, and then you begin cleare∣ly to sée the two foresaid lands. Betweene those two high landes, there runneth a chan∣nell or straight inward to the sea, betwéene the land of Samatra, and Iaua Maior (which is called the straight of Sunda) & beeing past the great thick ridge of the coast of Samatra, and comming againe by the low land, then runne no longer by the coast, but if you haue a good forewind, then presently crosse ouer, holding your course south southeast to the land of Sunda, to the southeast side of a point or hooke of that land, by the which lieth the way to Sunda: therefore I aduertise you ha∣uing a good forewind to crosse ouer, for that if the winde should begin eyther to be calme in the middle way, the tide being with you, the streame would driue you to the channell, which is no good course, for the least depth of the channell is 40. fadome and more, & the streames and tydes therein runne very stiffe both out and in, and if they should driue you in, as the streame commeth forth, being with a Northeast or east winde, you should finde the waues of the sea hollow, and full, that no cable would be strong enough to hold against them, & by force would driue you out againe, which would be no small labour and paine to you. I say this, because I my selfe haue found it so comming into it, by mine owne vnadui∣sednes, in crossing ouer to the high land, lying on the side of Sunda, and held our course right vpon the midle thereof, but the streame draue you ouerthwart before we perceiued it: ther∣fore I aduise you that you runne southeast to it: for the more you runne eastward, the lesse depth you shall haue to anker in, if the winde should calme: and it is good ground, and be∣ing by the land aforesaid, close by it you shall presently sée a great & flat Iland, full of trées, with many hilles, hauing to seaward from it or toward the northeast, another flat Iland, and from thence to the hauen of Sunda, it is about 4. miles▪ you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast, keeping to seaward, or halfe a mile from it, for it is all faire and good ground, at 6 and 7. fadome deepe, and so you shall runne a∣long to the end therof, and being there about a mile southeastward, you shall sée a small I∣land full of trees, which you shall leaue on the southeast side, running inward from it, right to a high pointed hill, (that standeth within the land) and when you begin to come

néere it, then you shall see the houses of the towne, which lieth along by the strand, and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome, as you thinke good, for it is all muddie ground, and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell, which passeth betweene the great Iland, and the high land of Sunda, you may well doe it, alwaies running along by the land, vntill you be by the Hauen: for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid, and six I∣lands more (that are somewhat further) to seaward, but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground: wherefore the way passing about is the best, as I said before.

The 26. Chapter. The course from the Hauen of Bantam, to the Hauen Calapa, called Sunda Calapa, both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior.

SAyling from the Ha∣uen of Bantam, to Sunda Calapa, you should holde your course, betweene the little Iland and the Iland (lying right o∣uer against the croo∣ked point, because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights, sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands, or along by them, for it is all good way, at fiue and sixe fa∣dome deepe muddie ground, because that frō the hooke of the bow or crooked point) there runneth a great banke or sand, and being a∣bout this hooke, you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe, till you be a good mile from it, for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land, it is altogether bankie & shal∣low sandie ground, and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda, and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small, which are al vnder the same course: at the end of those Ilands, which are foure, one great and thrée smal, they are ioy∣ned together with Riffes, and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure & twenty fiue fadome deepe, and you shall leaue al those Ilandes, standing on a row to seaward from you: from the point aforesaid called the croo∣ked hooke. All the coast vnto Calapa run∣neth East, and somewhat East and by south, & you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome: for if you put further to seaward, then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight, or the channell that runneth outwardes be∣tweene Iaua and Samatra, which is against you, and is of manie depthes: ••oure miles frō the crooked hooke or point forward, then the coast hath another point of land, where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it▪ there lieth a round Iland, but you must not passe betweene it, and the land: for it is very shallow & stonie ground, only small fusts may passe through it, but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it, for it is all a∣long nothing but stones, a little mile beyond this Iland, there is another Iland, and then yet a little further close by, there lyeth ano∣ther little Iland: from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land, there lyeth two other Ilands, & betwéene the two first Ilands, and these two Ilands, there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe, which pass∣ing through you shall runne nerest to the I∣lands that lie most to seaward, & if you will not passe through, then run about to seaward from them, at 12.13. and 15. fadome déepe, from this long Iland northward, endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward, hauing the Riffs, as I said before, and make a mouth or open∣ing of a channel, of a great mile long: you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land: for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall present∣ly sée the Riffes, which with a low water are most part vncouered: being past this long I∣land, & the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it, as also the two that lie further forward, & the land of the coast that hath the point, then somewhat beyond this point 4. o∣ther Ilands, betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe, & a small mile further eastward, there lieth other 4. Ilands, two and two together, at the end whereof to seaward there is a white sād that alwaies lieth vncouered, all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand, on the land side, and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand, you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east & west one from the o∣ther, & at the foote of the east hill lieth the ha∣uen of Calapa, where you shall anker, if you wil enter into the hauen, being past the fore∣said sands, & an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land, then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you, which teach to∣wards the land, & another close by he land, then you shal take heed of a sand, lying north east close by the hauen, which you may al∣waies see, and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood, you shal runne to∣wardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time, to shunne the droughtes aforesaid.

The 27. Chapter. The course from the Iland Pulo Timon, to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior.

FRom the Iland of Pu∣lo Timon, you run to the Iland of Binton, to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost East∣ward into the sea south Southeast, and North Northwest, and hard by this point lieth cer∣taine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes, and on the north side of this point it hath an ope∣ning or mouth, wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles, and a vallie in the middle, and along by this point, lesse then halfe a mile from the land, there are eight fa∣dome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground, and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes, & Rockes that lie close by the land: from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton, to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion, which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it, you runne Southeast, and Northwest, & Southeast and by east, and Northwest and by West: betweene this Iland Pulo Pani∣on, and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening, which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands, full of trées, and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side, then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land: it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good ground, and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you. This Iland of Pulo Panion, lieth close to the land of Binton, and if you fortune to be so neare the land, that you may not passe by it on the sea side, then you must runne to the northwest point, where there lieth a roūd Iland, which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland, not running betwéene it and the I∣land, but round about it close to the land, for it is faire running so inward along by the I∣lands as I said before, on the southeast point of this Iland Panion, there lieth many I∣lands and Cliffes, and two miles Southeast∣ward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées, you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands, towards the Iland of Linga, which is a faire cleare way and sea, and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening, then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland, for it is good way: from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe, about the length of the shot of a great péece, and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered, yet you may sée the water breake vpon them, which you must shun. From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga, (lying close on the East side of the same Iland) you shall holde your course South, and South, and by East, and runne Southward outward, alwaies along the I∣landes, which shall lie Westward from you, and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side, a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest, which is al∣most of forme like the Iland das Iarras, ly∣ing by Malacca, and foure miles before you come at it, you shall sée two other smal round Ilands, lying along by the land, and sepera∣ted from the rest but not far, and when you are as farre as the first round Iland, béeing cleare weather, then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga, lying West, Southwestward from you aboue, or beyond the Ilandes (whereby you passe) which are all low houels and vallies, and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands, & com∣ming about thrée miles beyond the round I∣sland, you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land, which at the first shew∣eth like two Cliffes, and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards mak∣ing a créeke (called a Enseada de Linga) and when you are as farre as this small Island, then West, Northwestward, you shall sée the high land of Linga, which sheweth like two high rockes or hils, seperated from each other, and reach North and South, that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares, and Westward you shall sée another Land, which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward. In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland, you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground, to the point or end of these Islands, and by it you shall haue twen∣tie eight fadome, and comming by this point, (where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you) to goe to Pulo Pon, (which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles, on the North side hauing two small Ilandes, and when you are on the Northeast side, it séemeth to be round, with a sharpe hill in the middle, and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle, as in effect it is,) then you must runne South Southwest, and being thrée or foure miles forward, you shal sée the Iland of Pulo

Pon lie before you: in it you haue fresh wa∣ter, and round about it is fayre ground: when you see it, you shall make towards it: on the West side, and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep, and being by it runne South, and south and by East, with the which course you shall sée the hill of Mano∣pijn, lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca, where the straight of Palimbon be∣ginneth, and the seuen Ilands, called Pulo Tayo, shall lie southeastwarde from you, which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles, and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom, then you are on the East side, and hauing ten fadome, then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca, and finding 8. fadome, you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra, and as soone as you sée Manopijn, then runne within two miles thereof, before you enter into the straight or channell, in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palim∣bon towards the coast of Sumatra, shunning a great créek, lying Northwest frō y^e mouthes of Palimbō, vpon y^e same coast of Sumatra, which hath a verie great hauen and entrie, whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein: it hath no shallowes, and presently (as you passe along the coast) you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest: from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda, as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down, therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe.

The 28. Chapter. The course along the coast of Sumatra, f••ō the outside, beginning at the f••rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees, on the North side of the Equinoctiall, to the straight of Sunda, and so to the Islande Iaua Maior, with the situation of the coasts.

BEing by the fur∣thest point or ende of the Island of Su∣matra, on the out side then you must runne south along the coast: it is a very high and plea∣sant country to be∣hold, with many great créekes, and Bayes along by the coast. From this first & further point, (called Achein) 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea, the coast runneth South, and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tay∣de (that is the sandes of Trystan de Tay∣de,) you must runne along the coast South∣east, and southeast and by south: the course is fiftie miles: by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde, there are many sandes and shal∣lows that lie round about them on the west, Northwest, and North sides, with many I∣landes and Cliffes on the same sides: these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the I∣landes of Pulo, Sambilon, lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde, there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro, that is, the gold Ilandes, whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant, the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea: they lie vn∣der two degrées, and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line: from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda, hauing many I∣landes all along as you passe, as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe, on the southside of the Equinoctiall, East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra, called Cabo das Cor∣rentes, (that is, the point of the streame) be∣cause there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest, wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore: if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda, you must be verie careful, for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast, that they are not to be numbred, from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde, to the I∣landes of Manancabo are about 100. miles, and your course is Northwest, and southeast, & somewhat Northwest and by North, and southeast and by south, you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro, and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes, which is verie high, running into the sea further then all the rest of the land, but you must not go too neere to the point, for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it: this point lyeth vnder one degrée and ⅔. on the South side of the Equinoctiall. I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra, because the streames draue to seaward, without all these Ilands. & so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo, that is, the golde Iland of Manancabo, and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies, along by it: it is a verie high and faire Iland to be∣hold, so that you may easily iudge & well per∣ceyue that it hath Gold: it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde, & along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length, you run by it North & south, and somewhat north

and b•• West, and south and by East: it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes, about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees, which is the height that I found, but they are distant from the firme lande of Su∣matra 8. or 9. myles, the Riuer of Manan∣cabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie, I think it to be a verie great riuer: for from thence there runneth a great streame, and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea. The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was, that we ne∣uer left the sight of land, but ran along by it, for by that course you come to the Iland Il∣ha de Ouro, scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½. I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame, that draweth Southwestward, as I said before: from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of S••nda southeast, and Southeast and by south, and being past Ilha de Ouro there ly∣eth two Ilandes, which reach North and south one from the other, in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles: nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda, you must not leaue the coast of the firme land, hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes, whereof there are very many lying by it, that you can hardly know where to find y^e mouth of the straight, but onely by the knowledge of the Islande, which is very high, lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra, on the north side: this firme land of Sumatra endeth there, where with the Iland of Iaua Maior, it ma∣keth the straight: it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands, lying about a mile from the land, and vpon the I∣landes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men, the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda, and Cal••pa, and a•• mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill, as I saide before, and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland, are 4. Ilands, where∣of one is verie high, reaching Northeast and southwest: they lie somewhat further from it, that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the Northeast side: betweene al these Ilands & the land there is a great créeke, of man•• hidden cliffes lying vnder the water, whereof some are vncouered, and thinke not to enter into this créeke, vnlesse it be with a Fuste, or a very small ship, for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof, along by the point, which you neede not feare, for it hath nothing that can hurt you, and then you shall presently sée ly∣ing before you on the Northeast side a poynt of lande, which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. I∣lands at the end thereof: along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda, where you must passe through: this point reacheth North and south, hauing in the North a high houell, the south side being the ende of the same land: close by the mouth of the straight, for a better marke Northeast∣ward from you, you sée a long Iland, and on the southeast part a high land, which land ly∣eth aboue Bantam, a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua, where the Portingalles lade Pepper, which groweth & is gathered in that Ilande, and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam, and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam, you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands, and if you desire to go to Ban∣tam, you may passe betweene these Ilands, but I once againe aduise you of the Iland ly∣ing in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide, which is for a marke of the said straight, being very high, and deepe withall, and hath this token, that when you are past or about the first point or hooke, you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion, vnlesse it be close to the land, where there lyeth many white stones, and rockes, and further to seawarde it is al∣together muddie grounde, at 20. and 25. fa∣dome, but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie, for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land: this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½. for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker, and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y^e same height: to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight, the first Ilandes lying West to seaward, from the aforesaid pointed high hill, or Iland, and West Southwest, or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes, with cer∣taine Cliffes lying about them, and South∣ward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth o∣ther high and great Ilands, and also South∣westward from thence there are other I∣landes, betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles, which are so narrow, that men can hardly get out of them: the best channell to runne through I founde by the a∣foresaide high pointed hill or Islande on the South-East side, reaching Northeast and southwest: in all these channels you neede feare nothing but that which lyeth before your eies.

The 29. Chapter. To saile from Calapa in the Islande Iaua Maior to China, with the courses and situations of the coasts particularly set downe.

SAyling out of the hauen of Calapa, you shall runne to an Iland lying by the poynt of Carauon, that lyeth née∣rest to the land, wherby you shal presently see two points of sandie downes, which reach towardes the Ilands that reach to seaward: when they are on your right hande, then you must put in betwéene the Ilandes, through the channell where the winde giueth you best way, for it is all fayre and good ground: being past these Ilandes, you shall runne along by the coast to the point of Carauon, which lyeth East∣ward about two and a halfe, or thrée myles in length, from thence to take your course crosse ouer to the Islande of Lusepara, and from this point of Carauon, lying on the coast of Iaua, you runne North and South to the Iland of Lusepara or Lasapara, and somewhat North and by West, and South and by East: the course being fiftie miles the course is holden in this manner, because the East and East Southeast winds as then be∣ginne to blowe in those countries, that is as soone as the month of May commeth on, and likewise as then the waters and streams be∣ginne to runne with the Monson of the year, (which is the coniunction and time of the cer∣taine winds) towards the straight of Sunda, the channell of Lampon, which beginneth from the mouth, & reacheth to a thicke point and créeke with a Riffe, lying on the coast of Sumatra, about 18. or 19. miles from Lu∣separa, in the Countrey aforesaide: by the point Carauon (which lyeth thrée myles frō the hauen of Calapa) you shall take your course North Northeast for 8. or 9. miles, whereby you shall sée a round Island, which will lie on the side of the land of Sunda or Ia∣ua, and being past this Island, Westwarde from thence you shall sée a rowe of Islandes, that do all reach North and south, passing by the countrey of the mouth or straight of Sun∣da, by this aforesaid round Ilande you shall find ground at 20. fadom, at the which depth you shall take your course North, & North and by West, whereby you shall alwaies be within the sight of the aboue named Ilands, to the ende of them, with the aforesaid depth of 20. fadome: when you beginne to lose the sight of these Ilandes, being past them you shall presently come to 14. and 13. fadome, and being at 13. fadome, you shall runne the same course of North, and North and by east, vntill as you thinke you are within 15. or 16 miles neere the Iland of Lusepara, and being there, then run North, and there the depthes will begin to lessen to 11. fadome, which is a good course, for that running at more depth you should go outward at Lusepara, & thus sayling North, and at 1••. fadome, as I saide before, you are in your right course till you come to 9. fadom, and being there then looke about you, for you shall not runne long, but you shall sée the Island of L••separa, which will open like two small houelles, lying East and west one from the other, y^t in the east be∣ing greater thē the other: in all this w••y in y^e Month of May I found East & east southeast windes, as I said before, and according to the times of the waters, windes, and streames, you shall gouerne your selfe in such manner, that in your course you alwaies run North∣ward, for it is your right course, & best way from the point Carauon to the Island Luse∣para, and if you go later to saile, hauing a ful wind, without any abatement or cutting off, you shall holde your course right North, for it is very daungerous to saile without the I∣land Lusepara, therefore you shall take your course in such manner, that the Ilande may ly Eastward from you, because Lusepara lyeth twelue myles Eastwarde from the o∣ther Ilande, which is called Lusepara fal∣sa, that is, false or wrong Lusepara, because many shippes haue been deceyued by it, thinking it had béene the right Lusepara, when they came from the Iland of Iaua, and therefore they haue giuen it the name of Lu∣separa falsa: you must take heede of it, for that northward from it, it hath a great creek lying in the Island of Banca, and such as put into it, can hardly gette out againe the right way, for there the windes are very scant, whereby you might indure great paine and daunger to get into the strayght, as it hath happened to some shippes, that were deceyued by Lusepara falsa: therefore I aduise all men when they sayle to Lusepara, that they put not in aboue eleuen fadome, letting the Islande of Lusepara lie on the East side, so assure them of their way. And when you sée Lusepara, being within 3. miles thereof, you shall take heede you goe not right North and south towardes it, for that on the North side, as also on the south, for more then two miles and a halfe: it is altoge∣ther bankes and sands, that are very dange∣rous,

therefore you shall hold on the South∣west side, in such manner that you shall keep two miles from it towardes the lande of Su∣matra, I haue past within lesse then a mile from it, whereby I discouered the whole strande, and a white strande, which banke lyeth on the North side, and in this course I founde fiue fadome and ½. muddie ground, but as soone as the Island was southeast frō vs, we had but four fadome and ½. and 4. fadom, and strake twice on grounde without rother but verie softly: wee founde all ouer san∣die ground, but as soone as wee put to the land of Sumatra, wee had presently deepe ground, therefore I wish you to keepe two miles from the Ilande towardes Sumatra, and when you beginne to come neere it, you shall hardly find fiue fadome muddy grounde: and when it lyeth Eastward from you, then you are right ouer against it, and then you shall presently see a point of the lande of Su∣matra, wherevnto you shall runne, and there you shall find more depthes, and running to∣wardes the coast you may goe within halfe a myle neere the saide point of lande, where you shall finde ten fadome deepe of harde flatte ground, vntill you be a good way from the point, you runne from the coast of Su∣matra, from the straight of Sunda to this point, North Northeast, and South South-West: from this first pointe thrée miles further there is another poynt vpon the said coast of Sumatra, and you shall make the∣ther, kéeping halfe a myle from the coast, alwayes with the lead in your hande, where you shall find the same depthes of 9. or 10. fadome, harde ground, & as you begin to go néer to the aforesaid 2. point thē you shal find muddy ground, & right ouer against it in y^e I∣lande of Banca, there lyeth an other hooke or point of land, where the channell is at the narrowest, it is from the one land to the o∣ther about three miles: from the first point to the second the course is North and South: from the seconde poynt sixe miles forwarde, there is another point vppon the coast of Su∣matra, which you must runne with the o∣ther poynt North Northwest, and South southeast, and betwéene them both it is alto∣gether bankie and very shallow muddie ground, which reacheth also about by the middle way of the channell, being aboue foure miles in length, along by the coast of Sumatra to a Riuer, which you shall sée, and being as farre as the aforesaid point, be not negligent in casting forth your leade, and there you shall come to fiue fadome muddie ground, but runne no lower, for then you shoulde presently bee at foure fadome, you must rule your selfe according to your depthes, alwaies holding your course on the coast of Sumatra not passing aboue seuen fadome, and when you see the aforesaide Ri∣uer, and beginne to bee neere it, then your depthes will presently begin to increase, run∣ning close by it, vntill you bee right against it, being within halfe a mile of the point: foure miles from this third point lyeth yet an other point, which lyeth with the third point East Southeast, and West Northwest, holding your course along by the coast, with∣in halfe a mile of the lande, at seuen and eight fadome déepe, it is altogether to the fourth point muddie ground: from this fourth point to y^e first mouth or creek of Palimbon (called A Premeira Boca de Palimbon) is about two myles, and you runne East and West, and East and by South, and West and by North, and being about a mile beyonde this fourth point aforesaide, you shall keepe off from the coast to seaward to shun the mouth of Palimbon aforesaid, running two miles from it (because of many sands and shallows that are thereabout) alwayes with the lead in hand, not running aboue sixe fadome néere the land, to be the more assured: for from 5. fadome you come presently to foure, and then on ground, and runne not too néere towardes the side of the Islande Banca, for there you find stones and rockes, whereupon the Iun∣co (that is the shippe) of Antam de Payua, did runne, which was at fiftéene fadome, and strake with his rother vpon stones & cliffes: therefore I aduise you not to runne aboue 8. fadome, nor vnder sixe or fiue fadome and ½. from the second mouth or creeke, called A Secunda Boca de Palumbon, close by the third mouth: for when the hill of Manopi••n (that is, the point of the Iland Banca) lyeth full Eastward from you, then you shal crosse ouer, kéeping your course two miles from it, to auoide a Riffe that lyeth southeast from it, & being in this parte whereby the hill of Ma∣nopi••n lyeth southeastward from you, then you shal run North and Northeast & by east, by y^e which course you shal see 7 Ilands, lying altogether, by the country people called Pulo Taye, which lie about 15. miles from Ma∣nopi••n: these Ilands shall lie on the southeast side from you, & being right against these I∣lands, you shal see a little Iland lying in the Northeast, which hath 2. houelles in forme like two men: it lyeth about seuen miles frō the aforesaid Ilandes, & is called Pulo Pon. From these Ilands aforesaid then your course lyeth along by this Iland, and if it be cleare wether, beyond this Iland you shall per∣ceiue the Ilād of Ling••, which is very great,

hauing two high rockes lying north & south from each other: on the south rocke vpon the North poynt thereof, it hath a high sharpe point, with two houels stiking out like hares eares: in this course you shall find 9. or 10. fadome water, all muddy ground. About 5. or 6. myles Northeastward from these afore∣said Ilands there lyeth an other Iland, & hard by the Iland of Banca, you shall see 2. or 3. Ilands, and whē you see them, then passe not by them, for they are the Ilandes of Pulo Tayo, which you séeke, being by these Ilāds of Pulo Tayo, as I said before: you shall doe your best to runne closer to them, then to the Iland Pulo Pon, holding your course north, and north & by east, whereby you shall see the Ilande of Binton and Pulo Panyon, which is hard by, on the East point, making a smal channel betweene them both. From this I∣land Pulo Panyon, about two miles south∣eastward, lyeth a round Iland, full of trees, you may passe betwéene both the Ilandes, or outward about the round Ilande, for it is all faire and good ground, shunning a riffe lying in the South, about two miles from the roūd Iland, wherevpon you shal sée the sea breake: it is about the length of the shot of a great péece, being beyond this Iland: then runne North, whereby you shal see Pedra Branca, that is, the white stone or cliffe, which in the course from Malacca to China we haue of∣tentimes spoken of, from thence forward you shal hold your course, as I haue set it downe in the description of the course from Malac∣ca to China, therefore here again néedlesse to rehearse. From the Iland Pulo Tayo afore∣said, to the aforesaid Iland Pulo Panyon, it may be about 37 miles, litle more or lesse.

The 30. Chapter. The course together with the descriptiō of the Iland of Canton, with all the coasts, hauens, and pointes of the king∣dom of China, to Liampo & Nanquin, with the situation and stretchings of the same.

IN the description of the naui∣gation from Malacca to Chi∣na, we haue shewed the en∣trie of the Channelles of the first Ilandes called Can∣ton, lying vnder 21. degr. & ••, which is the Iland called Ilha de Sanchoan, and the other lying to landward from thence, as also the Ilād of Valco de Faria: you must vnderstand that from this Iland Sanchoan, (which as I said) is the first & furthest to the sea ward, to a point lying 12. miles from the Iland Lamon, you runne without all those Ilands eastnortheast, & westsouthwest: these Ilandes reach about 38. or 39. miles along by the Iland of Sanchoan, and from this I∣land to Lampacon, are 11. miles, and in the hauen of Macau eighteene myles, and from Macau to the end of the Ilands, are twentie one miles: these Ilands lying from Sanchoan to Macau, from the seaward vpon the row, are many and close one to the other, which farre off séeme to be all one land, & from thēce forward they begin to lessen, and to separate one from the other, whereby they may easily be perceiued to be Ilands: all this way to the end of them, to seaward from them, you need not feare any thing, but that you see before your eyes, onlie that you haue 10. or 12. I∣landes or stony cliffes, lying 10. miles from Macau forward, to seaward from an Iland, betwéen the which Iland and cliffe you may well passe, running along by the Iland, for it is a faire and great Channel: or if you will, you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them, you shall holde the course as I heere set downe. Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan, or of Canton, and fourteene miles North-northwestward: from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land, which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye: also from thence the land runneth East, for the space of fyue miles, where it maketh an end, reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North, from whence againe it putteth outward to the East, to Macau: in this land that stretcheth North, there is a small Creeke, from whence you runne East∣ward to Comaye: it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins, which are the barks and Lighters of China, that carie the Mar∣chandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading: this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton: three miles beyond the afore∣said small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton, which is called Camon: it is a verie good entrie, for that through it the great Bancoins or Chi∣nish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton. Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal, to the seaward, and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand, which you must shunne, and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal: there is the o∣ther mouth or entrie, where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins, which by the Portingales is called As Orel∣has de Lebre, that is, the Hares eares, because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares: a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe,

which may easily be seene: from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles: you runne along by the land, thorough a small & shallow Channel, which is but a fa∣dome and a half deepe, at high water: the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd ly∣eth North and South, with the middle of the Channel, from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria. This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth East∣ward, like Taaquinton, and they lie north and South from each other. This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make, is faire and good muddie ground, therein to anker, and you anker close by the Iland of Faria, in the midde way, where it is good fresh water: from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd, to the poynt of Taa∣quinton, there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground: the deepest part there∣of is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid, and be∣ing past that, you haue more depthes: if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau, you haue two wayes, whereof the safest is outward: through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria, running to seaward along by the I∣landes, like those that come outward from the sea: the other way is East, through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria, and béeing at the end thereof, about foure miles Northeastward, you shall see the hauen of Lampacon, which is two great and high Ilandes, with manie trees lying East and West. The mouth or entrie of this ha∣uen, which is betweene the Ilandes afore∣sayd, hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe, of verie soft muddie ground, therefore it is hard ankering there, and besides there run∣neth a great streame: at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe, right in the middle of the mouth: such as de∣sire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen, must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands: there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water, muddy ground: on the South part of these 2. Ilands, there is an other great & high Iland, which reacheth northeast & southwest: betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through: on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon, lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south: the south point of this Iland lieth East and west, with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon, and the chānell that runneth be∣twéene these 2. Ilands, which reach North∣ward: it is déepe and faire, hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth: right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon, lieth a round stony cliffe, and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high I∣land, reaching on the north side east and west, and on the west side, northwest & southeast: the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe: from this stonie cliffe South∣eastward ther is an issue or going forth reach¦ing inward to sea, al sandy ground, with 3 fa∣dome déepe, through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon, and desire to be outward, what way soeuer they go, for on the west side it is shalow, as I said before. Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Ma∣cau, and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau: al these Ilandes ly on your south side, and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles: this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands & the firm land, as also from Lam∣pacon to Macau is altogether an open sea, & hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes, yet it is all ouer bankie ground, for the déepest part ther∣of is but 2. fadome, which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land, and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton (called the hares eares) runneth along by the Ilands of the ha∣uen of Macau: but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria, comming right ouer against the end thereof, there you haue an other high round Iland, and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward, and beyond this Iland there is a row of other I∣lands, which reach to the mouth or Channel, (where you passe through, when you come out of the sea to Macau, and lie Eastnorth∣east: all this Channell or passage that run∣neth betwéen them out of the sea, is faire and good way, and there is nothing to be feared, but that you sée before your eyes: you must run along by these Ilandes, leauing them on the south side, on the north side hauing the I∣lands of Lampacon, and when you are right against them northeastward, you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land, of very white sand, to the which point you shal goe, for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke, the déepest part thereof being a∣long by this point, by the which you shal run along, within the length of a shot of a great peece: and when you are past this point, run Northeast, and then on the Northwest side: there wil be a great high Iland, which lyeth east & west, with the south Iland of Lampa∣con: and betwéen it & Lampacon there is no other hinderance, but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid: you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland, leauing it on the North∣west side, passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward, and being through it, thē you are in the channel, which comming from the

sea, runneth to the mouth or entrie (called the Hares eares) northward, and from the chan∣nell westward lieth the way to Macau. I set not down this course, for that I haue shewed it in an other place, in the Nauigation from Malacca to China: if you passe betwéen these Ilands, you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand, to find the depthes. From Ma∣cau •• miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland, with a very high sharp point, which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of Cantō, through the which y^e great Iunco•• (that is the Spanish shippes for mar∣chandise doe passe) where our ships (I meane the Portingals) may likewise passe through, and on the West point of this Iland, halfe a mile southward, lieth certaine stone Cliffes, betwéen the which and the Iland, it is al déep & faire ground, as also along by the Iland on the south side, beyond these stony cliffes to sea¦ward, there lieth certaine smal Ilands, and be∣yond these Ilands, somewhat further to sea∣ward, there lieth other great Ilands: but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands, but betwéen the smal & the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare. From Macau 4. miles south∣eastward, lieth a great and high Iland, being deuided in ••. parts, by a small running water out of the sea, & a farre off sheweth like a ship, hauing neither trees nor bushes, and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land, there is an other long Iland, with trees in the middle of the channel: between these 2. Ilands, in the entrie thereof, on the side of Macau, lyeth a rock or cliffe, which the water washeth ouer, which you must shunne, for all the rest is fair and good way. From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts, 6. miles Eastsouth east, lyeth an other long high Iland (with a very black shining wood of trees) called Tō∣quion, and frō thence half a mile to seaward, lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes: you must run betwéene them and the land, where it is faire ground, or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands: from this Ilande aforesaid, to the land, about a myle or thereabouts distant from it, lyeth an other low & long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell: betwéene these 2. Ilands, there lieth an Iland or cliffe, and an other by the I∣land that lieth by the land: betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell & the Iland that lieth to seaward, it is déepe & faire, and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward, on the land side, there is a small créeke or bay, where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds: and there is likewise good fresh water roūd about this Iland Tonqui∣on, it is all faire ground: but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top, lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton, from the west point of the same Iland ••. or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long I∣land, which reacheth northwest & Southeast, & is altogether without trées or bushes: from the Southeast point of the same Iland, half a mile to seaward, lyeth an other round & high Iland, and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good: on the northeast side of this great Iland, from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long clouē Ilands or rockes, close by, of a reddish earth, without any trees: betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland & the land, runneth a smal channel, through the which the small Ban∣coins (which are the Chinish barkes or ligh∣ters) doe passe. From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke: through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon. From this round Iland, from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast, the land hath a point, with a high and euē land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes, hauing on the Westsouth∣west side a still stéepe land, and on the East∣northeast side, it is all Valleyes. From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea, and right against this point, about the length of a harquebuse shot, there lyeth a great long Iland, reaching as the coast doth. The chan∣nell betwéene this point and the Iland afore∣said, is scarse 3. fadome déep: within the poynt towardes the land, on the Westsouthwest syde, there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China, at 7. & 8. fadome déepe, muddie ground. I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon, & came through the aforesaid smal channel: here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton, or the Ilands of Canton do end: this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands, to this poynt or hooke of land, maketh a golfe, by meanes of the great Creeke: al this crosse way is faire and good, and when it is any hard wether, then there goeth a verie hollow water, speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes. From this poynt of the land aforesaid, and the poynt of the Iland, 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof, on the eastnorth∣east side, which are good defence against stormes & foule wether: there you haue victu∣ails & other necessaries, and being ••. miles to seaward, there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe▪ y^t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle) lying vnder 22. degr. & ½, this coast along by the sea is sandie strand, inward béeing a high land, it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land, lying fifteene myles from the poynt

Lamon, you may anker al ouer, and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles, you must vnderstand that from the countrie, ly∣ing at the end of the Ilands of Canton, to the Iland Lamon, 18. miles to seawarde, there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes, of red sād, which at low water are vncouered, in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete, all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage, from the aforesaid point of land, lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon, to the Ense∣ada dos Camoriins, that is the creeke of Garnaet, by the Chinaes called Cai••to, lying full vnder 25, degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest, and northeast and by north, and southwest and by south, without all the points and hookes, it is in course 86. miles, and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon, are 15. miles, and 10 miles from the aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal, that is the ri∣uer of Salt, from whence the salt is carri∣ed to Canton, it is a great hauen and entrie, being past this riuer of Salt, foure miles for∣ward, there is an other riuer lying by an o∣ther point or hooke, which riuer by the Chi∣naes, is called Chaochen, and by the Por∣tingales Por••o de Pecas, that is the hauen of Peces, for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes, and other costlie wares. This riuer is verie great, and hath manye places and villages to land ware, that are in∣habited lying along by the water, it lyeth with the southwest point, of this Iland La∣mon, east southwest, and west northwest, the land of Lamon, lyeth vnder 23 degrees, and ¼ it is great and verie high, couered with bushes & trees, it reacheth as the coast doth, about a mile from the firme land, as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side, it sheweth like 2 Ilāds although it is but one, it hath on the south∣west, or the land side, some stony cliffes, close by it, which at low water are vncouered, and at high water the sea breaketh vpon thē, but all the rest of the channell, betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough, yet you may not passe through, for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that dri∣ueth, although I haue past through it by cō∣pulsion, but with great paine, therefore I counsell no man to passe through it, vnlesse it be with a Soma, that is a Chinish Caruell, wherewith they sayle along the coast, for the traffick, on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland, to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes, and other rockes, be∣tweene the which and the Iland you may not passe, and on the northeast point: on the land side a verie great creeke, where there is a verie good harbor and low road, for all windes, where likewise our shippes may en∣ter, if occasion serueth, it is three fadom and ½ deep, ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side, for I haue beene in it. From this southwest point of the I∣land aforesaid, a mile and a halfe inward to sea, there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water, being of some black stones, that reach all on a rowe Eastward, about three myles, and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row, whereof that outward is the greatest: you may by no meanes passe ouer, nor betwéene this riffe, and cliffes, but be∣tweene the riffe and the Iland: there is a ve∣rie good channel, for I haue past through it, it is 20 fadome deepe, smal thinne flat sandy ground, and you haue nothing there to care for, then onlie to keepe by the Iland: and the aforesaid Riffe: it is good for those that come from Iapon, to passe through it, for if you passe outward by the sea, to auoyde the Riffe, it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe, and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast, whereby (if it chance) you must indure great payne, be∣fore you can get it. From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast, lyeth the Ha∣uen of Chabaquon, which is an arme of the sea, that runneth northeast, very déepé to lād∣ward: at the entrie thereof, on the southeast side, there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land, which from thence ryseth very high, and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes. From the aforesaid point of land, in the same course, about the length of the shot of a great peece, lyeth a Ryffe of sand, wherevpon the water breaketh: if you desire to enter into this hauen, you must put to the Southeast syde, running along by the poynt of the entrie, where it is two fa∣dome and ½ deepe, half a mile aboue the a∣foresayd poynt of land, on the Southeast part of the land, there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground, which is a good harber in foule wether, and for more security, you may run so close to the land, that you may runne into the mud, & so leap on shore, on the north∣west side, which is by an Iland, where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails & other thinges. This course is done with Iuncos & Somas, which are Chinish ships & boates, & this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg. & ½: behind this créek on the sea side, lieth another créek, by y^t which forward about the lēgth of the shot of a great péece, li∣eth 4 or 5 Ilāds, betwéen the which & the lād you may passe: this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca, that is

for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China,) within it is very good and faire ground: the land lying be∣twéene these two aforesaid créekes, is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées, & the aforesaid islands are round and high, stretching along all in a rowe. Frō this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chin∣chon, the coast runneth Northeast, and Northeast and by East, and is in distance 22. miles: it is all high land, and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe, and there runneth many hard and great streames. From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta, that is, the Blacke créeke, by the country peo∣ple called Lauho, aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes, and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands, within it is very good and faire ground, béeing a harbour or de∣fence against certaine windes, wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship, & another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter. Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither, betwéene the which & the Firme land it is all faire & good ground. From this Enseada Pretta or Bla••ke creeke, seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands (some what longer than round) without either bushes or trees, close by each other, reaching Northwest & southeast, betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes: These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile, & right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke, from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea, and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the South∣west side, lyeth a Sand baye, which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fa∣dome déepe, where (the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you, make a defence) you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay, for I haue laine in it, because I put into it with a storme as I came from Ia∣pon: the Iaponers haue many times win∣tered therein with their shippes. The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side, close along by the point of the I∣land that lyeth towardes the land: and when you enter in you shall holde tow∣ards the Island not to misse the Hauen, and you may alwayes goe out and in as well on the Northeast as on the South∣west side: in this Island you haue fresh water. These Islands are called Chiocon▪ it is all ouer very faire cléere ground, on∣ly one stonie Cliffe, whereupon you sée the water breake, lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe. From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles for∣ward, lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon, and two myles from the land lyeth two I∣landes of white stonie Cliffes, betweene the which and the land, as also outward to Seaward, it is all faire ground: from these Islandes two myles forward, and halfe a mile from the land, there lyeth a high round island, from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea, whereon you sée the water breake, which you must shun. Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes, and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon, lyeth a small Créeke, where the shippes (in the monson of China) do anker. All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land, with deepe and faire ground, onely the aforesaid riffe of the island. The Ha∣uen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land, with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar (as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath.) This high land or hill descendeth downe∣wardes to a hooke or point of land, and comming to the Northeast side from the sea, it hath a great opening, with cer∣taine islands in the mouth thereof, from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe, and from thence it runneth West Northwest, ha∣uing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande: in the same course on this land (that reacheth from the point of the sea, where the land lyeth West Northwest) there is a long high island without trées or bushes stret∣ching like the same land, and is a small halfe mile distant from the land, and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay: in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward, lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water, going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in. In this island is good fresh water: herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe: you runne not on the South side of this island, but about by the East side, com∣ming into the Hauen on the North side. From this island a quarter of a mile fur∣ther

on, there lyeth thrée islands stretch∣ing East and West one with the other: from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe, you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands. The Island that lyeth Eastward is the lon∣gest and greatest of all the thrée, these Islands are distant from the Northland, about a great mile, which land is very high ground. The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward, lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South, which on the West side hath a sandy bay, and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land, there is a good Road to anker in, with very good ground, where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and mar∣chandises, such as are there to bée had. The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward, and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands, lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water, all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road, and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame: the best place to anker and to lie safest, is close by the South point, to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand (by the Créeke that lyeth Northward) for it is shallowe. Those that come from Liampo and Iapon, put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée I∣slands, which is faire, at fiue or sixe fa∣dome water, which you likewise find along by the Islands, as well on the land side as the Sea side, onely at the sandy place aforesaid. This Island by the C••mais is called Tantaa. Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa, from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile, which is altogither shal∣lowe ground, so that you can by no meanes passe, nor a great way from thence to Sea ward. From this Island Tantaa, a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea, which may bée halfe a myle broad: on the South part it hath a point of land, against the which on the other land Northward, lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour, therea∣bouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye, and a myle from the aforesayd point of land, inwards of the Riuer, there lyeth an Island (by the South side) with certaine redde downes. In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point, and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island, wherein the Shippes anker, and there you lye out of all the streames, vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land. It happeneth oftentimes, that the Shippes by negligence lye drie, because they runne close to the land, yet it hurteth them not, for it is soft muddy ground. From this point a∣foresayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them, where the Portingales haue of∣ten dressed their Shippes. Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions, and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa, doe not stay there if it bée foule weather, but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather com∣ming, they presently hoise vp anker, and come to anker by this Island, in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay, close by the South land all this way is fayre. This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼. from the Island Tantaa, and the Island of this ha∣uen of Chinchon, fiue miles East North∣east lyeth a point of land, in the which there is a good Créeke (against foule wea∣ther and the Monson of China,) called Lialoo. The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land, for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tan∣taa, is altogether (there along) of a bankey and shallow ground, and so con∣tinueth to the Island, for that betwéene the said Island and the land, it is altoge∣ther drie and shallow as aforesaid. From this Créeke of Lialoo forward, the land beginneth to bée lower, without any high hils (as the aforesaid land) and hath but few bushes, in many places none at all. It is a very faire coast, so that you néed feare nothing there, but that you sée before your eies. From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles▪ and you runne Northeast and Northeast and by East. From the point of Lialoo two miles forward, lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the

land, and another halfe mile further for∣ward, lyeth two Islands by each other, somewhat closer to the land, and hard by them is a Riuer, at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land, into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes, that goe to the Towne of Enon, which lyeth within the same, where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further. There lyeth the point of Chen∣cheu, which is a high and bare land, of white and reddish colour, reaching some∣what inward to sea, on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay, and aboue it a verie high steepe land, in this Créeke lyeth a great Island, betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in, from this Island a harquebush shot in length north∣eastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water, and Northwestward from the said Island, betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone, and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in. I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat nee∣rer to the Island then to the land, with two Iuncos, which are great Chinish Shippes, each of them being of fiue hun∣dred or sixe hundred Bhares, Indian waight, which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes, and ranne in along by the point. Beyond this point of land at y^e vp∣per part lyeth a great Towne, and North Northeast from this Island, there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour, but they haue no faire ground, nor anie harber: two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu, inward to land towards Chencheu, there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso, or the faire hill, this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles: in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes ly∣ing with coloured feathers and flagges, which serue for the countrey fishermen, where they cast their Nets, and the So∣m••s of that Countrey, which are the Chi∣nish Caruels, haue ••un ouer it with one saile onely, without any other furniture. From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further, on the Southwest end of the I∣sland (by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos) that is the Island of Horses, and by the Chinares called Tachoo, hauing the name of a great Towne so called, not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land, this Island lieth in the coast, cōpassed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in In∣dia: which arme of the Sea issueth out a∣gaine about fiue miles further in the same coast, which issue or mouth is called Puysu. The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad, and from the point of the Island inward, about halfe a mile, there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China, at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground: you must shunne the Southwest land, which is low and sandy strands, and is all ouer blac∣kish and shallow ground, for I haue run inward round about this Island, it hath many shallowes, and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fa∣dome, if you desire to put in there, it were good to haue one of the Country∣men for a Pilote, I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast, which is the narrowest and shallowest place, and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the wa∣ter, close by the side of the Island, about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point. From this stony cliffe to the point, many Shippes may anker, and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes, and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other, hath some redde downes and bare land, but is all along faire ground. A mile from this mouth Northeastward, to Seaward lyeth a small Island, and from the moneth of Aprill to Septem∣ber, there are many beastes pastured in this Island, as horses and such like, wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses, as aforesaid, from the mouth of Puysu, of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast, there is a great thicke point of land, with manie bushes vpon it: Close by this point lyeth a great round Island, whereof the chanell betwéene them is small, yet very cleare, where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest, it is a high land with bushes, and from thence to the Sea, it hath a great gréene field or plaine, and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering a∣gainst the winds of the monson of China, another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land, there is a great Towne called Pinhay. From this point of Pinhay, fiue miles along the coast, ly∣eth the Hauen of Foquyen, which hath a

great Rode, and is all thicke land with bushes, and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes, and beyond this I∣land inward, lieth the mouth of the riuer, on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and tow∣ers, and hath a Bridge running out from the land, whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed: the entrie is faire and cleare. From this Hauen of Fo∣queyen fiue miles, lyeth a Créeke, by the Portingales called Enseada dos camo∣royns, that is, the Créeke of Gannaet: and by the Chinars called Cayto: in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes, without any trées or bushes, about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea, and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes, and in some places it sémeth to haue Chan∣nels or throughfares, for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey: you must shunne this Island: and from the end of this Island two miles forward, there is a point of great thicke land, wholly with∣out any bushes or trées, and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands: and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China, ha∣uing faire sandie ground, but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about with∣out the Ilandes: for the which cause wée ranne betweene them, but it is not good for our shippes. On the other side North∣eastward from this point aforesaid, close by the lande, lyeth a small high Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast: the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land, being the shot of a great péece in breadth, at thrée fadome deepe, most part stonie ground, in such manner, that as soone as you let fall anker, the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones. This chan∣nell can not bée séene farre off, and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay, and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did, you shall put in there close by the Island, and so néere it, that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe, to anker in the depthes of the hard ground, for if you anker in the Sea, your Cables will presently be cut in péeces, as mine were. This point ly∣eth hidden vnder a point: from thence Northeast, and Northeast and by East the land hath another point, lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide, making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte. From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe, whereon you see the water breake, reaching Northwest and South∣east, and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke, it is about a mile: all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere. This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis, the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point afore∣said, for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China, for such shippes as come from Liampon & Iapon, to put in there: you must goe néere the land before you come at the point, and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point, and are ankered within it, there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point, so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you: therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande, not to fall vpon the Riffe, from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor, lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼. you runne along the coast Northeast, and North∣east and by North, without the aforesaid Island, and the point of the saide Créeke, and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles, the land hath a point, and from thence it runneth inwards North North∣west, and somewhat further Northeast, and Northeast and by North out againe. Two myles from thence lyeth thrée I∣lands by each other, two great and high, and one small, béeing all faire ground round about, but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather.

These Islands are called Canton Sion, all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide, is al∣togither lowe land with houels and val∣leyes with euen bushes: and along by it, it is both faire and calme Sea, and plea∣sant ground.

In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis, to the I∣lands of Canton Sion, about thrée myles to Sea-warde, there lyeth two Islandes by each other, and the Island lying nea∣rest the land, hath a great high hill in the middle, which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island: they haue nei∣ther Trées nor Bushes within them, be∣ing

faire and cleare round about them.

From the Islandes of Canton Sion for∣ward the Lande and Coast reacheth in∣wards, & ten miles from thence, that is to say, two miles from the land, lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other, without Trees or bushes, reaching as the coast doth: whereof the first lying on the Southwest side, is very long, and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle, and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone, but déepe and faire, for I haue passed through it: and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island, which commeth out by the other, there is a sandie Bay, close by the which there is a verie good Rode, for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes: and because it is like a Hauen, it is by the Chinars cal∣led Pudeon, that is, a Sacke.

From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest, lyeth a well of verie great depth, therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke, where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe. In this Créeke or san∣die Bay there is very good fresh water, as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island, there is a great place of fresh water. The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land, is all faire and deepe, as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid, there is another Hauen called Fuychon, which is a riuer, but with a small entry, béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece, with cleare and déep ground: from the mouth inwardes there is good water, running a great way into the land, and all faire. If you desire to goe in there and to anker, you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes. This Baye hath many townes and vil∣lages lying along by the riuer. From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward, lieth two small Islandes, halfe a myle distant each from other, they are both without trées or any bushes: the Island on the Land side is flat, and that to Sea-ward is very high, and hath a Créeke, but verie small, and onely with a Northwest wind it is har∣bourlesse: the entrie is verie straight, be∣ing round within, with good and pleasant ground.

This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe, for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward, it may be the length of a bow shot, in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small.

From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast, there lyeth two I∣lands, whereof the first is long, reaching like the coast: the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea, for betwéen it and the land you can not passe. The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long I∣land that lyeth to Sea-ward: betwéene them both is a small Channell, but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland, as well inward as outward.

From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground, at foure fadome, and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China, but wholly open for a Southwest wind, with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos, which are Chinish shippes: This Ha∣uen is called Guotimony. Before you come within two myles of this Hauen, vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither, which runne about a myle into the land, and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth, but are not fit for our ships. The ground therabout is faire, and inward it hath a village.

From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward, lieth a verie great and high Island, on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it: it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land, and a good way from the other I∣lands on the Northwest side, it hath two Créekes hard by each other, whereof that in the Northeast is the safest, with good and faire ground, reaching about halfe a mile inwards, within it hauing good fresh water, with a Sandie Bay, where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth: it is all faire round about, onely you must not run betwéene the small Islands & the Island: This Island is called Lanquyn.

From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North, and North and by East, there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small, with some Trées, but thinne and lowe, reaching along the coast a∣bout ten myles forward: the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row. The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe, some lesse, muddie

ground, if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place, with the windes of the monson of China, you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels, where you may lie safe, but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather, in the course of the generall windes, you shall not passe (from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward) to the land, for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places, for the déepest place is but two fadome.

On the Northeast side inward from these Islands, there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande, which reach Northeast and Southwest, whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward. The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground: The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Co∣rall and Kesell stone, hauing many I∣lands and stonie cliffes. Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde.

A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands, there is a good and faire sea, and ground: it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands, for you can not passe.

On the Lande right against these I∣lands, there is a Hauen called Hunchon, and the Islandes are called Lyon: From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles, and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest. These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor, but in the middle way they are lesse, and more distant from each other: and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles, there is an Island of Reddish earth, with two hilles like two men, and in the middle there is a valley, which reacheth Northwest and Southeast. On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China. This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon.

The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea, it is a thicke land with a high rising backe: it hath on the end of the Southwest point, close by, a long and high Island, and from the Northeast point of this Island, lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island, and the aforesaid point a verie narrow chan∣nell, where the countrey shippes do passe through, inwardes from the Southwest side, and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke, which in compasse is a∣bout foure great miles: two miles from the point Southwestward, there lieth two or thrée small Islands. As you come outward to these Islands, there is déepe and faire ground, but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shal∣lowe, so that at lowe water it is drie, and you may sée the muddie ground, vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point, on the south∣west side, there is a great towne, where they haue many great Barkes, that are made with Orloopes and nayled, wherof some are 200. Bhares great.

On the Northeast side of this point, there is a Créeke running inward to the Land: at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼.

From this point foure miles to Sea∣ward East Northeast, there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes, whereof the first reacheth East & West: and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth, which reacheth North and South: the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad, déepe and faire. This Island which rea∣cheth East and West, on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North, in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground, where you may harbour in all weathers, except it be with a Northwest wind. The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe, whereof the one is great, the other small and some what long, betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes, and round about these Islands it is faire ground.

In this Island you haue verie good fresh water, and they are called Timba∣sam.

From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward, there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast & West Northwest, wherof the one is greater and longer than the other, they lie close togither, & the channell be∣twéene them is faire & déepe, with harbor against North Northeast, & Southwest windes, for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme: From this point of

Sumbor to Liampo, you passe without the Islands North Northeast, and South Southwest, and the coast all high ground, and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast, with∣in the land there is a high stony Rocke, which sheweth like a Monkies coule, in the Island Seylon, called O Capello de Frade, beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke, other sixe myles forward, lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy, which is a Riuer of fresh water, and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it, where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes con∣tinually kept for the security and safegard of the coast. The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are, that when you are hard by Chaposy, the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water, and some péeces of réedes, like Cassia Fistola, or Spanish Réedes, which come out of this Riuer. Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward, there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other, wholly without trées or bushes, round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground, and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island, rea∣ching like the coast, betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fa∣dome déepe, whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest, and along by the land it is shallow. From Chaposy eigh∣téene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo, where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke. These Islands were called Si∣nogicam, & the Firme land Liampo, which along by the sea side is a high land. The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it, but betwéene the Islands. At the first you haue but few and small Islands, but being past them, then vpon the rowe of Islands, lying furthest out into the sea, you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast, and it is there all ouer faire and good ground, and on the West side it hath a Créeke, in the middle whereof, there is a great and high Island, betwéene the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes. This entry is of fiue fadome déepe, but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it, therfore you must bind it fast, or cast out ankers both before and behind. From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées, and from the South Southwest side of the same I∣sland there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds, on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water, and the other Island afore∣said for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome. The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe, but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire. From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles, hauing some small Islands in the way. On the firme land West Northwestward, there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon, from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast, fiue miles beyond the Island, which is a riuer called Tinay, at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe, without any sands or shal∣lowes. These two Islands aforesaid, of Synogicam, (where the Portingals vsed to traffike) lie vnder 29 degrees and 2/••, and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vn∣der one and thirtie degrées Northward, and are not as the Islands of Canton, hauing their Channell faire and cleare, without feare of any thing, but that you sée before your eies. But betwéene these Islands, in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water. From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong, about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe, and a third part at a flood, where∣fore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the ma∣ny channels and droughts, which runne verie strong, and with so great force, that oftentimes they driue a man vp∣on the point and Hookes of the Island, when hée would passe by it. Where∣fore hée that will sayle by these Islands, must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey: To Seaward from these I∣slands, it is all faire and good ground.

Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde, that is (from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes) to Sea-ward, you must al∣waies runne close by it, and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward, then it maketh a point sticking out, and before you come to this Point, there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle, be∣ing inward of a clouen stonie Rocke,

at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe, it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece. The smal Island shall lye on the North side, and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can, for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it, so that if you were close by it, it would draw you in, as it happened vnto mee: whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out. From this Island halfe a myle Northward, there beginneth another great and high Island, which from thence reacheth Eastward, making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea, which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere: but from thence to the point of the other North I∣sland, and from both these Islands West∣ward, which is a great space of the Sea, it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water, that reach vnto the Chan∣nell, that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes) along by the Islands that lye on the land side: Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid, lying on the same Island. From the Island (where you may Winter for the North winds) there runneth a channell, North Northeastward betwéene the Islands, so that it deuideth the Islands, leauing some on the land side, and some to Sea-ward, which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self. From this Island aforesaid (where you may Winter for the North windes) fiue myles further forward in the same course, there beginneth ano∣ther great and high Island of fiue myles long, lying in the same course of North Northeast, and South Southwest. This Island is very populous of euill natured people: from the South point of this great Island, the length of a Cannon shot East∣ward, there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water, wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away, laden with Pepper and other Spices, which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries

The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke, therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide, you must runne on the West side close by the Island.

From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast, there is yet ano∣ther great and high Island, (and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row) wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built: wherefore by the Portingales it is called, A Ilha de Varella, that is the Island of the marke or token: and before you come at it, you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side, and the great Island of fiue miles long, reacheth behind these Islands (to land ward) and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island, reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella. Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell: the whole Channell, from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella, is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea, and that of Varella, as also the month of the cha∣nell, (which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea) is all deep: In the en∣tery of the Channell of this Island (at the foote of Varella) it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye, which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward, there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other, reaching East and West, which Islands also are named after the name of Varella, where∣by the Channell is knowne. This I∣sland of Varella or Chinish Temple ly∣eth full vnder thirtie degrées, and is di∣stant from the Islands S••ong••••••m afore∣said eight miles. From the Islands S••on∣gicam eleuen or twelue myles, it is alto∣gether great and high Islands, lying close by each other: but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées, they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separa∣ted. At the end of these Islands there ly∣eth two Islands together, whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour, it is called Lepion, they lye close by a great Riuer, which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people. In this Hauen of Lepion the Ia∣pons doe often Trafficke: from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground, for that a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe, being hard stones. The people of y^e country passe ouer it with nai∣led barkes, with pitched or loopes, two pée∣ces, sailes of réeds or mats, & an yron dreg

with sharpe téeth. This coast reacheth Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées, where there lieth a great riuer that com∣meth from Nanquyn, within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people, both horse and footemen. This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries, from thence for∣ward the land reacheth North North∣east, and by East, and comming to that part which lieth Southeast, there the land hath an end or point, and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke. From this point forward, the coast runneth North again, after turning again North∣westward: Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray, and there you haue Hauens and harbors, hauing a kind of small open péeces of wo∣uen worke, which the Iapons fetch from thence, whereof I am certainely infor∣med, as also touching the nauigation vn∣to that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it, as followeth. From this point of the Creeke of Nan∣quyn twenty miles Southeastward, there lyeth certaine Islands, at the end where∣of on the East side, there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited, as well by horse as footemen. These Islands by the Portingales are called, As Ilhas de core, but the great Island Core is cal∣led Chausien, on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke, wherein there lyeth an Island, which is the Hauen, but it is not very déepe. There the lord of the coun∣try hath his pallace and is continually re∣sident. Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto, one of the Islands of Iapon, which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North, to Seaward sixtie miles, or somewhat more. This instru∣ction I had from a Nobleman of Por∣tingale, called Pero da cunha, that hath séene and trauelled through all the Coun∣trey, hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose, as being of great expe∣rience, hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stor∣my weather against their wils, min∣ding to sayle to Iapon, and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto, the Islands lying from this Island to∣wards the land betwéene them, and close about them all ouer, are many riffes and stones. The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne, that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn, hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke, and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose, it came from ouer the land, and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts, reaching southward to two and thirty degrées, and to the mid∣dle way of the Goulfe of Iapon. Here en∣deth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed, along by the Coasts, lands, and Islands of the Kingdome of China, being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered.

The 31. Chapter. The description of a voiage made by a Por∣tingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma, that is a Chinchon ship, with the description of the coast of Bun∣go, Miaco, Cacay, & the Island Toca, all countries of Iapon.

ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune be∣ing the third day of the new moone, in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast cha∣nell of the Island Siongicam, with a southeast wind, and be∣ing without the Island, we had the wind South Southeast, and ran east, and some∣what East and by North, about euening we had a South Southwest wind, run∣ning East, East and by South, and East southeast, with very great billowes out of the south, whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course, sayling with our sayles but halfe vp, and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south, and east south∣east, because the wind came some what ful to the South west, with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high, by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward, we made our account to haue sailed, in the course of East and East, and by North 26 miles in one meale tide, which was til thursday at noone, being the first of Iuly. We had al∣waies great and mighty waues, because it was a Spring tyde, all the night

hauing great lightnings out of the East, and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South. On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night, we had a south∣west wind, running East and East and by South, and somwhat East Southeast, with great showres of raine without any high wind: and being two houres within night, the skie closed round about and be∣came close with a great raine, wherwith the wind beganne to be calme, turning Northward, which the officers of the So∣ma perceiuing (being men of China) they began to be in great feare, for the Chinais doe hold for certaine, that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old, all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes, and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day, till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather, for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes. And touching our North wind y^e began still to encrease, they perceiuing it, put presently West∣ward againe towardes the Islands, and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles, in such manner, that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China, and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North: after that hauing a close skie with little wind, whereby we made very litle way. On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher, wee running so till noone, and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles. From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening, and by night til Saterday in the morning, & then the wind came North∣east, & then East, and so West till noone, whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles, letting the shippe goe West, and West and by North: and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height. On Sa∣terday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South, the weather begin∣ning to cleare vp, and so wée ranne one glasse, and perceiuing the weather to settle, we turned againe towards Iapon, being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China, and so we held our course that euening, and all the next night East, and East and by South, with a small wind and calme Sea. The next day being Sonday at noone, we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1/••. part lesse, & wée set out vnder 29. degrées and ••. accounting for one mealetide thir∣téene miles: so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China. On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort, East and East and by South, for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone, with a still winde and water, and had no Sunne to take the height, but I made my account of eigh∣téen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East, and East and by North, the wind being scant South. From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind, which continued so, that euening, and all night: and about Tuesday morning, the wind was somwhat fuller till noone, whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾. running East, and East and by South, for the space of 22. miles. From Tuesday at noone be∣ing vnder the height aforesaid, I willed them to saile east (hauing the same wind, but somewhat calmer) all that night to Wednesday at noone, and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones, hauing sayled fiftéene myles, making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma, hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights. From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest, and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that coun∣trey ranne towardes the Island of Le∣queo, and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme dri∣uing vpon the water (which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons) I willed them presently to holde East Northeast: and about euening wée sawe many signes of land, as péeces of réedes, risen, and such like things. At night I badde them runne East and East and by North, but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pi∣lot should watch his course, hée had gone a great way out of the course: hauing runne Eastward till the morning, when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North (the winde béeing as it was) till Thursday at ten of the clocke, and then (although it was darke and close weather) wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie, and couered with dampie mistes, lying Southeast from vs, and were about thrée myles from it. Along by the same lande there lay two

Islandes, wée holding our course in the same sort, vntill by the first land East∣ward, wee sawe another great high and long lande, and at the end of the afore∣said high land Eastward, wée sawe two other Islandes, whereof the one was ve∣rie great, stretching Northeast and Southwest, and the other close by it stretching North and South, being the smallest, with many pointes. On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence, there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe: from the first Island that we sawe (which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas, that is, the seuen sisters, lying on the Northeast side) to the afore∣said small Island with many pointes, it may be about sixe myles Eastward, as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes, it might bée a∣bout fiue houres after noone, hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles. The Thursday aforesaid in the morning, wée tooke the height of the North Starre, being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙.

Comming within two myles of the I∣sland (that wée saw first) of the Islands of stonie Cliffes, wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East, and when wee were right against it, whereby it laie Southward from vs, béeing about thrée myles from it, on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long I∣land with many trees, which (as wée learned) is called Icoo: it reacheth East and West, and wée were about three miles from it, but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not dis∣cerne it: and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland, beeing lesse than the other: and because wée were by the aforesaid West point, (betweene both) wee were fully determi∣ned to runne through the channell, that shewed betweene the said two Islandes, but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof, fearing Riffes and shallowes, wee durst not aduenture, but wound vp to the East point, to passe by the winde about the high Island, running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde, ha∣uing great waues that put vs to the lande, and so wee sayled East South∣east, hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island, but night came on beeing verie darke, so that wee could dis∣cerne no land, although wee were close by it, and to keepe from it, wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight, then the moone shined, yet wée could not see the Island, but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma, which (according to my account) should lie right before vs: wherewith wée pas∣sed ouer the rest of the night till the mor∣ning, when we sawe the Island Tanaxu∣ma, that laye right before vs, beeing a∣bout two myles from it, it beeing verie cloudie, and wée made Northward to∣wardes it to passe by the West side there∣of, but wée could not doe it, by reason that the winde was Southwest, and wee were by the South point thereof, run∣ning along by the East side, about halfe a mile from it. This Island reacheth North and South, beeing long and lowe ground, hauing white sandie strandes, with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes, it hath many Pine trees, but they stand scattering from each other, and verie open: it is about seuen or eight myles long, hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land, an Island or stonie Cliffe, which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile. This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½. right in the middle, it is all saire and cleare ground. From this Island of Tanaxu∣ma Northwarde, wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West, about eight miles, making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast, and North∣east and by North from Tanaxuma, an opening, which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij. This Créeke hath for a marke, that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke, beeing a flatte ground: and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma. This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about se∣uen or eight myles. From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke, and béeing in the middle of our way, the wind fell West Southwest, whereby wee were enforced to lye by it, the weather béeing calme, so that the

water that with the flood ranne East∣ward, draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen, but the ebbe that after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in, and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone, wée entred into a verie great goulfe, wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side, and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées, lying about the shot of a base from the land. Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell, and on the South side of the said houell, there lyeth a great opening, which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées. There is the Hauen called Minatto, which is a riuer better than that of Batecola, lying in the coast of Ma∣labar. On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another ope∣ning, béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell, with some trées. This opening right in the middle hath an Island, wherein is the place of Xibuxij, which is a great village full of people, and is a riuer of fresh water, but it is shal∣lowe, for you can not put into it without a spring tide. From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West, all lowe land and sandie strandes, for the space of two miles from thence it runneth South∣ward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill, which is that which wée sawe com∣ming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill, there lyeth a small riuer very shallow: From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth there∣of, which may bée about halfe a myle broad. The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground. All this high land aforesaid is called Quimon∣siquy. From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast, lyeth the Créeke of Tanora, which is one of the best Ha∣uens of Iapon: you runne the coast East and East & by North, in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay, which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor, but when you are right against it, then you may verie well perceiue it, for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes, and runneth somewhat to landward. I heare set downe the description of this Créeke, that no man should deceiue himselfe ther∣by, that desireth to goe vnto Tanora, as wée should haue done. Béeing past this small Créeke, you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande, from the which point for∣ward the coast windeth inward, where you shall sée a sandie strand with two I∣landes full of trées lying along by it: At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands, that lye off from the land inward to the Sea, with other great stones and rockes. Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora, and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea, and béeing past them, then on the Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées, béeing stéepe land, reaching North and South: betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker, for right ouer a∣gainst it, it is 25 fadome déepe, but there is not the right Hauen: but when you are about the point and the end of the a∣foresaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea, then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land, which you may freely doe without danger, for it is faire and cléere, holding your course Westward, and a point of land will be vpon your right hand: and béeing past this point, you shall passe close by, shunning the land on the West side, and being there you are within the Ha∣uen, which is a long Créeke or Bay rea∣ching North till you be in: you may an∣cre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe, and then you are inclosed with a round bowe, it is there altogither muddy ground. Departing from Tanora to Fyun∣ga the coast runneth North to a point of land, lying about fiue myles from Tano∣ra: betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens, the one called Gico, not farre from Tanora, the other further forward (by some stonie Cliffes and Islands) called Vmbra. These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast, from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga, may be fiue miles more, from whence the coast & land doe turne in againe like a Créeke: comming somewhat further Northward out, this Créeke is a low land (along by the Sea coast) with sandy strands, and a mile beyond y^e aforesaid point of land, the coast hath an opening, and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side: here is a

good Hauen, which is called Vndo, and further forward there lyeth another Ha∣uen called Toconosuchy, this land is high∣er then the other hauen: on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées, and on the Northside a low land, the which farre off & outward sheweth like small Islands with trees. This hauen is not good to put in. A mile beyond this hauen there is ano∣ther Hauen called Myme, which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter, and hath two enteries, which you presently sée bée∣ing without, and may well discerne them, in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees, these Trees make two openings, and you may see ouer the Island on the land (which is higher) a great gréene trée, the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey.

From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island cal∣led Tomxyma, beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land, and then again it beginneth to be high, from thence two myles further, the land maketh a point or hooke of high land, and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ra∣mos lying on y^e coast of India by Goa. Sai∣ling about this point, hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco, which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen: this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fi∣unga. From y^e point of land aforesaid (fiue miles distant from Tanora) to this point of Camico, the lande is like a Créeke or breech, the water therein making a crosse streame, for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward, you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South, and North and by east, and South and by West, and are about eight miles distant: along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fa∣dome deepe, faire sandy ground.

From this point called Cabo de Cami∣co forward, the coast runneth north north∣west, and when you are right against this point, then you shall presently sée Northeastward, and Northeast and by East the land of Toca, which is an island, and is about fortie myles long, and reacheth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, it hath on the North side with the land of Iapon, a straight or narrow passage which runneth to the Hauen of Saquay, and the land of Miaco, and from the side of the Island along by it, there are ma∣ny small Islands. The course you must hold through this straight to the Hauen of Saquay or Sacay, is altogether along the coast and the land of Iapon, which hath many and good Hauens. At the end of this straight both these lands haue each of them a point of land sticking out, being from the one to the other about a mile: by the point of the land of Toca, it is banky ground, and all the people of this land (on the North side) are not in any sort to bée trusted. Likewise, you may passe from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco, where all a∣long it is good sayling, and there are ve∣ry good Hauens. The first hauen where∣of lyeth on the first point of land, on the West side of the Island, which close by it hath certaine Islands and Cliffes: this Hauen is called Focora, it hath a good harbour for all windes, but not for Ro∣uers, for there they haue many Foistes wherewith they roue and steale. At the East end of this Island Toca, lying with the land of Iapon, right ouer against it there is another straight or passage like that on the West side, where you runne to the Hauen and Town of Sacay. In the middle way from the aforesaied East side of Toca lyeth a Hauen called A••••, which is inha••••ted by a very fierce and stout peo∣ple. There is alwaies a great army of Foistes prepared for the warres, where∣with they robbe and spoyle all the Coast along. The Shippes and Foistes that desire to passe through it, asking leaue, they may passe without let or hinde∣rance. On the East side aforesaid, the land of Iapon reacheth much southward, making a hooke or end called Cumano, and the coast that reacheth thether is cal∣led Bandol: It hath some Hauens that were inhabited by very rich and migh∣tie people, but they are neither secure nor free. The Hauen of Sacay lyeth from the booke or end of the Island of Toca North∣east, about nine or tenne myles.

This Hauen of Sacay with a West wind is harborlesse, (which make many great tides) and hath a shallow sandie ground: For the which cause, the Ships that come laden thether, are presentlie vnladen, and the people leape on land, leauing the Shippe fast bound, and sometimes draw it on land.

From the point O Cabo de Camico,

fiue myles to a point of land, you runne along the coast North Northwest, and in the way you haue foure or fiue Islands and cliffes along the coast, and right ouer against the aforesaid point, there lyeth two other Islands close by the land, ha∣uing betwéene them both a smal channel, and close by both on the North and south∣side sides, there are many Islands and Cliffes both great and small. These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffes lye East and West with the Hooke and the end of Toca vnder thrée and thirty de∣grées and 1/••. All this coast is high land, with the Islands lying along by it, and hath sixtie and seuentie fadome déepe close by the land. From thence forward begin∣neth the straight or passage to be narrow betwéene this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo, and if in this countrey you haue néede to anker, then put to the land of Toca, where you shall finde muddye ground. When you are about the afore∣said point of two Islands, then the land beginneth Westward to turne in, all high land, hauing within close on the South∣side a small Island, you must take héed of this Créeke that the streames drawe you not in: being past this Créeke, you shall (in the middle way of the channell in the straight) sée right before you a smal round Island, which shall lye on the East side from you, and along by the coast fiue miles, you shall sée another Island lying hard by the land, which to sea ward from it, hath many stony cliffes and Rockes. By this Island Northeastward, about a myle and a halfe, there lyeth two other Islands.

Beyond these two Islands another myle and a halfe, lyeth another long I∣sland with a flat plaine or field on the top thereof, reaching Northwest and south∣east, the Southeast and thereof being the highest. Within this Island towards the West lyeth the Creeke of Vsquy, where the king of Bungo holdeth Court. If you desire to put in there, you shall runne towards the first Island, kéeping from the aforesaid Island, and the Islands and Cliffes lying by it, holding your course through betweene it and the other two Islands (that lye further forward) being passed in by this Island and the I∣slands and stony Cliffes, you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great, round, and a high Island full of Trées, wherevnto you shall runne, alwaies kée∣ping néerer the two Islands, then the Island of stony Cliffes, for by the Iland of Stony Cliffes, you haue seuentie fa∣dome déepe, and within the two Islands Westward, you finde but 25 fadome, muddy ground, holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lye in the Créeke, kéeping on the North side, for there it is faire and cléere, and being right against this Island, you shall find twenty fadome déepe, where you shall anker, that from them you may sée the hauens, which are two, the one ly∣ing (a smal mile from this Island towards the Southwest) by a point of land▪ where∣on there standeth sixe or seuen trées, sepe∣rated one from y^e other with some bushes, you must put to this point, which with∣in it hath a small Bay or Créeke, at the end whereof standeth a riffe of stone rea∣ching from thence into the Sea, in the which lyeth the aforesaid small Créeke, which hath a very good harbour, at thrée fadome déepe good and fair ground, where you shall anker, but it is not for great shippes. The other Hauen is Northwest¦ward, on the other side of the Créeke, ha∣uing in it some Islands and stones, it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land, making a bow with very good har∣bor: This hauen is for great ships.

From this Créeke of Vsquy some∣what further Northward, lyeth another great Creeke, which runneth inwards West Northwest. The Land and the point betwéene these two Créekes, may bee from the one Sea to the other, about the length of the shot of a great Péece in breadth, and halfe a myle from the end of the point Westward on the South side lyeth a small Island close by the Land, betwéene the which and the land runneth a channell of twelue fadome deepe, with faire ground of great sand, where I haue ankered. Right ouer against this Island on the Northwest Land, about the length of the shotte of a great Péece, ly∣eth a small Creeke, with a village called Sanganaxeque, where Don Francesco Mas∣charenhas lay with his shippe for the mon∣son: This hauen with a northwest wind is harbourlesse.

From this Créeke about halfe a myle forward, you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast. By all this coast and the

low land, it is all bankey grounds, wher∣fore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle. In the middle way of this lowe land, there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow, where∣by you may not enter into them by any meanes, and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide, and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie, being sandy ground. Close by the Roade or entry of this Ri∣uer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama: Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer, lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo, where the Kings in time past held their Courts, where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it, (who are very rich and aboundant in wealth) are resident.

From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen, with harbour against all windes, it is a small Bay, for the points or heights ther∣of doe runne through each other, where∣fore they make a good defence against the South windes. The entry of this ha∣uen is faire, you need but run in through the middle of the Channell, where you haue foure and a halfe, and fiue fadome deepe, and there you haue great furthe∣rance, for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson, and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson: to vnderstand it well, you must know that all this Countrey (as also all China, Malacca, India, and all the orien∣tall places,) doe sayle with the coniuncti∣on of the windes, which for certaine months together blowe out of one place, as now in the North then in the South, and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling: which con∣iunction is called (as in other places I haue said) the Monson, as Monson of the South winde, that is, when the wind bloweth out of the South and mon∣son of the North Windes in like sort, wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other. And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens, Creekes, Riuers, Bayes and Islands, where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe, which is to bée vnderstoode, (that if they bée against you in the way you should hold) you should know which ha∣uen is good to stay in for that time, or to winter in: for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is a∣gainst you, so that you cannot holde on your voyage, and of force you must stay for the wind and weather, that is, the Monson which serueth you, and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue, and then to follow on your voyage. Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe, that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes, that first set downe, noted, and obserued these courses and Nauigations, vsing here the same manner and descrip∣tion of the countrey, not chaunging the word of Monson, although that in some places before, I haue saied some thing thereof.

But to the matter, you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy, but it is not free from Rouers and theeues. From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse∣waies: In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land, but it is bad ground, and there it is not good to stay for the windes, for there you could not saue any thing. From this point you may see the East land, and at the end where this great Creeke endeth, it is low land, which is called M••ryee, and is all along faire and cleare. The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and ••.

From this point or end of M••ryee, two myles further, there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South, it is a low land with san∣die strands, at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes, from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast, and a myle beyond it, there is a Village called Tamboca, and ano∣ther myle further lyeth another place called Tambico, lying both on the Sea side, but they haue no Hauens with harbours, also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted. Beeing right against this point of Land, you shall along the coast see a long Island, which a farre off sheweth like two I¦slands, lying distant from the land about

two myles, it is called Fimexima, betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo, to this Island aforesaid. All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground, Riffes, Stones, and other filth. All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo, to this Island, you must runne on the East side, along by the land of Tocaa.

From this Island of Fimexima afore∣said, nine myles Northward there is a ve∣ry high Lande which reacheth East and West, that is the land of Amanguchen, a great mighty and rich country, for there∣in is one of the mines of siluer of the coun∣trey of Iapon.

In this coast are good Hauens, as also the Island of Meagima, which in times past (before the Portingales tra∣uelled to Iapon) had great Trafficke, for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon, for all kindes of wares and Mar∣chandises. Along by this land of Amagu∣chen, and the country of the Island Fime∣xima aforesaid, beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda, of the which as also the other places thereabouts, I will speake in another place, together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof.

To sayle from the point of Moryee, in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique, (lying in the country of A∣manguchen) which is very sure and good for all winds, and of great Trafficke: you shall holde your course Northeast, and Northeast and by East, being about sixtéene myles. This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high, and you runne all the aforesaid coast along (to a Hooke or point of Lande) East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, and from the Ha∣uen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles, whereof seuentéene and ½. make a de∣grée, as all the myles in this descripti∣on likewise doe, in the which coast ly∣eth the Hauens hereafter following, that is, from Caminaxique to Toraque, are about two myles and ••. from To∣raque, to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe. The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande: from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe, from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles.

From Anooxyma to Toumoo, are also fiue miles.

From thence to Xynaco are fiue myles.

From Xynaco to the Hauen of Vxy∣mando are fiue myles.

From Vxymando to the Hauen of Muroo are fiue myles. And this Hauen is about fiue myles more from the Ha∣uen aforesaid. Beyond the aforesaid point thrée or foure myles Eastward, lyeth the Hauen of Fyongo, and from thence sixe or seuen myles further is the Ha∣uen and Bay of Sacay. All this coast aforesaid is faire and cleare, hauing all ouer anker ground. These are (as I said before) all Portingale myles, and two Iapon myles make iust a Portin∣gall myle: which is found to bée true by the Portingall Pilotes, that haue therein taken the height of the Sunne, and made their account after the Iapon myles.

The 32. Chapter. The Nauigation from Lampaecon (which lyeth by Macon in the coast of Chi∣na) to the Island of Iapon, and from thence to the Island Firando, with the description thereof by another Pilote.

SAyling from Lampa∣con to the Island of Iapon, you must passe through the first issue or Channell of the South Island, which reacheth South-east∣ward, hauing a Cliffe or Island in the middle thereof, betwéene the which and the point of the Island you must passe, because of the scant winde, ma∣king as neare as possiblie you can to the end of the Island, alwayes with your Leade in hande. And comming to the middle way of the Channell of the Island lying vnto Sea-warde, you shall finde a sandie banke, that in the middle hath not thrée fadome deepe: You shall vse all the meanes you can to passe aboue a great and

high Island, which lyeth East Southeast from you. Being about this Island (with the other that lyeth to Sea-ward in the same rowe,) you shall passe along by the Island that lyeth to Seaward. Six miles further from this Island, you shall sée a row of Islands, small Islands, & Cliffes, and are nine, reaching further out to sea∣ward then all the rest that you passe by, and lye North Northeast, and South Southwest, you cannot passe on the out∣side of them, neither is it necessary, but you must runne betwéene them and a great high Island full of Trées, that ly∣eth to landward from you, which Island as you come néere it, sheweth as if it were round, because you goe right vpon the point: Notwithstanding it is long, rea∣ching as the coast doth. Hauing past som∣what beyond it, there is a channell that passeth betwéene it and another Island, lying close by it. Behind this last Island East Northeast, there is a Hauen where some Ships come to lade certain Chinish wares, and is not farre from the mouth or entry of Canton. This Island afore∣said, is by the Chinars called Tonquion. From thence you shal runne East North∣east to sée the country that lyeth betwéene Chinchon and Chabaquon, which is faire and cleare ground, running two myles from it to shunne a Riffe that lyeth close by Chinchon, which hath a round high Island lying close by the land: you must runne the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest, and northeast and by East, and Southwest and by west, and whē you are right against Chinchon, then about two miles into the Sea, you haue a high round Island, and within the land a high hill with a stony rocke on the top thereof, like Pulo Varella, in the coast of Champa, and the entry is through some Islands, this round Island afore, is by the Chinars called Toanthea.

When you are right against Chincheo, as aforesaid, then runne East Northeast vntill you are eight or ten myles from the coast to kéepe without all the Islands, and being there, then runne Northeast, in which course, you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, that little Lequeo lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées, it is a very high and long island, about eightéen miles distant from the coast of China, when you are past Lequeo Pequeno, comming into fiue and twenty degrees and ½: If you de∣sire to make to the land of Bungo, then runne Northeast, and Northeast and by East, in which course, you shall fall vpon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma, which Islands begin at 29 degrées and ½. and reach to thirtie degrées and ½. and are in all seuen high and small Islands, which reach one with the other, that is, the thrée first Islands Northeast and southwest, and Northeast and by North, and Southwest and by South, the other thrée East Northeast, and West Southwest, and one at the end of them North and South. These seuen Ilands being past, six miles further North northeast you shal sée two other ilands ly∣ing east and west with each other, wherof the East island is the smallest, the East end thereof hauing a high houell, which descendeth eastward, making a low point. You may well passe betwéene these two islands, for there is a good channell. The greatest of these two islands which is high and long, is called Icoo, from the east point whereof foure or fiue miles North∣ward, lyeth the island of Tanaxuma, which is a long island reaching North and south of seuen or eight miles long. In the mid∣dle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Hauen, which is a small Créeke within certaine stony cliffes, but it is not best to put into it. West Northwestward from this Hauen, about a mile and a halfe there lyeth a smal flat land that hath a ho∣uell in the middle seuen or eight myles Northward from Tanaxuma, you shall sée a great high land which reacheth tenne miles east and West, which is the land of Iapon, and at the end or point of this coast, on the West side lieth the Creeke of Can∣goxuma, and the hauen of Amango, aboue it hauing a high pointed top, and right a∣gainst the island of Tanaxuma, North and North and by East, lyeth the Créeke of Xebuxy, that is very great, hauing with∣in it the Hauens of Minato, Eoxima, and Xaboxy, all thrée Riuers for small Ships, And lying on the East side: on the right hand as you come West-ward into the Créeke sixe or seuen myles further North Northeast along the coast, lyeth the Ha∣uen of Tanora, which is the least Hauen of Iapon.

If you desire to put to the said hauen of Tanora, then you shall holde close to the shoare, sayling néere vnto it, for it is faire ouer all, but you haue no anker

ground nor Roades, because it is déepe, and when you passe by it, being beyond the Créeke of Xebury, then you shall come to a small Créeke, which at the first sight séemeth to haue good harbour, but be∣ing right against it, it sheweth what it hath, that is, many stones and rockes reaching somewhat inward to land. I note it here, because thereby no man should deceiue himselfe. Being past this small Créeke, you presently see a great thicke and high point of land: From this point, y^e land windeth inward, where you shall see a sandie strand, and two I∣slands with Trées, lying there along. At the end of the which Islands, there are other smaller Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward. With∣in these Islands and stones lyeth the Ha∣uen of Tanora, and to put into it, you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land. When you are right a∣gainst the end thereof, then Northeast∣ward from you to Sea-ward, there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe. You shall runne within this Island, and be∣twéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke, where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be, but there is not the right Hauen, but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye out∣ward to Sea, then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande, (Northward on the right hand,) and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare, and being about this point of land, you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards, and then you shall put to that point of land, which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter, for it is foure fadome déepe, all muddy ground, and anker by the East land, shunning the West.

From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast, which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo, all faire and cleare ground, hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes: and eightéene myles further, you shall find a very great Island, that will bee on the East side from you, which is the land of Toca, and reacheth East and West, and East and by North, and West and by South, about fortie myles long, comming out by Sacay and Miaco. The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare, along the which you runne to Sacay, betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo, on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure, fiue, or more myles broad, and such as will goe to Bungo, must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga, shunning the coast of Toca.

But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées & ½. beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno, as aforesaid: If you de∣sire to saile to the Island Firando, you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast, and Northeast and by east, to eight and twenty degrées and ¼. and be∣ing there, kéepe Northeast, by the which course you shall see two small, long, bare, and broken Islands, lying North and South with each other, on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant frō each other. These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie de∣grées and ¼. Thrée or foure miles North∣eastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the mid∣dle, hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes, when you are right against the aforesaid Island, then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward, and running the same coast Northeastward, you shall goe right vp∣on a very great high Island called Coia∣quijn, which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone, being three or foure myles distant from the coast, of thrée or foure myles long: on the East side to∣wards the Land, it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes. If you chance to fall within the Island, finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon, whereby you can∣not passe without the Island, then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island, without all the Islands and Stones, about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it, but goe not neare the coast, for that from the North Land there is a Point that rea∣cheth to the other side. Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes, as I said before, you shall presentlie put along by the Island, outward to Sea-ward, whereby North∣ward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid, which hath some Cliffes and Riffes: within the which, Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa. This point

of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island, lying North and South with each other: and when you haue past beyond this point of lande, then you shall hold a∣long the coast about a mile from it.

You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast, and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin, you shall take the same way (béeing past and about it) to come vnto the coast, and so runne along by it as aforesaid.

From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes, thrée or foure miles forward, there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast, and beeing past it, you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell, which is called O estrechio d'Arima, that is, the Straight of Arima: within this straight lyeth two good Hauens, the first called Xiquij, which is one of the best Ha∣uens of Iapon: This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand West∣ward at the end of a great Créeke, which hath a harbour for all windes, with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground, but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine: I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse, for in all places they will be Lordes and masters, to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants, which in all places will not be endured, namely in Iapon, be∣ing a stubborne and obstinate people. But to to the matter. On the North side of this créeke, on the land lying on the o∣ther side, there lieth a high round Island, and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground.

To put into Arima you shall goe tow∣ards the North Lande, for on the South side (as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij) you haue two stones, and there∣abouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth. This straight aforesaid (as you first enter into it) reacheth Eastward, and then turneth Northwarde, and along by the point (where it turneth northward) there runneth strong streames, and so stiffe, that if you be not carefull, it will turne the shippe about, and put it backe againe, if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames.

Being about this point aforesaid, on the same land there lieth a very good Ha∣uen called Cochinochy, or Cochin••quyn, and then the Hauen of Arima, whereof the Straight receiueth the name, and ly∣eth halfe a mile Northward from Cochi∣nochy, beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind, and without any defence for foule weather. Somewhat further ly∣eth the Hauen of Simonbaia, that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour a∣gainst the North wind, but at low water the shippes lie drie. In this Straight there, are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes, but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before.

From this Straight to the Island of Firando, along the coast there are many Islands and Cliffes, and a great Créeke. At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward, lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima, which is a great high land, hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes: and betwéene this Island and the Firme land, there is a good harbour, and in the same Island there is a village with many people, with a good small Créeke or Ha∣uen, where many Fisher boats & Foists doe lie: from thence begin the Islands of Firando.

From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward, there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea: you must run to the same point north∣westward. This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land, is all one créeke, because the land windeth inward, and because that on this coast of Iapon (commonly at such time as you goe thi∣ther) it is cloudie & mistie weather: there∣fore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land, but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out (that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof) but if it be cloudie and mistie weather, then you must not saile along the coast, but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid, & when you are hard by it, you shall presently dis∣couer all the Islands and cliffes. The fur∣thest to seaward of these Islands & cliffes, are two Islands separated from each o∣ther, betwéene high and lowe, and lon∣ger then round, wholly without Trées: and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it, one

lying Eastward, the other West North∣west, about halfe a myle by the East I∣land of these aforesaid two Islands, as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it, as it séemeth to be: And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the, South windes, and if you haue occasion you may anker there.

From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande, there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars: be∣tweene these Cliffes and another Chan∣nell (which the Islands begin to open be∣fore you) many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to F••∣rando and the Hauen of Vmbra, notwith∣standing you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand, running about halfe a mile to Sea∣ward from them: and béeing right ouer∣against these Islands, then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest, there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land, being a high and flat land on the top, and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands, although it is but one, for it hath two broken partes, and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands.

From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward, you shall see a round Island, hauing close by it a long small Island, and if it be cléere wea∣ther West Southwest or West, you shall see the Island of Goto, which is very high and great, with many rentes and clouen peeces, on the toppe being all euen and flat ground.

When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes, then runne straight vpon the point thereof, that stic∣keth outward, and if the tide chance to be against you with slat••e winde, then the water by this point sticking out of the a∣foresaid Iland) maketh a great roaring, and hath much scumme, so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon: notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe, therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare, keeping a little from the point: and in this manner passing about the point, then you must saile along, where you haue a great and good creeke, where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe: it is hard ground, where you may anker at plea∣sure, it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson, and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Fo••stes e∣nough aboord your shippe, that will bring you to Firando.

In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker, with good har∣bour for all winds. Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeast∣warde, lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds, wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid.

If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather, then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens, where you lie safe from ro∣uers and théeues, that may come thither. This Iland that seemeth to be thrée, is called Faquyn, and from thence to the I∣land Firando are fiue miles.

From this Iland Faquyn, if it be cléere weather, you may well sée the Iland of Firando, Northward from it, but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather, there is no certain∣tie, but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it, about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie, which reacheth North Northeast, and North & by West, about two miles and a halfe from you, you shall sée another long, high, and flatte Iland, clouen in the middle, and so shew∣eth to be two Ilands, stretching East and West. About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe: betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande (that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the afore∣said Iland) there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell, through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra, and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands, runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof, lying in the East, to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow, as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you, running in∣ward, then you shall sée a verie long land, which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the I∣land of Firando: you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side, for it is all ouer foule ground, as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Ca∣roxyma, leauing it on the West side

about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes, whereof that Westwarde is long, the other lying right before you béeing rounde, hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne, and then pre∣sently you shall sée two other Cliffes, which shall all lie Westward from you, and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you, being about two small miles from you, you may fréely make towardes it, for it is all ouer faire, and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward. When you are by the Islands and cliffes, then there are certaine small Channels, which you shall shunne, kéeping close by the Island of Firando, which is on your West side, and is a verie great and long Island, and sheweth (on that side whereunto you saile) with a great high Houell, in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island: when you are close by the same Island, you shall runne along by it, where you shall find an opening, stret∣ching inwards like a riuer, you shall passe about a mile beyond it, where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Co∣chyn, wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe, and there an∣ker: and although there you lie open to the South winde, yet the water goeth whole: beeing there, you shall send ei∣ther by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is, for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen, which Hauen lyeth somewhat further, for the entrie thereof is some∣thing dangerous, because of the great streames that haue their Current therein.

If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water, haue care, for the wind is strong at your entring, and when the water beginneth to ebbe, then it helpeth to bring you in: then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before: and being past the créeke of Cochyn, to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto, that sticketh out from the same Island (from the which point Northward there iutteth two sto∣nie Cliffes) you shall goe neare the sto∣nie Cliffes, the better to get into the Ha∣uen, and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando, a great and high Island, full of trées, & when you sée it, take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island, vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Lee∣ward from you, whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne: and when you beginne to see the houses, then put somewhat neerer to it, right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande, and there the Island hath a small lo•• poin•• of lande comming from a high h••u••••, and stretcheth into the Sea, from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke, therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to k••pe out of the streame, and when you are out being in calme water, if the winde be not good, then anker, and from thence be rowed in, either with Foists, Barks, or your own boat, West & West South∣west into the Hauen.

All this description and course of Na∣uigation, is in breefe to conclude, that when you come to the coast of Iapon, you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast, on the East side, and vp∣on the right hand, and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence: whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row, cal∣led Saquyn, and the long Island Caroxy∣ma, that lyeth further forwarde, which reach North, and North and by West, from the ende of the rowe, and the two small Islandes with two other small I∣slandes or Cliffes lying further forward, and are seuen in all, leauing them all on the left hand or the West side▪ with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando, as is before men∣tioned.

The 33. Chapter. A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot, (with a Soma, that is, a Chinish shippe) from Macau, or out of China, to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo, with the scituations of the pla∣ces along the course.

THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday, we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas, (lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau) running outward to sea,

putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter, but be∣cause we could not get aboue the Island, called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis, that is, the great Island of théeues, lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau, therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof. About the length of the shot of a base from it, there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other, with a very small channell running betweene them, tho∣rough the which they passed with Ban∣ko•• or Chinish Barkes. From thence about halfe a mile Northward, lieth ano∣ther long Island full of trees and bushes, and when you put in there, on the West Southwest side in the middle of the chan∣nell, there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea.

Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes, lyeth the Island of Ton∣quian, which is a high and long Island, full of trees and bushes, and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes: and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes, (which is a faire & good channell) wée passed to Leeward, between it and another Island, about a small mile Northward from thence, which is a great Iland, and there lie two Ilands or cliffes, the greater hard by it, and the other fur∣ther off, which we left on the left hande, running along by the Island of Tonquian, where it is all fair ground. Which Island on the point that lyeth East Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay, which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes.

When wee were out beyond that I∣sland, then wee helde our course East Southeast, vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island, and be∣ing in sight thereof, wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles, till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon, which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues, who at that time and in those countries were continually risident, making warre against the Portingales of Macau) and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight, I meane, the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande: and comming to the coast of La∣mon (although wee sawe it not) wee pre∣sently ranne Northeast, by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China, and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames: and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke, that standeth aboue the Hauen of China, seeing nothing else but high hilles: and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China, and running in that course of Northeast (which from Lamon wee alwaies held) wée perceiued the I∣sland of Lequeo Pequeno, or, Small Le∣queo, which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau, for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning, and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China, beeing on the South∣west point thereof.

This Island Lequeo Pequeno stret∣cheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North, and South∣west and by South, it is a very high I∣sland and about fifteene or sixteene miles long: the furthest point or end North∣eastward of the same Island lyeth full vnder 29. degrees ½. for there I tooke the height of the Sunne, with calme wea∣ther, being about fiue or sixe myles from it, and from this Northeast point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast, at the end thereo•• hauing another great and high Island, making a small Chan∣nell that runneth betweene them both: and it seemeth that on the Nor••heast side there is a good Rode for the Monson of South and Southwest windes: and a∣long by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three daies we had calme weather, and after that wee had a good gale of winde of the Monson, and I thinke wee had so great a calme because wee kept so close vnto the shoare.

About fiue and twentie degrées and •• from the point of Lequeo wee helde our course Northeast, and Northeast and by East, till wee came vnder nine and twen∣tie degrees.

Ten miles from Lequeo forwarde wée sawe great store of Cuttle bones driuing on the water, and many other shelles that were verie white, shew∣ing farre off much like vnto Cotton, but it was not long that they draue any thing thicke, for in short space after wee might perceiue them scattered a∣broad verie thinne, and but verie few,

vntill wée came vnder 26. degrées.

Comming vnder 29. degrées, wée held our course halfe a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the Sunne-setting, and then wée perceiued right before vs a round and high Island, being about sixe miles from it, which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seuen Islandes, which at this pre∣sent are called As Sete Irmaas, that is, the seuen sisters, which lie vnder 29. degrées and ½.

This first Island hath a sharpe point on the West side, in the middle at the foot thereof hauing a stone in forme of a Pil∣lar, like the Varella in the straight of Sin∣gapura by Malacca: and on the Northeast side about halfe a mile from thence, there lieth a round blacke Cliffe.

Béeing in the sight of this Island wée presently ranne North and by East, as before, all that night: and in the morning (béeing right against it) wee sawe all the rest of the seuen Islands, and still held our course Northeast, vntill we were before the last of the said seuen Islands: From whence about sixe miles Northward, ly∣eth two Islands stretching East & West, whereof that in the East is verie long and high, full of blacke shining trées, and that in the West much lesse and lower: at the East end or point of the lesser I∣land there is a high houell that descendeth Westward, making a long and lowe point. These islands are about a mile di∣stant from each other.

Westward from this Island about two miles and a halfe, there is another island, as great and high as the other aforesaid: the first great high Island aforesaid is cal∣led Icoo, and the aforesaid seuen Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you, and from the first to the last they may be about seuen or eight miles: when wee were at the end of the seuen Islands, we held our course Northeast, towardes the channell that runneth betwéene the great high Island, and the Iland that hath the long low point, where we passed through, comming out againe on the North side. This channell is faire and deepe without any cliffes or stones.

Foure miles Northwestward from this Channell, lyeth a verie high and round Island, which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffes. This Iland hath a Mine of Brimstone which lyeth in the middle thereof. A mile North∣ward from this fiery Island lyeth ano∣ther small and lowe Island, and from the aforesaide fiery Islande about eight miles Eastward, lyeth the Island of Ta∣naxuma aforesaid: the great high Island of Icoo aforesaide lying on the East side of the Channell, on the North side there∣of hath a lowe Lande, and all along by it is verie good harbour, béeing faire and good ground, reaching foure or fiue miles East and West.

Thrée miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo, lyeth the aforesaide Island of Tanaxuma, as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Nauigation to the Island of Ferando.

This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South, béeing altogither low Land and full of Houels and Valleyes, with Pine trées that stand farre distant one from the other, and is about seuen or eight miles long: and in the middle thereof on the West side, lyeth a Hauen within certaine Cliffes and Rockes, and a mile and a halfe West Northwest∣ward from this Hauen lyeth a very small and lowe Island, with a little Houell in the middle. On the North end of this smal Iland there are some stones & rocks sticking out about the length of the shotte of a great péece, all the rest is faire. Like∣wise betwéene this Island and Tanaxu∣ma it is all ouer faire and cleere. Seuen or eight miles Northward from the I∣sland of Tanaxuma, lyeth the great and high Land of Iapon, which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten myles from the chan∣nell aforesaid that runneth betweene the Islandes: you can not see Tanaxuma vn∣lesse it bée faire and cleere weather: wee ranne East Northeast, and were about three miles distant from the aforesaide Channell before wee discouered Tanaxu∣ma, as likewise the great land of Iapon, which (as I saide before) is verie high, stretching East and West about tenne miles, and because Tanaxuma stretch∣eth North and South, being lowe land, and the land of Iapon high, therefore in that place where wée were, they see∣med vnto vs like one Lande, because they reach each through other. Where∣vpon the Chinish Pilote which wee had at that time aboord our shippe, thought

then to be all one land, but when we put nearer to it, then wée began to sée the Channell that runneth betwéene them, beeing distant one from the other crosse ouer, about seuen or eight miles: and in that manner wée ranne halfe a strike East Northeast towardes the land of Ia∣pon, it being flood, where the tide ranne Eastward towards the small Island that lyeth by Tanaxuma driuing vs thither, whereby we had much labour and paine to get aboue it, passing about the length of the shot of a great péece from it: where∣fore it is necessarie for a man to runne No••theast vntill hée be past that small I∣land aforesaid.

When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma, wée ranne North North∣east towards the coast, being three myles distant from it: and right against the creeke of Xebuxij we had a calme, beeing the last of Iune, hauing departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas, lying on the West side of the mouth or chan∣nell of Macau, the nintéenth of the same moneth, hauing Sailed toward Iapon a∣bout eleuen dayes, whereof we had thrée daies calme, so that our Sailes lay flat to the Mastes, being vnder the Island of Le∣queo as aforesaid.

The 34. Chapter. Another description of the course from the Hauen of Macau along by the Island of China to the Island of Fyrando, and the Islands lying about it, to the Hauen of Vmbra in the coast of Iapon: with a de∣scription of other Hauens lying therea∣bout, where they ordinarily vse to traf∣ficke.

IF you desire to Saile out of Macau towardes Iapon, in the Monsons of Iune and Iulie, and if in setting out you can not kéep to loofeward from a cliffe which you may easily perceiue lying by Macau, which sheweth like a saile, you neede not feare it, for that leauing the I∣sland Lanton on the Lée side, you may runne whither you will, for it is all faire, and you need not feare any thing: when yea are without the Island, you shall hold your course towardes the Island Branco that is, the white Island, or the white Stonie Cliffes) running East Northeast, towardes the Island of La∣mon, and if you haue a faire winde, and that you depart about Euening from the said Island, then on the Firme land you shall sée a great high Land, on the East side descending somewhat flat, and in the middest thereof hauing a round houell like a loofe of bread. The depthes all a∣long by that coast about two miles from it, is thirtie and fiue and thirtie fadome deepe, being muddie ground: From Ilha Branco to Lamon there are diuers small Islandes lying by the coast of the Firme Land. In this place for twelue miles or thereabouts on this side Lamon, and se∣uen or eight miles from the Firme land, there is small black sand with some shels, at seuen and twentie and eight and twen∣tie fadomes water, and being there you shall stil runne East Northeast, although you see no land, for that hauing the afore∣said depth and ground, you passe fréely and safely from the Riffe of the island Lamon, and if it so fall out that you see no land, yet by the depthes and ground you may well know where you are, for from the island Lamon to Macau the depthes of the afore∣said ground is from 25. to 28. fadome déepe, and by Lamon and thereabouts the ground is white, small, and thinne, with some blacke sande, and if you chance to passe by it in close and darke weather, then you shall hold your course as afore∣saide East Northeast, for it is the best way: and when you make towardes the island of Lamon and finding the depthes of fifteene or sixtéene fadome, it is a signe that you are farre to seaward (for in that country the streame runneth very strong East Southeastward) there as then you must runne Northeastward, so to holde your right course.

And running at the depthes of fiue and twentie or eight and twentie fadome sandie ground, it is a good way, holding your course East Northeast, for in that sort you are in the right way: in the mid∣dle way from the channell when you are past the Island of Lamon towardes Chin∣chon then the streame runneth with you, and hauing the wind of the Monson: the next day you shall sée land on both sides, whereof, that you find on the Stearebord side is the end or point of the Island Le∣queo Pequeno, or, small Lequeo: and the beginning of the Island called Ilha Fermosa, that is, the faire Island, and on

the lareboord side, the Lande lyeth in forme like a hooke, although it is none, but it is the Island of A Ilha dos Cauallos, of the Island of Horses, which is very high lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées and a third part, on the one side about foure or fiue miles to Sea-ward from it, hauing the Island of Baboxyn, and hauing séene this Lande, you must holde your course Northeastward, which is a good way, so to runne outward of all the Islands, for that from this Island of Horses forward to the Cape of Sumbor, there are many Islands reaching into the Sea, wherfore this is your best course to goe to the Ca∣bo de Sembor, and as you thinke you are right against y^e Cape of Sumbor, although you sée it not, you need not feare it, for that as then you are about eight or ten myles from it.

Being in this country, you shall holde your course Northeast, so to sée the Island of Puloma, or Meaxuma, or the Island Guoto for it is a good course, for the winds of the Monson, or if you haue any stormes or contrary winde, whereby you cannot holde your right course, then you must gouerne your selfe in such manner, that you may fall againe into your right course, and so to sée some of those Islands. This aforesaid Island of Pu∣loma lyeth North North-east, and South Southwest, with the Island Guoto, about tenne or twelue miles distant from each other, and is deuided into foure or fiue parts, with many holes & péeces of ground round about it, yet you need not feare, for close by it, there are many other péeces of ground, which I knowe, as hauing seene them all.

From this Island aforesaid to the Ha∣uen of Vmbra, or the Island of Firando, you must runne your course of Northeast, wherewith you shall sée the land lying be∣neath Vmbra, which is very high, hauing along y^e coast many small Islands, among the which are two Cliffes, that sticke out with very hard sharpe Points like Dia∣monds. From thence to Vmbra are sixe or seuen miles, and being there, about a mile from the Lande, you shall holde your course North, and so runne along by the coast, and being by it, you shall kéepe close to it to know the Lande and markes thereof, which are these: that when you are close by the Land on the right hand, there is a Point of Land, from whence there lyeth two Islandes to Seaward, which is hard by the en∣try of Vmbra, for from this Point in∣ward, you runne Northeast towards it. Vpon this Hooke or point are three Pine Trees: and being right against this point to Sea-ward from it on the left hand you shall sée a smal Island with a round cliffe, you must runne within this Cliffe, whereby right before, you shall see the land of Vmbra.

When you perceiue a great Island or Cliffe, which is very plaine and descen∣ding downeward, lying inward to Sea, then on the Lande side you shall sée great store of wéedes driuing vpon the Water. This Island you must leaue on the Lare∣boord or left hand, running betweene it and the Land, for it is about halfe a myle broad: From this Island to the mouth or entry of the channell are two miles, with a Northeast course, whereby you shall presentlye sée the entry which is very broad.

From this Island or Cliffe there run∣neth a stony rocke, reaching to the mouth of the Riuer, some part of it lying aboue water, and part couered, yet you may plainely sée it, so that you néed not feare a∣ny thing, but that you sée before your eies. Betweene this Rocke and the Lande on the right hand, in the middle way there is fiftéene or 18 fadome déep muddy ground, when you see the mouth of the Chan∣nell, you must put right towards it, without feare, for it is a very good way: And being within this straight or chan∣nell, whereby you discouer the Riuer, then you must holde your course on the right hand, whereby you shall present∣ly sée a round Island, hauing a Crosse on the toppe thereof: and although you sée not the entry, yet you must put to∣wards that Island: for when you are right against it, then you shall pre∣ently see the Road wherein the shippes doe lye, as also a Portingale Church standing vpon the Lande, and béeing within- you must runne South-warde, about the length of the shot of a great Péece, where you may anker at tenne fadome déepe, being very good muddye ground, and there you shall make your Shippe fast on the North North∣east, and South South-west sides, and euen as the Winde dooth blowe, you shall winde the Béeke heade of

the shippe, making the ankers fast vnder the stones, for there it is very narrowe: Notwithstanding, you néed not feare, al∣though the wind be great.

Take héed when you come from Cabo de Sumbor from y^e coast of China towards the land of Iapon, although you see not the Islands aforesaid, leaue not your course of Northeast vntill you be vpon the coast of Iapon, for although you fall by the Ha∣uen of Arima, which is twelue miles from Vmbra, you néede not care, for in those places you haue very good Hauens. By the Hauen of Arima aforesaid, there ly∣eth an Island (somewhat néerer the North then the South) called Cabexuma, which on the inside hath a very good Ha∣uen, where you may lye and Trafficke freely. And if from thence you desire to runne further inward, then holde your course North Northeast, and Northeast and by North, wherewith you shall come to a Hauen called Cochinochy, lying in the Kingdome of Arima, and departing from Cabexuma, you shall runne along by the Northpart of the land, about seuen or eight myles, whereby you shall come right against Cochinochy, which is a better hauen then Vmbra, because there∣in the Shippes may anker at pleasure, and before you come néere this Hauen, many Shippes and Barkes will come a∣boord you shippe, which wil fréely bring you in, and you néed not feare the creeke of Arima, for the old Pilotes were in doubt thereof, because they knew it not so well as I, for that I haue sayled all within and about it with a Foist, with trouble ynough. Right against Cochino∣chy, lyeth another very good Hauen, cal∣led Oxy, belonging to the King of Bun∣go, where you may freely trafficke.

You need not feare the entry of Arima for that besides the hauens aforsaid wher∣in you may lye safely, there will many Foystes and Barkes come and boord you Shippe, that will bring you whe∣ther you will, and helpe you to your desire.

You must likewise vnderstand, that along by the coast of China you need not feare any thing, for it is all faire and good ground, keeping without all the I∣slands, for if you goe betwéene them, you should hardly get out againe to your desire: therefore it is best for you to keepe without them, running along by them, and so there is no feare: for it is all faire way, as well to the Island Fi∣rando as to the Hauen of Vmbra, onely that Firando lyeth seuen or eight myles North-ward from the Hooke or Point of Trées, and being there, you shall present∣ly sée Firando, and in putting forward to it, you find a Varella, that is a marke of a sharpe stony hill: & then you shall gouern your selfe as aforesaid, for then you may presently perceaue it, being a very high land, which stretcheth East Northeast, & West Southwest, in the middle way ha∣uing many small Islands, with channels betwéene them, thereby to runne from the one side to the other: but if you wil go from the Island of Cabexuma to Vmbra, you must alwaies kéepe close to the land, for in the Island of Diamonds, or poin∣ted Island, there is another very good ha∣uen, where (as soone as you are in sight thereof) many Barkes and Foists will boord you, and so bring in your Shippe. The Hauens in those countries, are these that follow as well in the Land of Iapon, as the Islandes lying about it: whereof in this description I haue alreadie made mention. First in the Island of Cabexu∣ma, there is a very good Hauen, also Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of A∣rima is a better Hauen. The Hauen of Oxy right against Cochinochy, is also a better Hauen. In the Island called O Ilha do Diamon, that is, the Island of the Diamond, because of the sharpe pointed Rocke, there is likewise a very good Hauen, which is part of the Lande of Vmbra, also the Hauen of Vmbra is a good Hauen.

The 35. Chapter. A short description of the course from Ma∣cau in China to Iapon, and the Island Cabexuma to the Hauen of Langa∣saque or Nangasache, which at this day is most frequented of the Portin∣gales: with all the courses and scitua∣tions, by an expert Pilote, with a decla∣ration of the winds called Tuffon.

AS soone as you are past y^e Island of Ilha do Leme, which lyeth as you come out from Macau, then hold your course East northeast, wherby you shal passe about the Island of Lamon, and if it be in the night time, you

shall cast out your Lead, and find two and twenty and thrée and twenty fadome déep with shels and blacke sand on the ground, and then you are right against the Riffe, and when you are past it, you shall finde white and small sand. Then holding your course Northeast, and Northeast and by East, alwaies kéeping from the coast of Chinchon as much as you may, for the best way is to runne in the middle of the channell, as far from the Island of fishers as from the coast of Chincheo. And if you goe néerer the Island of Fishers called A Ilha dos pescadores, you shall finde lesse depth, and therefore you must look to your course, and when you are past the Island Lamao, cast out your Lead, because of the Island of fishers. And if in those countries you haue a storme with the winds called Tuffon, and come from the Northeast parts, then hold your course to Seaward as much as you may to shunne the coast, for the wind without doubt will be south∣east, which is right vpon the coast, whereby it lyeth right against you: and if it driueth you not vpon the coast, then it were best for you to strike all your sayles, and take them in, and so lye driuing, vntil the wind come South, and then to follow on your course againe. I giue you this counsell, because that for the space of two yeares one after the other, I haue béen in those countries with storms of the winds called Tuffon, so that one voiage we were almost cast away, by séeking to put vnto the coast. Nowe to vnderstand the mea∣ning of this word Tuffon, it is a Chinish word, which the Portingales also doe holde without altering the same, and sig∣nifieth a storme or Tempest, which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon. If you faile of it at some∣time, it is not often, it commeth and be∣ginneth from one point, and so run∣neth with a continuall storme almost a∣bout all the points in compasse, blowing most stiffely, whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande, and in such sort, that not any stormes through∣out all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it, wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it, and to chuse your times, that by calmes sodainely you bee not vn∣aduisedly ouertaken, as euery man that hath sayled those wayes, can sufficient∣ly showe you, and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so.

When you are right against the I∣sland A Ilha Fermosa, then runne North∣east, by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima, which is a good way: and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side, and haue seuen∣tie fiue fadome water, then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma, and hauing lesse depth, then your course is not good, but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better, but being too loofeward, it is good, especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare, which is a smal Island: on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes: and somewhat farther for∣ward, the Island Co••aquyn which is very great, being deuided into thrée parts. I haue passed by the land side thereof, which is a very good way, and there you néede not feare any thing, but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island, which you may easily perceiue, for the Sea breaketh vpon them. You must holde your course along by it, leauing the stones on the larboor•• side, about the length of the shot of a Base from you: and when you are past them, then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea, there∣by to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer a∣gainst the thicke and great Lande, for be∣twéene them and it, it is all full of Riffes. And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn, in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande (that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes) lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa, which is very great, where the Créeke of Arima beginneth. From thence North North westward from you, you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma.

When you are right against Cabexu∣ma, somewhat beyond it, you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side, and then East-warde, and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos, or of Hor∣ses, which on the Sea side hath a great houell, and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast, which shew like two Ships vnder sayle. Also further forward towards Firando, there is two flat Islands lying along the coast, called the Islands of Resting as, that is, the Islands of Riffes.

If when you come out of the Sea, you haue cause to anker▪ before you put into the Hauen, being by the Islands or Cliffes, then put out newe Cables, making them fast, that you loose not your ankers, for there it is very déepe and sharpe.

Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes, then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos, and when you are by it, that is, inward of the point. You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water, all the o∣ther Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side, which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda, and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque, hauing nothing to feare, then that you sée before your eyes: for there you haue both Sea and ground, as it is vpon the coast of Spaine.

The 36. Chapter. A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe cal∣led the S. crus, the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais, and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enc∣huisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe.

* 1.1THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis, minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe, lying East South∣east from thence: but because the wind was so scant, wee could not doe it, so that we were forced to driue, so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did. The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water, and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton, and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper, being eightéene & twenty fadome, and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme, that is the Island of the Harquebush.

This Island of Lanton, as you make towards it, hath a point, where the wind fell very scarce, in such manner, that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island, lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong, that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward, other∣wise we had indured great labor and trou∣ble to passe through the channell, because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme, the course wee held that night was East and East and by South, because wee had a sharpe wind, hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground, about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco, or the white cliffe: and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it.

The sixt of Iuly being Saterday, we could not take the height of the sunne, be∣cause it was right ouer our heads, hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind, with very hote weather by day, but by night it was somewat colder, we held our course East Northeast, East, and east and by North, as the winde blewe, and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen & twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground, being in sight of lande, and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of La∣mon, which is a long flat land like a Ta∣ble or plaine field: on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea, and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea, and hard by against the thickest part thereof, you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon, to Seaward whereof ly∣eth thrée Cliffes. Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon, there wée call forth our Leade, and found 27 fadome water, with small, white and some blacke sand with small shels among it, being a∣bout seuen or eight miles from the land.

The seuenth of Iuly being sunday, we had a calme, and somtimes (but not much) Southeast and South Southeast winds, holding our course East Northeast, north∣east, and Northeast and by North, at 24 and 26 fadome water: and as soone as we had past the Island of Lamon, we present∣ly had small thinne white sand vpon the ground with some shels, being in the morning about seuen miles from the land of Chincheo, and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha dos Lymoins, that is, the Island of Lemmons, lying by Mallaca, and somewhat further wee saw a thinne Lande, with a sharpe point

standing vpon it, which is said to bée a Varella do Chinchon, that is, the marke or Rocke of Chinchon being vpon the eight day, which was munday, the next night following wee had a calme, where∣with the wind came North, being some∣what cold, with some shoures of rayne: but with a South-east winde we had no raine, yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the South-east, with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts.

The ninth being Tuesday, wee had the height of the sunne at 23 degrées and ½. in the night hauing had the winde East Southeast with a good gale, and all night wée lay driuing without sailes, with an East and East Southeast windes, and a good gale, casting out our Lead, and found twenty and foure & twenty fadome déep, once hauing eightéene fadome, where wee found small white Sand with some shels. In the morning very earely we had a north wind, wherwith we wound east∣ward, hauing nothing but the Fouke∣saile and the Misen vp, vntill euening, and at the depths aforesaid wée tooke in our sailes, minding to driue: the next day we saw land, which wee had séene the day before, and it lay Northward from vs, and halfe a point North and by West.

The eleuenth being Thursday wée tooke not the height of the Sun, because wée lay driuing without sayles, with an East, and East Southeast windes, the waues comming Southeast, our Shippe winding Northeast: this was by night, but by day wée had a Northeast, and north Northeast wind, in such maner, that som∣time we kept on the one side, and some∣times on the other, as wind and weather serued, at twenty and foure and twenty fadome deepe, small white sand, and some∣times eightéene fadome: the night before we had much lightening out of the West and South parts, being the thirtéene day of the new moone, and the day before wée had the heigth of the Sunne at 23 degrées and ½. The land we saw we could hardly discerne, but we supposed it to bée the land we had séene the other day.

The twelfth day being Friday, wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wée lay driuing without sayles, with an East South-east wind in the night time, and in the day wée had it North-east, at twentie and foure and twentie fadome déepe, and sometimes eightéene fadome, with small thinne white sand, the ground at foure and twenty fadome, being some∣what greater sand, with some she is: when it began to be day, we were as we thought about fiue or sixe myles from the land, and the night before wée had much lightening round about vs, and in the morning some shoures of raine without wind, the skye being thicke and close, whereby it seemed the weather would chaunge. About eue∣ning we had a Southeast wind, presentlie changing South South-east, wherevpon we let fall our sailes, holding our course North-east, and North east and by East, and also East Northeast, but most part Northeast, so that the depths began to bée greater, and were fiue and thirty fadome, with small white sand, the Moone as then being at the full, and the waues alwayes running out of the South-east, and with that winde wée sayled for the space of fiue daies together.

The thirteenth being Saterday, wée tooke the height of the Sunne at foure and twenty degrées, that night running East Northeast till morning, then sailing East and East, and by north, and found w•• had sayled twenty myles, being eight myles from the coast of China, and in the mor∣ning we saw land vpon the other side, the ground on that side was white, thinne, and some blacke sand, and about sunne setting we cast out out Lead, and found fiue and thirtie fadome déepe, with very fine black sand.

The fouretéenth being sunday, we took the heigth of the sun, being scarse fiue and twenty degrées, hauing a southwest wind with very good weather, holding our course Northeast, and Northeast and by North, all that night at seuen and thirty fadome déepe, with very thinne sand, & some black muddy ground, and at the last watch in the morning wee found muddy ground at the same depth of ••7 fadome, mixed with blacke sand, and when day began to appeare, we saw Lande, being part of the coast of ••hina, being about four, fiue, or six miles from it, and we discouered the La∣garto with the two sisters, that is, the coc∣kodril Islands so called, and so we cast out our Lead, and found two and forty fadome déepe muddy ground, and somewhat san∣dy, and y^e same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno, or lit∣tle Lequeo, and then the winde séemed as

though it would haue blowne fuller.

The fiftéenth day being Munday, wée tooke the height of the sunne at 25 degrées and 1/••. and in the night we had the winde North, with very good weather, running about to the northwest, and we ran East northeast, Northeast & Northeast to east, & whē it began to be day, we saw land, be∣ing the end of the Island Fermosa, or y^e fair Island, which is a long and low land, bro∣ken or rent in the middle, which séemeth to be a breach, but it is nothing els but as I said before: and presently after eastward we saw another higher land, which is I∣ands called Ilhas dos Re••s Magos, that is, the Island of the thrée Kings: we passed a∣long by about 7. or 8. miles from them, and that night we had 34 fadome déepe, and desiring to know what depth wee found, being in sight of the land aforesaid, wee found aboue 40 fadome, the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from vs, being mud∣dy ground▪ that day we had a sharpe wind of the Monson, but it helde no longer then til euening, and then it was calm againe, and so held till morning, and then we had it Northwest, so running about from the West till it came Southwest, and conti∣nued till night, and then it was calme, be∣ing Tuesday.

The sixtéenth being in sight of the I∣slands aforesaid, the same day wee had the heigth of the Sunne at 26 degrées, lesse ½. degree, and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from vs, and the little Island east southeast. This little I∣sland is higher on the south southwest side, then on the Southwest side, and the point or hooke of y^e southwest part, hath a breach or rent, to the which, the néerer you ap∣proch, the greater it séemeth.

This Island is very high in the mid∣dle, and descendeth downeward towards the end. The Northeast point is lower then the southeast, so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out, which is very lowe. From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes. The depth in that place is fiue and twen∣ty fadome muddy ground.

Wednesday being the seuentéenth, we had a North Northeast wind, and then it came North-east, and began to blowe so stiffe, that we were forced to strike all our sailes, letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward, and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest, and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues, that we were forced to go with half our fouke∣saile, with all our cords wel bound & made fast, and the storm or Tuffon was so great, that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord, els it was presently stricken in péeces. This Tempest began first North Northeast, and so ranne about till it was North Northwest. At the depar∣ture whereof it was so boysterous, that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes. This was vpon Thursday, being the two and twentith day of the new Moone: the next night following the wind came west, but because as then the Sea ranne verie high, we let not our sailes fall, but in the morning we had the wind southwest, and then we let fall our sailes, minding to fol∣low on our course with great ioy through∣out our ship, thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson, but towards night it was calme againe, and then wee had a North wind, holding our course east¦ward, but not long after it was altogither calme, notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South, so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast, where∣with we hoised sailes, running northeast, and Northeast and by North, and when it began to be day, we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos (that is, the thrée kings) lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs, and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔. being the one and twenty day of the Moone.

The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa, which is a very high Land, and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes, & there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground. On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead, and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande. The first token that we had of the afore∣said Tempest, was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side, be∣ing a faire russet colour, with two other greater Rainebowes: whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois (that is, Cats eyes) which are small clouds, which at the first shewe, seeme no greater then a mans fist: about the Cape De bona Speranza, which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked, for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes, as in the voyage from India to

Portingale is alreadie partly declared: wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof, the better to looke vnto it, and to watch for them, to y^e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place. But returning vnto our matter: I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries, as long as the winde commeth out of the North, and so Southwest, you are to make no ac∣count thereof, for it will presently bée North Northeast and East, but when it is calme, then you shall haue a Southeast winde, and then South and Southwest, which are the monson and windes of that time, but if it beginne againe to be calme, it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast, but it will presently be south∣east againe, with faire weather, which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly, Anno 1585.* 1.2

Monday the two and twentie day, wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. de∣grées and 1/••. hauing a Southeast & South∣southeast winde, with good weather, and helde our course Northeast, and as I ges∣sed wée had runne (after wée had faire weather and wind) about two and twen∣tie miles, béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles, being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma, and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water, and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout, the blacke birdes by the Por∣tingales being called Alcatrases.

The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday, wée had verie good weather, in such man∣ner, that at that mealetide wée sailed a∣bout fiftéene miles, béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China. In the morning we cast out the Lead, and found one and fiftie fadome, with white and blacke sand.

Wednesday being the four and twen∣tie day, wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées, with an East Southeast, and Southeast winde and good weather, holding our course Northeast, and North∣east and by North, and sometimes (but not much) Northeast and by East. I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North, and so to haue sailed 16. miles. being yet from the Island of Meaxuma a∣bout 70. miles, lying Northeast from vs, and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe, sandie & muddy ground▪

Thursday the 25. of Iuly, wee tooke not the height of the Sunne, because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind, winding Southward, and so helde till the 26. day, and draue Westward, fin∣ding two fadome lesse in our depth.

The 26. we wound Northward with∣out sailes, yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall, (but wholly against my mind) but onely at the importunate de∣sire of the Chinish Pilat, saying that the same day wee should haue the winde lar∣ger, which was not so, but cleane contra∣rie, so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs: wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. de∣grées, to stay for Southeast windes, and then to runne North Northeast, North∣east, and Northeast and by North, because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo, and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées, hauing a South Southeast winde, then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma, for so it happened vnto vs, because the wind was so strong, that we could beare but our foresaile, and halfe the maine top-saile, as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow, and put our shippe out of course, and that the streames ranne Southeast: This is a∣bout 25. or 30. miles from the Island Me∣axuma.

But as soone as the winde came full, whereby wee ranne East, East and by North, and East Northeast, at 40. and 34. fadome water, the ground being ve∣rie smal sand, holding as much Eastward as possibly we might, and sometimes east and by South, wherby we began to haue more depth, yet very slowly, that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hard∣ly forward, but because the water ranne very hollow, whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered (wherein we onely put our trust) at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground, and then ••0. and 75. fadome with small thin sand, and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep, but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde. At that casting, the ground was somewhat greater sande, and because (as wee made account) wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma, I presently tooke in the

maine toy and myssen in, contrary to the opinion of some Pilots, euery quarter or ••atch in the night, cast the Lead conti∣nually ou••, and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe, & sailing so for a little time, we saw land, which was part of the Island Meaxuma, although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto, but therein they were as perfect, as in all the rest of their iudgements.

This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande, lying lowest to the Southwest, and when you are right against it, at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a For∣tresse, it was told vs, that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water, whereupon the water breaketh.

This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands, whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before, hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like wo∣mens breasts, or like a saddle: the other two Islandes or likenes thereof, in the middle way, are like great Cliffes, with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes, and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast, sheweth like a verie long, but not ouer high cliffe, we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast, about two miles beyond it, and when we left Meax∣uma because the winde ranne Southeast, then we ranne Northeast, Northeast and by East, and East Northeast, and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula, and being to Lee∣ward we espied a great thicke land, lying close by the Island Cabexuma. This I∣sland Cabex••ma is long flat land, verie smooth, on the North side hauing a Cliffe: this was the last of Iuly, and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langa∣s••que, which is the Hauen & place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke.

The 37. Chapter. The right markes of the Island Meaxuma, as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land, with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen, and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of I••pan.

FIrst, when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water, you must go right vpon the middle of the I∣sland, and seeing Land at that depth, it will be a high plaine steepe land, but not verie great, on the vppermost part thereof hauing two p••ps, and when you goe néere it, you shall presently sée another long land, béeing flat and euen on the toppe, betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes, with many small, lying togither, which you saile close by: about two miles from them, this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe, and a little further to Seaward from it, there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water, whereon the Sea breaketh, and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe. You must vnderstand, that com∣ming to Iapon, and finding more depthes then aforesaid, and séeing land, then it is not the Island of Meaxuma, but rather the Island called Sancta clara, & if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome, then it is Meaxuma, but then it will bée on the Starrebord side. The Island of Meaxu∣ma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2/••. Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque, passing from this Island about two miles East∣ward from it, he must runne Northeast, and Northeast and by East, hauing a full wind: but if you saile by the winde, you must rather saile East Northeast, & with this course you shall get the Island of Ca∣bexuma, and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa, as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexu∣ma, which you shall presently sée: and if you desire to be put into Langasaque, then you must holde along by the cliffes afore∣said to Seaward from them: and béeing past those cliffes, you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos, or of Horses, which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées: you must put towardes that point, and when you are right against it, you shall not presently fall vpon it, because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury, which commonly you find most certainly in that place: and when you find those billowes, you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient, thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen, and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on, for there you haue no cause of feare, and when you begin to put in, then you

shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place, which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Ca∣uallos, so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe, then onely to runne in through the middle thereof, till you be in the Rode, where you must an∣ker, hauing foure fadome, and ½. and fiue fadome water, which is when a trée that is right against the great and principal∣lest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church, and you ouer against it, then you are at the right place, and it is a very good place to anker in: but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church, you must take care to kéepe on the left hand, thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point, and so anker as afore∣said.

And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid, and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome, (as some anci∣ent Pilots aduise you) in danger of an East wind, then my opinion is, that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma, and certaine I∣slands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos, which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe, and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will, so that you may anker there at twelue or fif∣téene fadome which you will, vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caf∣fury, wherby you are safe from the north∣east to the Southeast and South, béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile, betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in, which is a verie good channell of ten fa∣dome déepe: you néed but passe right tho∣rough the middle, and to be the better as∣sured, you may send a boat in before you, which shall lie there where y^e riuer is nar∣rowest, thereby to serue you for a Baye or Sea-marke.

The 38. Chapter. The right course to saile from the Island Meaxuma to the Hauen of Cochinochy and to Facunda, with the scituation of the Places.

WHen you sée the Island Meaxu∣ma, go within a mile and a halfe or two miles néere it, or somewhat closer if you will, for there you néed feare no∣thing but what you sée before you, and desiring to saile from thence to Cochino∣chy then you shall hold your course East, and East and by North, stil kéeping East∣ward, whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima: and if it bée by night, and that you desire to knowe when you are by the land, then cast your Lead con∣tinually out, and béeing at fortie fadome, then you are about two miles and a halfe or thrée miles from the lande, and béeing in the mouth of the Créeke, you shall finde hard and great Sand: and when you are at fortie fadome, you may an∣ker if the weather be faire: if you thinke it bée falling water, and so stay till it bée daye, for there the streame runneth ve∣rie strong into the Sea, your Lead will direct you what you shall doe.

If it bée day, you shall presently sée the Lande of Cabexuma, to Seawarde from you, lyeth a Cliffe which shew∣eth like a Saile. This Cliffe you can not sée, but when you are close by the point: to Léewarde from this point Northward, lyeth certaine stonie cliffes, but it is not best for you that you sée them when you goe to Cochinochy, because they lie to Lée-warde, as I saide before. And wen you sée lande, which is at fortie fadome water, then you shall presently discouer the Créeke of Arima, as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side, and the lande of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side, which is very high. This lande lyeth on the South side, and Ca∣bexuma on the North side, when you sée the point of Cabexuma, goe within a mile of it, because of a stonie cliffe which lyeth in the mouth of the Creeke, hol∣ding your course close by Cabexuma, a∣bout a mile and a halfe from it, or along by the land of Amacusa.

If the winde within this Créeke bée sharpe, then stay vntill the floode com∣meth, which shall bring you where you desire to be, and being there you haue Co∣chinochy right before you, where you shall haue Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in.

Hée that desireth to goe to Facunda, must hold his course East Northeast, and Northeast and by east, and when you are close by the land, you shall find the depths

aforesaid, and beeing to Léewarde from Cabexuma, you shall there finde harde ground and if it be right ouer against the mouth of the creeke, you shall haue sandie ground, as aforesaid: and when you see the point of Cabexuma, then make tow∣ards the lande, and by the lande about a mile distant you shall sée certaine stonie cliffes, by the which you shall holde your course to Seaward from them: by these first stonie cliffes lyeth a round Island, with a trée in it, and somewhat beyond this Island with one Trée, there is ano∣ther Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast, called Ilha dos Cauallos, that is, the Island of Horses: you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lyeth out on the North side of the same Island. This Island on the Northwest side hath for a marke certaine Pine trées; when you are close by the aforesaid Nor∣therly point, then from thence hold East Northeast, till you put in where you shall find a Creeke, and right ouer against this Island North Northeast, lieth a sharpe pointed Houell, reaching to Seawarde, which you must shun, for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones, which you shall presently see when you enter in∣to the creeke, going within an Island or cliffe which will be East Northeast from you: you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great péece, and so runne along by it till you be in, and with∣in on the right hand vpon the lande you shall sée certaine downes, and on the left hand a groue, hauing on the sea side as you passe along many stones like Kefell stones. Right ouer against this Island on the left hand, lie the two stones afore∣said, which you can not see: then with an ebbe of a spring tide, and running in after this manner, you shall see a crosse stan∣ding vpon a point of land: and right ouer against this crosse is the Rode, and from this crosse Eastward there is a verie good Hauen, where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side, that is, the Hauen of Facunda.

The 39. Chapter. An instruction of the course out of the Ha∣uen of Langasaque or Nangasache, to the cape de Sumber, in the coast of China, where the Portingales are resident.

SAiling out of the hauen of Lang••saque to China hauing a North wind, if you haue cause to an∣ker, below by the thrée Islands or cliffes, bée∣ing right ouer against the Island dos Cauallos, on the side of Fa∣cunda, then anker there along, for it is déepe enough all ouer, as I with my lead haue prooued: there you shall stay the first night, that in the morning very early you may haue the winde from off the lande, wherewith you shall set saile, loosing as much as you can vntill you be gotten a∣bout the Island dos Cauallos, for because we did it not (being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga) we were in danger not to haue béene able to get about the Island.

Béeing past the Island dos Cauallos, you must hold your course West, West and by South, and West Southwest, and if the wind be bigge then put not towards the Island Guoto, for that there at that time you haue certaine South windes, which I knowe for certaine, because I haue béen there at other times, in the ship of Manoel Trauassos in great trouble, be∣cause it is crosse wind right vpō the coast, and there you haue no ground, as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas (which are called Pottes, and by some Cliffes) wherefore your best course is to runne to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma. A∣long by the Southwest side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliffe, from thence for∣warde you shall holde your course West Southwest, although you haue the wind scant, yet you may hold that course, for that being halfe way from the gulfe to the coast, you shall without doubt finde the wind large enough.

In this way (kéeping well to Loofe∣warde) about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor, you shall find a Banke of 35.37. and 38. fadome déepe, which (by such as knewe it not) might bee taken for the ground of the land of China.

Being past this Banke, you find more depthes, but when after that the depthes begin to lessen, then looke to your selfe, for then most certainly you are by the land. When you sée the land of Sumbor, then in the night time you mus•• runne South Southwest, and by day make towardes the land, thereby at times to kéepe some∣what to Seaward from the land, thereby

to shun the cliffes called As duas Irmaas, or the two Sisters, which lie far inward to sea, as also the Island called do Babo∣xyn, which lieth crosse ouer against you, being distant from the firme land to Sea∣ward about foure or fiue miles, stretching Northwest and Southeast, you runne a∣long all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest, and somwhat Northeast and by North, and Southwest and by South: When you are past the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn, then runne the course aforesaide for the space of thrée or foure miles, and from thence West South∣west, whereby you shall come to the I∣sland of Chinchon, where you shall finde sand vpon the ground (which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find) with 18. or 20. fadome water.

From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shal hold your course Southwest, or as you thinke good, and when you are right against the Islandes or Cliffes called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, you shall find vpon the ground great sand with shelles, and from thence to Lamon, which is twelue miles, you finde the like: by the Island of Lamon you find shelles, and blacke sand, with oyster shels among it: if you chance to be in that countrey by night, runne not vnder 22. fadome wa∣ter, for that along by the riffes it hath 21. and 22. fadome with shels and blacke sand vpon the ground, and runne still South∣west, without leauing that course, and if it chance before day or by day to be close aire (running Southwest) and that you haue small thin white sand, then you are by Lamon, and then hold your course west Southwest, and so you shall goe right vp∣on the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco, and from thence runne West vn∣to the Channell, whereby you goe vp to Macau.

The 40. Chapter. Another voiage made from the Hauen of Langasaque to Macau, which is from Ia∣pon to China, with certaine descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Gu••to, with the description of the Hauens thereof, accomplished in the yeere of our Lord 1584. by a Portingale Pilot.

DEparting out of the Hauen of Lan∣gasaque the 25. of Februarie, Anno 1584.* 1.3 and passing along by the Island of Facunda, wee had a West Northwest wind, so that wée ankered: the 26. day it began to blowe so stiffe, that wee were constrained to put for harbour into To∣mache.

The 27. wée hoised anker, with an East Northeast, and an East winde, and cleare weather, and comming to the I∣sland dos Cauallos, we had a South wind againe, wherewith we made back againe to Facunda, from whence we set out.

The eight and twentie being Friday, wée set saile againe from Facunda, it bee∣ing thrée dayes before the newe Moone, with a cold East Northeast wind.

And beeing within thrée miles of the Island dos Cauallos, we had a Southeast wind, running on the Southwest bough all that day, and the winde began to bee somewhat coole, and then we gessed it to be thrée or foure miles beyond the Island of Guoto, but in the morning watch wee first espied the point of Guoto, being a ho∣uell lying on the Northwest part thereof, there we had a sharpe wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast, as much as the ship with all his Sayles might heare: wee let the maine saile vp, the better to make way, and not long af∣ter the winde came about to the South∣west, and West Southwest, with two thunder claps, and much lightning, wher∣with wee hoped it would haue beene still weather, but it was not so, whereat wee woondered.

On Saterday by day light wee were right ouer against the point of Guoto, al∣most vpon the end of the Island that ly∣eth Northwest, being about two myles from the lande, hauing with the West Northwest winde, a crosse storme, with the waues of the sea out of the southwest, which were verie hollowe and mightie high, which tossed the shippe mons••rou••ly, although the winde was ouer much, but onely the force and power of the waues troubled vs most, which fell behind at our sterne, for there wee found a very strong streame, and because the wind was slack, we doubted we should not get aboue the point of the Island, neither from the one side nor from the other, for wee had the crosse vpon the Island.

At the end of this Island we saw ano∣ther Island of low land, being about two miles long, and was about a mile and a

halfe distant from Guoto, some of our ship affirmed that there was a verie good Ha∣uen, running in on the one side and com∣ming out againe at the other: wherefore we determined to put in there for our bet∣ter securitie, as we did, and we ranne in West Northwest. At the entry there of it hath a verie great houell with two cliffes lying on the Southeast side of the point. The Island that lieth without, is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it, betweene which and the lande, it is all faire: you may boldly goe as néere the I∣sland of Guoto as you will, and néed feare nothing but what you see before you: The entry of the Hauen reacheth Northwest and Southeast, hauing within it a great Bay, which is all ouer verie déepe from twentie to thirtie fadome water, and no∣thing therein to be feared. From this I∣sland to the land you haue all ouer the depthes of thirtie and fortie fadome, and yet I haue tried it from the halfe way to Guoto, and found eightéene to thirtie fa∣dome, with sand and shels on the ground, in some places hauing good ground: in∣ward in some places you haue Sand, and in some places muddie ground: frō thence wée were brought out againe by Scutes about halfe a mile forward, so that after that the North wind serued well to saue vs, and to driue vs forward from the point lying on the South side, which hath cer∣taine stonie Cliffes, wée ranne along the land Northeastward, and it fell out well for vs, for therby we had twentie or thir∣tie Scutes of the Island, that for 20. taes Chi•••• money holpe vs well, and pulled out our beat: we likewise gaue them 50. taes, and about 20. depesas to haue our shippe ankered and stayed, but they asked vs 30••. whereupon we sent one of our Portingales on land, whome they helde for a p••w••e, although by certaine prac∣tise we got him out of their hands againe: and when after that wee séemed to com∣plaine, they cried vs mercie, and sent him backe againe, although wee vnderstoode verie well, that they were our friends by force, as perceiuing they had no meanes to hurt vs, because wee coulde helpe our selues without them: but we marked so much in them, that if they coulde haue hindered vs, they would not haue failed to doe it, or else wée must haue stopped their mouthes with money. There wée vnderstood that the Island of Guoto hath sixe or seuen Hauens that are very good, running from the one side to the other, but the Hauen aforesaid had no issue, but so much pleasure it did vs, that there we had the new Moone, which was the first of March, and the third day wee set sayle againe, it being Shroue Tuesday, with a North Northeast winde, and a verie cléere morning: and béeing out, wée helde our course Southwest, following on our course, wherewith wée sawe the Island Meaxuma and the Pannellas, or Pots, ly∣ing South Southeast from vs, wée tell right vpon the middle thereof. Those Panellas are two small stones, and Me∣axuma is an Island, and when you are Northeast and Southwest right ouer a∣gainst it, it sheweth like two or three I∣slands, wherof that on the Northeast side is long, and the greatest, and sheweth as if it had a Cliffe: This Island is the lon∣gest but not verie high, and that in the middle is small, hauing thrée sharp points like Organ pipes, with a Cliffe likewise lying Northeastward: The other Island on the Southwest side is round and plain stéepe lande shewing higher then all the other, and séemeth to haue Cliffes round about it. On the other side lie the Panel∣las a••oresaide, and although I said before they are but two stones, yet they are three, two standing togither, and the o∣ther somewhat further from them, and lie with the Island Meaxuma Northwest, and Southeast. From thence forward wee held our course to China and Macau, in such manner as I shewed in another place, and hereafter once againe I will declare.

The 41. Chapter. Another voiage made out of the Hauen of Langasaque from the Island of Ia∣pon to Macau in China, in the Santacrus the Gunner being Diricke Geri••son of Enckehus••n in Ann. 1586.

THE 20. of March we departed out of the Ha∣uen of Langasaque, it being the first day of the newe Moone, vpon a Thursday with a north∣east and North Northeast winde, and by nine of the clocke in the morning, wée were as farre as the Island dos Ca∣uallos,

running West Southwest, and being two myles beyond the Island Dos Cauallos, wee had a calme, and then the wind came Northwest, in such sort, that wee ranne Southwest, and Southwest and by west, and sometimes halfe a strike with a slacke winde. The next day in the morning we saw the Islands of Corequyn and Guoto, and about eight of the clock in the forenoone, we saw the Island Meaxu∣m••, so that we sawe those three Islands all at once, and about twilight, we were east Southeast, and West Southwest, with the Island of Meaxuma, and so helde our course Southwest, hauing a hard North∣east wind with raine, the aire being ve∣ry darke and close, yet the Rackes came out of the Southwest: Vpon Sunday we cast out the Leade, and found somewhat more then forty fadome water, muddye ground, and was about forty myles from Meaxuma. This depth is a banke lying in the middle way betwéene the Island Me∣axuma and Cabo de Su••••bor, in the firme land of China.

Vpon munday the foure and twentith day wée tooke not the height of the sunne, because we saw it not, hauing so small a winde, that the ship might stéere vpright, and because we made little way, wee cast out the lead, and found forty fadome mud∣dy ground, this was at noone, and at night about sunne setting we cast it out againe, and foun•• fiue and fifty fadome, whereby we perceiued that wee began to passe ouer a banke, at that time we had all one wind being Northeast, and North North-east, with a good blast, and yet the clouds came South-west, and South South-west, so strong that they put vs in feare, doubting the wind would be there, but we had cer∣taine men in our shippe that had seene and found it so in that place, and yet no altera∣tion, whereby they put vs in some com∣fort, in such sort, that wee followed on our course with that wind. Vpon Tuesday at noone, wée tooke the height of the Sunne not full nine and twenty degrées, hauing not long before as I gessed, marked one point in the Card, and estéemed that wee had sayled a hundred myles from the Hauen of ••angasaque, but by the Sunne it was not so.

The sixe and twenty being Wednes∣day, wee tooke not the heigth of the sunne, because it was a close day, but wee had a good Northeast wind, and made good way, so that wee seemed to make thirtie myles ••n one mealetide, but I made account but of fiue and twenty myles, because wee thought the ship sailed not ouer fast, that day we sawe many Cuttle bones driuing vpon the water, & held our course South∣west till morning, and because the winde beganne to bee stiffe, I thought it good to make towards the land to know it, there∣fore as day appeared wee ran West till it was euening without knowing Land, by reason of the mistine••••e of the aire, but by the depths & our gessing, wee thought wee were about 5 or 6 miles from the land, our depth was 37 fadome, and being towards night with cloudy weather, we ran south∣west, and southwest and by south, all that night, and when day came being thursday wee gessed to bee ouer against the Laga••to or Crocodille (a cliffe so called about fiue or sixe miles to Seaward from it, but wee found it to be somewhat more.

Thursday being the seuen and twenty, as soone as day appeared, we ran••e West towards the Land, and about foure of the clocke in the afternoone, we saw the land, being the Islands Dos Camaro••s that is, the Islands of Granata) those Islan••s are not too high: as soone as we saw them, wee helde our course South Southwest▪ and hauing sailed a little way, we saw another round Island called Ilha do B••box••••, which lay right before vs, as soone as wee saw it, we presently ran South to shun it, because we were not aboue a quarter of a mile from it, there wee found so strong a streame and course of water which ranne with vs, that in short time we were two or three myles from the aforesaid Island, in such manner, that all that night wee ranne South, and South and by West, and South Southwest, and when the moone rose, we held our course southwest.

The eight and twenty being Friday, about morning we began to runne West Southwest, west, and west and by South, and at noon or thereabouts, we cast out the Lead, and found nine and twenty fadome muddy ground, and running so with that course for a little time, we saw land, but it was so close and misty, that we could not know it, but about two or three of y^e clock in the afternoone it began to cleare vp, and then we knew it to be the Island of Chin∣chon being North from vs, and there wee cast out the Lead, and found nineteene fa∣dome water sandy ground, and not long after we sawe the whole coast and firme Land of China, and so we ran all night at

the depths of ninetéene, twenty, and two and twenty fadome with so clear & bright a sky, that almost all the night we saw the coast, and when day began to appear, we were somwhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo, and presently thervpon we saw the Island of Lamon, there we beganne to haue certain stormes, as I gesse it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, to the Island of Lamon ten miles, by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shynne and burne to Seaward, in such sort, that wee passed close by the Riffe: those that come from Iapon, must first passe by the Island, and then by the Riffe, this Riffe lieth Northeast, & south∣west, and is dangerous, for those that saile from Macau to Iapon, we ran about thrée miles from it with a strong northeast, and East Northeast winde, so that wee made good way, whereby it séemed we made fif∣ty miles in one meale tide, but the strēgth of y^e water and streames against vs were so stiffe, that we sailed but fiue and twen∣ty myles in a mealetide. This strong streame and stiffe water commeth (as we were informed) out of the Riuer of Tan∣coan, and continueth till you be past the Island Branco, & being past it, the streame runneth presently towards the Island Il∣ha de Leme, which lyeth close by Macau, from Lamon we ran West southwest, and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco, very short, for by night wee stroke all our sayles, and so lay driuing without sailes, winding Southwest, al∣waies at the depths of fiue and twentie and six and twenty fadome water, and at the midnight watch, we began to hoise vp our maine saile and our foukesaile, in that manner running West to get to twenty fadome deepe, which is the middle of the chanell where we must passe through, and in the morning we saw the Island Do Le∣me, (that is the Island of the harquebush) lying somwhat on y^e lareboord of vs. This Island Do Leme, if you go east and West vpon it, séemeth very small, and the déeper you are within the channell, the bigger it sheweth, in the entry wherof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffes, and from thence forward, the Islands begin to lye on a rowe till you come to Macau, as I said in another place.

The 42. chapter. An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in Iapon, to the coast of China, & the hauen of Ma∣cau, with all the courses, situations, and stretchings of the same, done by a Portin∣gale Pilote.

HE that desireth to saile from the Island Firando, to Macau or Can∣ton in China, as soone as he is out of the hauen of Firando, if he hath time inough to get to the Island Guoto, he must presently saile forward, if not, hée must anker about a mile from Firando, at 28 fadome déepe, where hee may prepare himself, and make fast his boat, y^t the next day in the morning he may set saile.

As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course, you must runne along by the land of Firando, till you bee at the end thereof, and as you run south west, vntil you be by the land, you shal hold som∣what néerer south-west, and then on your West side there will bee 3. or 4. Islands, and passing by the formost of them south∣ward, you shall presently sée the channell that runneth betwéen that Island and the Island Guoto, and through it you must passe. By this channel there lieth another Island, betwéen the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise passe: when you are through and out of this Channell, and that the Islands westward from you, then you must runne along by Guoto vntil you are past it to seaward, so to kéepe on & fur∣ther your course: and if in passing through the channel, the wind chanceth to be still, you may boldly anker therein, close by the land of Guoto. In this Island Guoto are very good Hauens, which passe through and through againe, therfore it is not one Island, but deuided into foure parts. Whē you are two myles from Guoto, you must hold your course West Southwest, vntill you are past the two Islands, one called Xuma, y^e other Meaxuma, which are eight myles distant from the Island of Guoto. Being past those Islands, you must run Southwest, & néerer south from the afore∣said Islands, there is another Island cal∣led Meaxuma, which you must likewise passe by: by those Islands aforesaid, it is all faire way without any trouble, neither yet by the Island, this Island lyeth vnder 31 degrées and 1/••. You must run betwéene the Island, and the smal Islands, and whē you are past them & the Island of Guoto, then you must runne Southwest, & south∣west and to south.

When you are past this and the other Islands, running southwest as aforesaid, you shal goe right vpon the point of Cabo

de Sumbor, which lieth on y^e coast of China vnder 28 degrées & ••/••. and if it be clear wea∣ther, & y^t you there desire to know the land, you may well doe it, if not, then put not too neer the coast, because of the many Islands that lie all along by it, for you must runne outward from it, alwaies kéeping as far from it, as you thinke néedefull, that you may be frée from it, and by night not to put in betwéene it, for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon, is nothing but Islands. You must likewise sée, that you put not too farre inward to Sea to kéepe close to the winds that blowe off the Land, and to Sea-ward you haue the I∣slands of small Lequeo, called Lequeo Pe∣queno, and the Island of fishers, which are distant from the Firme land about twen∣ty miles: if you haue a cléere night, you may well passe along by the Islands, yet with great foresight. The most daunge∣rous Island vpon that coast, is the Island of Camaroyns, which lyeth to Sea-ward out from all the rest: I haue passed twice betwéene it and the Land, it is an Island that is deuided in two partes, by a rent or breach that is in it. Foure myles forward beyond this Island, lyeth a small Island which is flat and euen with the Sea, ha∣uing certain stones lying Northeastward from it, but not many. If you chaunce to passe by it in the night time, you must bee carefull to auoid it, for it is flat and little without any trées, you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn, which likewise lieth outward into the Sea, in such sort, that when you fall vpon it with good ad∣uise and warely, you may fréely passe by it, for you néede feare nothing then what you see before you.

And when you are fiftéene myles from Cabo de Sumbor, accounting from y^e point of the firm land, and not from the Islands lying by it, thē you must hold your course Southwest, and so run without all the I∣slands, whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island Lequeo Pequeno, also y^e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pe∣queno, or before, if it so fall out, you must seeke to know the land, for it is necessary for you to see it, because of the Island La∣mon, as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward. You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest, and somewhat northeast and by North, and Southwest and by South, but not much.

And when you are right ouer against Chinchon, and that by marking the land, or by the heigth of the sunne you know it, being foure miles from the land, you must hold your course southwest, so to go with∣out the Island of Lamon, and if you desire to passe within the Islands, you may well do it, for it is faire ynough, and you néede feare nothing: But if you feare to m••e Lamon, then it is better to runne as a∣foresaid, for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon, which is very dangerous. There you must haue great foresight, for when you are past Lamon, then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton. The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon, are called, Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo, that is, the I∣slands of Ruy Lobo, from the which, that which lyeth Northeast is the smal∣lest, the other being somewhat greater: Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bu∣shes, from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles, on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y^e ground, from thence you shal run southwest, and holde a little southwest and by South, and if it be in the day time, you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of La∣mon, from whence the said Riffe hath his issue, reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course, you shal make good way, but if it be night, you must looke well to your selfe.

And running the aforesaid course of Southwest, you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon, and doe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉〈…〉 ••∣sently make towards the 〈…〉〈…〉 passe along by it. From 〈…〉〈…〉 15 miles from thence the co•• of 〈…〉〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest, and from thence East Northeast, and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Branco, which lyeth distant from the co••st about fiue miles, vnder 22 degrees and ••. right ouer against the creeke of Fu••••da de Bona Ventura, that is, the creeke of good fortune, you may passe close by the Island Branco, both on the sea side, as you thinke best, and being past that Island, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe: From this Island Branco to the Island De San∣choan▪ are fifty miles.

When you are past Ilha Branco, then you must runne west Southwest, & from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie

miles, that is twelue miles before you en∣ter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands: and twelue miles from thence to Macau, you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find, by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands, which will be on the Northeast side of you, and on the Southside it hath two Islands, whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground, on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe, and being ouer against those high bare I∣slands, on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell, which I neuer passed: but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord, and so running Southwest, you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through, & although it sheweth narrow, notwithstanding it is very good, for I haue run into it by night: you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you, and runne in with the flood west, west and by north, and west Northwest, and so you shall go right to Macau, also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe.

And when you come from Iapon, right ouer against the cape De Sumbor, being fiftéen miles to seaward from it, then cast out your lead, and you shall find fortie and fiue & fortie fadome water muddy ground, with many streames of foule water, and when you sée the land, then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon, which lie eight miles into the sea, where∣by you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags, which the fisher∣men of that Countrey haue set vp for markes. From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles.

Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them, lieth a town called Guara, from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land, and to know the Somes, (which are Chinish car∣nels and Barkes) vsed in those countries, they beare but one saile. Now to make to∣ward the Lande as you would, you must runne West, you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon (that is, the banke or marke of Chinchon) is a high Lande, lying along by the entry of Chin∣chon, on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest, stéeping downe∣ward, reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea: along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it, from the which runneth a riffe of sand, at lowe water being two fadome déepe, reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece, towards y^e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry, which in length reacheth East and West, in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill, and South∣westward the aforesaid land of Laylo run∣neth very lowe, being there, then you are close by it, and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point, and anker at four fadome muddy ground: on the Northeast side lie certain Islands, close by the Point of Laylo, and two miles to Seaward from it, you haue twenty fadome water, y^e wa∣ter of that country being very blew: from thence to Lamon, 3. or 4. miles from the land, you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome, and being past Chinchon to∣wards Lamon, You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels, & being right ouer against Chinchon, or towards the northeast, pou shal find muddy ground, with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome, and right ouer against Lamon, you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground.

The 43. Chapter. How you shall runne in, out, and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau, with all the markes, signes, and tokens thereof, so to saile into the Hauen of Macau.

IF you desire to saile out of Macau, you must vnderstand, y^t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie, which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies, you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil, and present∣ly after towards the East, you haue two houels, which with the Hill of the white vlacke make thrée.

The second houell which lyeth in the middle, is bare & wholly discouered, appea∣ring through the rocks & cliffes y^t lie vpon the top of y^e field called Dos Pa••anas, which is in the middle of the chanel, being by the last houses of the town: and when you are right against y^e aforesaid houses, then you shal presently discouer the 3. houel, so that when you are right against y^e sandy point (lying close by y^e Varella) called Dos Man∣dorins, then the said houel is almost whol∣ly vncouered, where you shall find four fa∣dome and a halfe déepe, with a full sea of a Spring tide, and as soone as you are past the sandy Point, then you beginne to find

more depths, that is fiue and fiue fadome and a halfe, and running in that sort, you shall go right vpon a broken land lying on the other side ouer against the Island cal∣led Ilha do Bugio, that is, the Island of sea Cats.

When you are at the depths aforesaid, then southward from you, you shall sée an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz, which within it hath a hil on the east side, which sheweth like an Island or Cliffe, and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out, and when those two Points are right ouer against each other, thē you are in the middle of the channell, and you must be carefull to sée y^t they lye one right against the other, for by that marke you shall runne in the déepest and best place, which is at 27 Spannes of water, with a spring tide, as I haue found it, in the time of the Monson, when you saile to Iapon, hauing an East winde, for with a North wind, you haue lesse water there.

Now to know when you are as farre as the banke, you must vnderstande, that Northward towards the Island Do Bu∣gio, there lyeth a stony cliffe, which shew∣eth like a houell, which lieth most North∣ward of all the rest, & along by the strand it hath a clouen Rocke with two Points, when you haue the aforesaid stony Cliffe like a houell, right ouer against the mid∣dle of the aforesaid clouen rocke, then you are vpon the aforesaid banke, and when the aforesaid marke standeth vneuen, on the one or other side, then you shall pre∣sently find more depths, which shall bee thus, that as you run Southeast right vp∣on the thickest and greatest land, on the o∣ther side vntill you be at foure and fiue fa∣dome water, which is the point called Va∣rella, and desiring to passe through the east channell, then you must runne Southeast and East Southeast, vntill you haue dis∣couered the Island Do Lastro, wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio, then it is not good for you to runne more southward to shun the stone lying right ouer against the Varella, and when you haue discoue∣red the Island Do Lastro as I said before, then you must runne along by the afore∣said stone about two cables length from it there you shall haue the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spannes of water with a spring tide: and to know when you are néerest the stone, it is whē you haue whol∣ly discouered the first cliffe of two that lye on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro, and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone, at the depth aforesaid, and when you haue wholly discouered the second Cliffe, then you are beyond the stone, you may likewise know it by ano∣ther marke, which is a white vlacke stan∣ding vpon the Hill which you see ouer the Towne, and hath a stone which sheweth like a mans head.

When you bring the aforesaid white vlacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don Ioan d Almeyda, then you are right ouer against the aforesaid stone, and whē you are past it, it is good to make towards the land on the Southside, in such sort, that you leaue the two third parts thereof on the side of the town, and one third part on the Southside, and running in that sort, you shall haue more depths then in the middle way, vntill you be vpon the banke which hath no more then sixe and twenty Spannes Water, with high Water of a spring tide. And desiring to knowe when you begin to be right against it, it is when you haue the crosse part or dore of y^e great church, right against the toppe of a house, that standeth on the strand, which com∣meth vpon the same way of the same dore right to the strand, so that y^e dore is wholly discouered, there you haue seuen & twen∣ty or eight and twenty Spannes water, which shall bee when you sée or discouer the clocke house or top of S. Paules church, with a hill that standeth behind the same church, and as soone as the said clockhouse is couered, then you shall presently finde more depths, as two and thirtie spannes water, which is foure fadome, which is right ouer against the place where you fetch fresh Water: and going somewhat further forward, you shall finde foure fa∣dome and a halfe & fiue fadome at a spring tide, this was the Road where the shippe called S. Crus, of the burthen of fourteene or sixtéene tunnes did anker, and when the said ship did wind with an ebbe, then the Island Do Lastro lay vncouered, although it was a good way from the Land. You haue a very good token or marke to know when the land on the Southside is neerest to you, then you must make to the Island Do Lastro, and Northward from it, there is two cliffes, and when those two cliffes are one against the other then you are in the déepest of the channell, vntill you bee ouer the banke.

The 44. Chapter. Of the course and streames of the water in the way from Malacca, in the time of the Monson, when they ordinarily trauell thether.

FRom the Island Pulo Catao (ly∣ing on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia) to the Varella, (which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao, towards Ma∣lacca, in y^e same coast of Champa or Cam∣boia) y^e streames run very strong towards the south: from the Island Pulo Catao fiue miles forward, y^e streams run very strong towards the Island Champello, and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina.

And in the monson of China, when you saile from Mallacca, in the months of Oc∣tober, Nouember, and December, thē the streames in that part run Northwest.

And from the Month of Ianuary for∣ward, they run southwest, that is, towards the sands: therfore such as trauel that way must obserue certain times, and that with good aduise, and as they begin to goe néere the country where the sands lie, (that are right against the coast of Champa) be∣twéene them and the entery of the coast, the streames run as swiftly into the south as a stone slyeth out of a mans hand.

But I aduise you not to goe so néere the Island Aynao, that you may sée it, vn∣lesse it be with a Northwind, for with an East wind you would be in great danger.

The 45. Chapter. Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca.

IN the entry of the Hauen of Pa∣tane, (lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca) to the Island of Bintao, (which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoc∣tiall line) the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December.

From the Island Pulo Condor (lying right against the hauen and land of Cam∣boia) to the Island Pulo Timao) lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca, at such time as you come frō China) holding your course halfe a strike from the south) the streams run towards the Island Bor∣neo, and being halfe a strike Southwest∣ward, then the streames run towards the coast of Pan, which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca.

From Pulo Condor, to the Island Pulo Sesir (lying right against the coast of Cam∣boia) the streames run Eastward, and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China, the streames runne to the coast of Champa, and from the Falce Varella (which is di∣stant from the right Varella fiftéen miles, lying on the coast of Camboia) y^e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast, which is at the end of Iu∣ly, and in the month of August.

In the Monson of the South windes, when you saile from Mallacca to China, the streames (from the Gulfe of Pulo Ca∣tao▪ and the Island Aynao) runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina, vntill the last of December, and from Ianuary forward, then the streams (in that Gulfe and countrey) runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa, in Camboia) from the other side, and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward, the stronger they run towards the sands.

In the Monson of China, when you saile from China to Mallacca, then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao, to y^e Island Puto Cambir, both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa.

It happeneth oftentimes, that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea, and then you haue the Terreinhos, which are Windes blowing from the land, out of the West and north∣west, and the Viracoins, which are winds that come from the Sea, out of the East, Southeast, and east Northeast, & being in the North, they presently change into the south, whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come a∣gain, and thus they hold about two miles from the coast, and not further, for they are winds that do only blow vpon y^e coast, as in other places it is already sufficiently declared, in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins.

When you saile by the Island of Le∣queo Pequeno, or small Lequeo, towards the land of Bungo, in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run east∣ward to the Island of Tanaxuma.

From 30 degrées Northward, a little further thē to the middle way to Iapon, the streames (from that country to the coast of China) run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn, in the monson of the south and southwest winds.

In this monson of South and South∣west winds, the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo (lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China) run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao.

The 46. Chapter. Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone, in the hauē of Macau in China, with the height of the same Hauen, found by experience of an expert Pilot.

THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China, within the hauen of Macau, it be∣ing Full Moone, and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the mor∣ning, which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone.

* 1.4The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne, which as then was about 13. degrées from the line, and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées, & 1/••. and as then I like∣wise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock, the moone being thrée daies old, in such sort, that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2/••. in the morning, which I also tried by the new Moone.

* 1.5The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau, it being then full moone, and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone.

* 1.6The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau, & found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at no••ne, the moone being foure dayes old, so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning, béeing new moone: but these Tides of China fall not out iustly, vnlesse it be foure daies be∣fore and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone, for then there is as much wa∣ter as vpon the third day, which I affirme to be most true, because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so. The cause is, for that before it, it is all Islands and Channels, so that when the waters be∣ginne to fall, they ebbe not aboue thrée houres, but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course.

The 47. Chapter. Of the signes and tokens of the tides, wa∣ters, and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon.

IN the time of the monson of the South and South∣west windes, it is most cer∣taine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon, that when the winds of the monson blow, and from thence run into the East, that they turne not againe out of the East into the south, but from thence into the North: and ha∣uing continued there for a certaine time, they turne againe into the east, and from thence into the South, & if it be a North∣east wind, then it turneth often times in∣to the Southwest, and not into the East, but not often, but the surest is as afore∣said. It changeth also often times from North to South, and not into the East, which is very common, and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carna∣tion cloudes about it, and that many beames issueth from the Sunne, in such manner, that it séemeth to blaze, then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests. Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone, if it sheweth in the like ma∣ner, it is a signe of stormes and tempests.

When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere, that you may in a manner sée into it, and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof, then it signifieth good weather, The like doth it signifie in the setting of the Sunne: and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead cou∣ler, and so darke that you may sée it round about, not casting forth any beames, it signifieth calme weather: The like doth the Moone.

In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe, and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red, then it signifieth North winds, when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cot∣ton, being about a finger long, then it sig∣nifieth tempests and foule weather: This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake, wherof there are many in y^e place.

In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the mon∣son running from one place to the other, till in the end they be northeast, then it is certain it will be tempest & foule weather.

If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor, in the manson of the South and Southwest winds, you find an East winde with great heate, and same great droppes of water, it signifieth foule wea∣ther.

The 48. Chapter. In what dayes and moneths you find tem∣pests and foule weather in the coast of China.

FRom the seuenth to the ele∣uenth of Iune, often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests. From the begin∣ning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth, you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule wea∣ther, for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather, the wind neuer staying in one place, but running round about the compasse. From the 12. of August for∣ward, in the whole Moone of September to the end of October, all that time there is continually foule weather.

The 49. Chapter. Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China.

THe whole moneth of Iune (except it be from the seuenth to the ele∣uenth day) there is very litle soule weather, for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid, you haue the windes of the monson, with faire and cléere wea∣ther without stormes, to saile from the I∣sland Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes: you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly, and saile till the 12. of August, and all that time you are without tempests. In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo, you haue alwaies West windes, which blowe in Iapon in the mo∣neths of Nouember and December.

The 50. Chapter. A briefe description of the course from Ma∣cau in China, to Noua Spaigna, with the sci∣tuations of the countries.

PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau, then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may, and hauing a contrarie winde, runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course, but if the winde be scant, whereby you may not holde your course Northeast, or Northeast and by North, then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth, that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies, for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward. This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you, vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land; and being there, you must run 200. or more miles beyond Ia∣pon, and although you holde your course North, yet you néed not feare any thing, kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West, for it might hinder you much, run∣ning as often as you can Southeast, or to Loofeward, as also not leauing y^e course of Northeast, as often as you can, vntill you be vnder the height. In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds, which, is a signe that you are farre to Seaward, and if you sée them about euening, & that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes, then looke to your selfe, for it signi∣fieth foule weather: When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land, then you shall loose the sight of those birdes, and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights, and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water, which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea, then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward, till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées, and as then knowing the land, which will lie hard by: whē you see it first, you must runne without it, and beware you run not vpon the Island cal∣led Ilha de Sedros, that is, the Island of Cedar trées, and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse, for the I∣sland of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas, béeing verie false in the course, because the land (if it lay by it) doth come more and likelier out, then it doth tow∣ardes the South. The Cape of Saint Lucas, is a high land, and sheweth (when you are hard by it) as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it, the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke, the Land thereof presently running inwards tow∣ards the North, and if you néed fresh wa∣ter, within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas, there is a great sandie strande, where you haue a verie good Rode to an∣ker,

where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water. From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side, vpon the Southeast bough, without the Marias, which is a better course then inward: all the coast is faire and good, so that you may well runne along by it, vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad, where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima, the marks wher∣of are those: On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward, if you be forced to put into it, you must vn∣derstand, that it hath a great mouth or en∣trie aboue two or thrée miles wide, wher∣in you haue no cause to feare any thing, but that you sée before your eies: you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point, where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea, where you shall find Spanish Fishermen: if you desire to saile further, you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore, for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land, that is, to the Hauen cal∣led El Puerto del Marques, which a farre off sheweth like an Island, but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land, then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones, which shewe like white Runderen, that goe in the way, you may fréely runne to∣wardes it, till you begin to sée the mouth therof, and then put into it. This in briefe in my opinion, is the best course that you may bold in this voiage, which I would likewise haue holden if I had gone tho∣rough with the voiage.

The 51. Chapter. A true description of the course from the Islands of Los Lucones, or to the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine, and how you should saile thither from Macau in China, with a note of the commodities and pro∣fits made by the wares and merchandi∣ses of China, with the scituation, course, times, and miles of the same countries: all particularly set downe for such as de∣sire to trauell into those countries.

YOu shall put out of the Hauen of Manilla lying in the Island of Lucones, vnder 14. degrées & ½. on the North side of the Equinoctial line, the mouth being Southwest, in the mo∣neths of Iune and Iuly, as wind & wea∣ther serueth to put out, running along the coast of the same Island and betwéene the Island of Mindoro, or by the East point, vntill you be out of the Channell (where you enter when you come out of the sea, lying 100. miles from Manilla vnder 13. degrées and 1/••.) betwéene the last and the furthest point of the same Island of Luco∣nes and the point of another Island called Tandaya, betwéene the which the afore∣said channell doth runne: and when you are out of the Channell, you must runne Eastward as long as the winde serueth: which course you shall alwaies hold, vn∣lesse the wind let you, because you depart vnder 13. degrées and ⅓. sailing to the ha∣uen of Acapulco, lying vnder 17. degrées, but because the winde in those countries in Summer (which is the time that men set saile as aforesaid) is very slacke, al∣though it be the monson, in such manner, that when it beginneth to rise, you may not hold your course Eastward, & as long as the winde is not Southeast, you must still runne Northeast as long as you can, but when it is East Southeast, and East, then you must wind Southward, till the wind serueth to runne Northeast: in this manner you saile 1700. miles, to the coast of the countrey of Noua Spaigna, still kée∣ping to seaward from the Island of Iapon as much as possibly you can, because that certaine shippes that went late to Saile (passing close by Iapon) had stormie wea∣ther, and saw the Island called A Ilha do Fogo, that is, the fiery Island, one of them putting into the Hauen of Xaxuma in the Island of Iapon, there to sane it selfe, as it did: therefore such as kéepe 100. miles to Seaward from it, holde a good course, for that running farre to Loofeward from those Islandes, you fall vpon the coast of new Spaine vnder small heights, but whē you fall on the coast vnder 35. degrées, there you hold a good course, but when you come to it vnder 38. and 40. degrées, which is the furthest lande that is discouered or knowne (called El Cabo de Mendosino) you shall haue great labour and paine, be∣cause that there you begin to haue high and hollowe waues, by reason winter is at hand, as also because the shippes com∣ming from the Island of Lucones, are but easily prouided of their necessaries.

When you sée the coast and lande of Noua Spaigna, then you beginne to haue Northwest winds, which from thence is

a right fore winde, because you runne al∣most all along that coast, although in some places you kéepe somewhat further off, because of the créekes that are there∣in, you runne along by the coast, which is all faire and cléere till you come to the Hauen of Acapulco, which is sixe or seuen hundred miles.

And if you desire to saile thither from Macau in China, you must be ready to set saile as soone as the winde is Southwest, to put out with the coniunction of the Moone in the moneths of Iune and Iuly, holding your course towards the furthest point or hooke of the Island of Lucones, ly∣ing vnder 20. degrées, called Cabo de Bo∣••ador, which is nintie miles from the Ha∣uen of Macau.

From the Islands called Ilhas dos Ba∣boranes (lying by the coast of the same land and Cape de Boiadar) to the Island of Ca••agon, that is, (the Island of the Ket∣tle) you runne East and West, and when you are past those Islands, running be∣twéene them, then you must holde your course as you did from the Hauen of Ma∣nilla as aforesaide, alwaies keeping it as much as wind and weather will permit, which is the way the Spaniards doe now meane to saile, running to the Islands of Maluco, and from thence crosse ouer to Noua Spaigna, which is the same course that Franciscus Gualle (Captaine and Pi∣lot of the shippe that came out of Noua Spaigna into the Hauen of Macau) helde: from whence hee departed againe the 25. of Iuly with a Southwest wind, in the time and coniunction of a full moone, with whome at the same time departed the shippe of Ayres Gonsalu••s de Miranda, which captaine Gualle is said not to haue beene longer in his voiage then thrée mo∣neths and a halfe to the coast, and from thence a moneth and a halfe more to the Hauen of Acapulco, and another shippe that the same yéere set saile from Manilla, was betweene eight and nine moneths at sea, and in the end arriued in the Hauen of Acapulco, all then being almost dead a•• the ships in manner spoiled, and an∣other shippe was but fiue moneths on the way, but the ordinary voiage is about sixe moneths, little more or lesse. The reason why it is better sailing from Macau then from Manilla, is, because there you haue no hinderances nor lets, but you may pre∣sently hold on your course as you are for the space of 10••. miles frō Manilla along through the chanell, till you be out, wher∣by some shippes haue consumed so much time, that it was the cause that some of them were cōstrained to put back againe, and could not performe their voiage: but being in the mouth or issue of the channell aforesaid, then it is a better voiage then from Macau, because it lieth 150. miles further to Loofewarde, if it had not the o∣ther hindrance of comming out, as I said before.

When the ships saile from Noua Spaig∣na to Manilla or Macau, then they set saile in Lent, alwaies sailing with a forewind, with the windes called Brisas, which are East and East Northeast winds, which doe blowe there with the monson of the time, and it chanceth often times that ma∣ny of them saile 50. or 6••. daies togither without striking any of the sailes, still hauing a full wind, neuer seeing any land nor till this day euer any ship was cast a∣way in those countries.

The shippe wherewith you will make this voiage must be very good to saile in a wind, as also very well prouided of all ne∣cessaries, specially a Spanish Pilot and 12. Saylors, (because that through all the coasts of the Orientall Indies, they vse Indian Saylors, as Arabians and such like, that are not vsed nor can not skill of other voiages, and would be verie farre to sa•••••• if they should be led a new course) among the which it were good to haue some Spa∣niards (such as haue sailed that way) to know the land, which you shall alwa•••• find at Macau, if you find them no•• in ••••∣dia. For other necessaries concerning to shippe, you shall finde of all things suffici∣ent in China.

The gaines and profits of all sortes of wares of China are verie great, except rawe silke, whereby they haue verie lit∣tle gaine, for there they rather desire it readie spunne: and although there should bee much solde there, yet that were no reason or cause why they should carrie much thither, because it should not hin∣der the voiage and trafficke of them of Iapon into the East Indies, for there are many other kindes of wares great store to carrie thither, wherein there is much more profit then in silke.

Of the common wares and merchan∣dises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas doe buy, (and yet they buy them much d••••er there then they should buy them in China) in newe

Spaine, they gaine but sixe for one, and in Peru ten for one, whereof they are sure, for that the Portingales that haue gone from hence thither, in the ship that came hither haue gained so much by the wares they carried with them, that the time that they stayed for their returne, séemed to them a thousand yéeres: and as they re∣po••t, the Viceroy of Noua Spaigna and all the other gouernours and gentlemen of the countrie, haue a great desire to vse the trade, and doe much looke after it.

Many are of opinion, that to saile that way to Peru, it would be a longer voiage, for that when you are at Acapulco, you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long, from Acapulco to the Hauen of Callande Lyma, which is the Metropolitane Cittie of Peru, lying vnder ten degrées on the South side of the Equinoctiall, and you should make your voiage in the same yeere: and further it is a countrey of great charges and expen∣ces, whereby you should loose and spend all that you should gaine, more in that countrey then in new Spaine, because the countrey of newe Spaine is more aboun∣dant in all kinde of necessaries & victuals then Peru, and therefore your charges is lesse.

The 52. Chapter. The true and perfect description of a voiage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captaine and Pilot, for the Viceroy of new Spaine, from the Ha∣uen of Acapulco in new Spaine, to the I∣slands of Iu••ones or Phillippinas, in the Hauen of Manilla, and from thence to the Hauen of Macau in China, and from Macau backe againe to Acapulco, ac∣complished in the yeere of our Lorde 1584.

THe tenth of March in the yéere of our Lord 1582. wée set saile out of the Hauen of Acapulco, lying in the country of new Spaine, directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Phi∣lippinas West Southwest,* 1.7 running in that manner for the space of 25. miles, till wee came vnder 16. degrees, that so wée might shun the calmes by sailing close by the shore. From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles, and being there, we ranne West, & West and by South, for the space of 1800. miles, to the Island called Ilha d'Engano, which is the furthest Island lying in the South partes of the Islands called de los Ladro∣nes, that is, the Islands of Rouers, or Islas de las Vellas, vnder 13. degrées and ½. in latitude Septentrional, and 164. degrées in longitude Oriental, vpon the fixed Me∣ridional line, which lieth right with the Island of Tercera. From thence wée held our course westward for the space of 280. miles, till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo, that is, the point of the Holy Ghost, lying in the Island Tan∣daya, the first Islād of those that are called Philippinas, Lucones, or Manillas, which is a cuntry with few hils, with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof. From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteene miles to the point or entrie of the channell, which runneth in betwéene that Island and the Island of Lucon. This point or entrie lieth scarse vnder 12. degrées. All the coast that stret∣cheth from the entry of the chanell to the point El capo del Spirito Santo, is not very faire.

Eight miles from the said point ly∣eth a Hauen of indifferent greatnes, cal∣led Bahya de Louos, that is, the Baye of Wolues, hauing a small Island in the mouth thereof: and within the Channell about halfe a mile from the end of the said Island, lyeth an Island or Cliffe, & when you passe by the point in the middle of the channell, then you haue 25. fadome déepe, with browne Sand: there we found so great a streame running westward, that it made the water cast a skum as if it had béene a sand, whereby it put vs in feare, but casting out our Lead, we found 25. fa∣dome déepe.

From the aforesaid entrie of the chan∣nell North, and North and by East, about ten miles, lyeth the Island of Catandua∣nes, about a mile distant from the land of Lucon, on the furthest point Eastward, and from the same entrie of the channell towards the West and Southwest, lyeth the Island Capuli about sixe miles from thence, stretching West Southwest, and East Northeast, beeing fiue miles long and foure miles broad, and as wée past by it, it lay Northward from vs, vnder 12. degrées and ¼. and somewhat high lande. Foure miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward, lyeth the thrée

Islands of the Hauen of Bollon in the I∣sland of Lucones, stretching North and South about foure miles, distant from the firme land about halfe a mile, whereof the furthest Southward, lyeth vnder 13. degrées: In this channell it is twentie fadome deepe, with white Sand, and a great streame, running Southeast, wee passed through the middle of the channell. From this Channell wée held our course Southwest, and Southwest and by West, for the space of twentie miles, vn∣till wee came to the West end of the I∣sland of Tycao, which reacheth East and West 13. miles. This point or hooke lieth vnder 12. degrees and 3/••. In the mid∣dle betweene this Island and the Island Capuli there lyeth three Islands called the Faranias, and we ranne in the same course on the North side of all the Islands, at the depth of 22. fadome with white sand.

From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Barya••, it is East and West to saile about the length of a mile, or a mile and a halfe, we put in∣to that channell, helding our course south and south and by west about three miles, vntill we were out of the channell at six∣teene fadome deepe, with halfe white and re••••sh sande in the Channell, and at the month thereof, whereof the middle lyeth vnder 12. degrees and ••. and there the s••reames runne Northward.

The Island of Bayas stretcheth north∣west and Southeast, and is lowe land, whereof the Northwest point is about three mi••es from the coast of Lucon, but you can not passe between them with any P••ppe but with small Foists and Barks of the countrey. This shal••ow Channell lieth vnder 12. degrees, and running tho∣rough the aforesaid channell between the Islands Tycao and Bu••yas, as I said be∣fore, we sailed Southward about 2. miles from the Island of Masbate, which stret∣cheth East and West eight miles long, being in breadth foure miles, and lieth vn∣der 12. degrees and 1/••. in the middle thereof, and is somewhat high land.

From the said channell betwéene Ty∣cao and Buryas, we held our course West Northwest for thirteene miles, leauing the Island Masbate on the South side, and the Island Buryas on the North side, at the end of thirteene miles we came by an Island called Banton, which is in forme like a Hat, vnder 12. degrees and ⅔. when we had sailed the aforesaid thirtéene miles and eight miles more, on the South side we left the Island called Rebuian, which stretcheth Northwest, and Northwest and by North, and Southeast, and South∣east and by South, for the space of eight miles, béeing high and crooked Lande, whereof the North point lieth vnder 12. degrees and ••. and there you finde 35. fa∣dome deepe, with white sand.

From the aforesaide Island of Banton Southward nine miles, there beginneth and followeth three Islandes, one called Bantonsilla, which is a small Island in forme of a Sugar loofe: the second Cry∣mara, beeing somewhat great in length, reaching East and West about 2. miles: the third I••aa, or the Isle of Goates, ha∣uing certaine Houels. By all these I∣slandes aforesaide you may passe with all sortes of Shippes, whereof the foremost lyeth Southward vnder 12. degrees and 1/••. from the Island Bantonsilla, or small Banto••, we helde our course Northwest, for the space of foure miles, to the Chan∣nell betweene the Islands called de Ve∣re••e••, and the Island Marinduque, the Ve∣re••es lying on the South side vnder 12. degrées and ¼. (which are two small I∣slands like two Frig••••te••) and the Island Marinduque on the North side vnder 12. degrees and ••. which is a great Island, stretching West Northwest, and East Southeast, hauing in length twelue, and in breadth seuen miles. On the North side with the Islande Lucon it maketh a long and small channell, running some∣what crooked, which is altogither full of shallowes and sandes, whe••y no ships can passe through it. The ••urth•••••• point Wes••ward of the same Island, lyeth vn∣der 1••. degrees and ¼ it is high lande, on the East side hauing the forme of a mi••e of brimstone or fiery hill, and on the west side the land runneth downeward, at the point thereof being round like a loafe of bread: in the Channell betweene it and the Vere••es, there are eighteene fadome deepe, with small blacke sand.

From the aforesaide Channell of Ve∣re••es and Marinduque, we held our course West Northwest twelue miles, to the lande of Mindoro to the point or Hooke called Dumaryn, lying full vnder thir∣teene degrees: fiue miles forwarde from the said Channell, on the South side wee left an Island called Ilha del Maestro del

Campo, that is, the Island of the Coro∣nell, lying vnder twelue degrées and ¼. which is a small and flat Island: In this course wee had 45. fadome déepe, with white sand.

By this point or end of the Island Ma∣rinduque, beginneth the Island of Myn∣doro, which hath in length East and west fiue and twentie miles, and in breadth twelue miles, whether of the furthest point Southward lieth vnder thirtéen de∣grées, and the furthest point Northwarde vnder thirtéene degrées and 1/••. and the fur∣thest point Westwarde vnder thirtéene degrees. This Island with the Island of Lucon maketh a Channell of fiue miles broad, and ten or twelue fadome déepe with muddie ground of diuers coulers, with white sande. Fiue miles forward from Marinduque, lieth the riuer of the towne of Anagacu, which is so shallowe, that no shippes may enter into it. From thence 2. miles further, lieth the Islands called Bacco, which are thrée Islands ly∣ing in triangle, two of them being distant from the land about thrée hundred cubits, and betwéene them and the land you may passe with small shippes: and from the lande to the other Island are about two hundred cubites, where it is altogither shallowes and sandes, so that where the shippes may passe outward about 150. cu∣bits from the land, you leaue both the I∣slands on the south side, running betwéen the third Island and the riuer called Rio del Bacco, somewhat more from the mid∣dle of the Channell towards the Island, which is about a mile distant from the other: the Channell is ten fadome déepe, with••••ood and shelles vpon the ground: the riuer of Bacco is so shallowe, that no shippes may enter into it. From this I∣sland with the same course two miles for∣ward, you passe by the point called El ca∣po de Rescaseo, where wee cast out our Lead, and found that a man may passe close by the land, and there you shall find great strong streames: and halfe a mile forward with the same course, lyeth the towne of Myndoro, which hath a good hauen for shippes of three hundred tunnes. Three miles Northward from the same Hauen, lyeth the Island called Cafaa, stretching East and West, béeing Hill ground.

From the said towne of Myndoro, wée helde our course West Northwest eight myles, till wée came to the point or hooke of the Sandes called Tulen, lying vpon the Island of Lucon, which Sande or Banke reacheth into the sea halfe a mile from the coast: you must kéepe about an hundred cubites from it, where you finde eight fadome water, muddie and shelly ground: you runne along by those sands North, and North and by West for the space of two myles, till you come to the riuer called Rio de Anasebo, all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entrie of the Baye called Ma∣nilla, (which are foure miles) is sayled with the same course. The Limbones (which are Islands so called) are high, in forme like a paire of Organs, with good Hauens for small shippes, running along by the Limbones: and two miles beyond them on the South side, wee leaue the I∣slands of Fortan, and foure Islands more, but the thrée Islandes of Lubao, which are verie lowe lying vnder thirteene & 13. degrées and 1/••. and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entrie of the Baye of Manilla vnder 14. degrées and ¼.

From thence wée ranne Northwest for the space of sixe miles to the Hauen of Cabite, kéeping along by the land lying on the West side, where it is shallowe, and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Can∣nas, the shallowes of the riuer of Réedes; all along this Baye in the same course, there is from ten to foure fadome deepe.

Beeing by the point or Hooke of Ca∣bite, then wee kept but an hundred paces from it, running Southwest, South Southwest, & South, vntill wee discoue∣red the whole mouth or entrie of the bay, where wée might anker at foure fadome about two hundred cubits from the ••and, and then the towne of Manilla was two miles Northward from vs.

The 53. Chapter. The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla, to the Hauen of Macau in China, with all the courses and scituations of the places.

SAyling out of the Hauen of Cu∣bite, lying in the Bay of Manil∣la, wée helde our course West∣ward for the space of eightéene myles, to

the point called El Cabo de Samballes, and when wée were eight miles on our way, wée left the two Islandes Maribil∣las on the South side, and sailed about a mile from them: the point of Samballes aforesaid, lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées, and ⅔. being low lande: at the end of the same coast of Lucon, on the West side.

Frō the hooke or point aforesaid, we ran North, and North and by West, for the space of fiue and thirtie miles (about a mile from the coast of Lucon) to the point called Cabo de Bullinao, all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground, which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and ⅔. From this Cape de Bullinao, wée helde our course North, and North and by east, for fiue and fortie miles to the point cal∣led El cabo de Boiador, which is the fur∣thest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées.

The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land, maketh a great Créeke or Bough, and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador, béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea, and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground.

From the point of Boiador, we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles, vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco, or the white Island, which is a small Island, lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twen∣tie degrees, hauing foure and twentie fa∣dome browne muddie ground.

From the same Island Ilha Branco, wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest, for the space of sixtéene miles, to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton, and maketh the ri∣uer two mouths or entries, and is a small Island about three miles great.

The 54. Chapter. The Nauigation or course of the afore∣said Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine, with the sci∣tuation and stretchings of the same, with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage.

WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau, we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly, holding our course Southeast, and Southeast and by East, beeing in the wane of the Moone, for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands, because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest, wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night, hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome, with soft muddie ground, vn∣till we were about the Island Ilha Bran∣co, yet we sawe it not, but by the height we knew we were past it.

Being beyond it, we ran East south∣east, an hundred and fiftie miles, to get a∣boue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pes∣cadores, and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side, which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas, that is, the faire Islandes. This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon, and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾. there it is thirtie fadome déepe, & although we saw them not, notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them.

Being past the faire Islands, we held our course East, and East and by North, for two hundred and sixtie miles, vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos, sayling about fiftie myles from them, the said Chinar told me, that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many, and that they haue many and verie good Hauens, and that the people and inhabi∣tants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas, and are apparelled like the Bysayas, and that there also are mines of gold: He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes lade•••• with Buckes and Hartes bides, and with gold in graines or verie small pieces, to traffique with them of the coast of China, which he assured me to be most true, saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island, bringing of the same wares with him to China, which I beléeued to be true, for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true. The furthest or vttermost of these I∣slands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées.

Béeing past these Islands, then you come to the Islandes of Iapon, whereof the first lying West and South is the

Island of Firando, where the Portingales vse to trafficke, they are in length altoge∣ther a hundred and thirty miles, and the furthest Eastward, lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées, we ran still East, and East and by North, vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles.

All this information I had of the afore∣said Chinar, as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone, or fiery Hils, being seuenty miles beyond them, & thir∣ty miles further I should finde foure I∣slands lying together, which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee: For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads, y^t brought gold in small péeces, and some white Cangas of Algodon, (which are péeces of Cotton, Linnen so called by the Chinars) as also salt fish, the Spanish Atun, or Haberdine, which hee said, came out of other Islandes Eastward from Ia∣pon, and by y^e tokens and markes he shew∣ed me, I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee, and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay, hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good ha∣uens and Channels, being a country full of Rice, Corne, Fish, and Flesh, and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with, and that there they haue much siluer.

Running thus East, and East and by North about three hundred miles from Ia∣pon, we found a very hollow water, with the streame running out of the North and Northwest, with a ful and very broad sea, without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past, and what winde soeuer blewe, the Sea continued all in one sort, with the same hollow water and streame, vntill we had past y^e seuen hundred miles, about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne, where wee be∣gan to lose the said hollow sea and stream, whereby I most assuredly thinke and be∣leeue, that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage, betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne, and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria. Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles, we found a great number of whale fishes, and other fish by the Spaniards A∣tun, whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in Spaigne, as also Albacoras and Bonitos, which are all Fishes, which commonly kéepe in Channels, straights, and running waters, there to disperse their séed when they bréed, which maketh me more assuredly beléeue, that therea∣bouts is a Channell or Straight to passe through.

Being by the same course vpon y^e coast of new Spaigne, vnder seuen and thirty de∣grées and ½. wee passed by a very high and faire land with many Trées, wholy with∣out Snow, and foure miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots, leaues of Trées, Réedes, and other leaues like Figge leaues, the like whereof wee found in great abundance in the countrey of Iapon, which they eat, and some of those that wée found, I caused to be sodden with flesh, and being sodden, they eat like Cole∣wortes, there likewise wee found great store of Sea wolues, which wee call Sea dogges, whereby it is to bée presumed and certainly to bee beléeued, that there are manye Riuers, Bayes, and Hauens a∣long by those coasts to the Hauen of Aca∣pulco.

From thence wee ranne South-east, Southeast and by South, and South-east and by East, as we found the wind, to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas, which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia, on the Northwest side, lying vnder two and twenty degrées, being fiue hundred myles distant from the Cape De men∣dosino.

In this way of the aforesaied fiue hun∣dred myles, along by the coast, are manye Islands, and although they bee but small, yet without doubt there are in them some good Hauens, as also in the Firme Land, where you haue these Hauens follow∣ing, nowe lately found out, as that of the Island of Saint Augustine, lying vnder thirtye degrées and ¾. and the I∣sland called Ilha de Sedros, scarce vnder eight and twentie degrées and ¼. and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martyn, vnder thrée and twentie degrées and ½. all this coast and Country, as I thinke is inhabited, and sheweth to bee a verye good Countrey, for there by night wee sawe fire, and by day smoake, which is a most sure token that they are inha∣bited.

From the Point or hooke of Saint Lu∣cas, to the South-east side of Calliffor∣nia, wee helde our course East South∣east, for the space of eightye myles,

to the point called El cabo de las corrien∣tes, that is, the point of the streames ly∣ing vnder ninteene degrées & ⅔. and run∣ning this course Northward about a mile from vs, we sawe thrée Islands called las tres Marias, (that is, the thrée Maries) run∣ning the same course. About foure miles from the other Islandes, there are other Islands reaching about 2. or thrée miles: All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles, there are great streames that runne Westward.

From the point or Cape de las Corri∣entes, wée ranne Southeast, and some∣times Southeast and by East, for the space of an hundred and thirtie miles to the hauen of Acapulco. In this way of an hundred and thirty miles, being 20. miles on the way, we had the Hauen of the Na∣••iuidade, that is, the birth of the Virgine Mary: and other eight miles further, the Hauen of Saint Iago, or Saint Iames: and sixe miles further, the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma, that is, the Strand of Culyma. All this coast from California to the Hauen of Acapulco is inhabited by people that haue peace and traffique with the Spaniards, and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other pla∣ces of new Spaine.

The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage.

ALl this Description and Nauiga∣tion haue I my selfe séene, proo∣ued, and well noted in my Voiage made and ended in the yéere of our Lord 1584.* 1.8 from great China out of the Hauen and riuer of Canton, as I will more at large set it downe vnto your ho∣nour, with the Paralell and Meridian thereof, as God shall permit me time and leysour, whome I beséech to send you long and happy daies: and the same haue I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Originall cop∣pie, that was sent vnto the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies.

The 55. Chapter. The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da Silua for the Vice∣roy of new Spaine, the 20. of May in the yeere of our Lorde 1579.* 1.9 to the towne of Mexico, from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies, wherein is set downe the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that tooke the afore∣said Nuno da Silua by the Islands of Ca∣bo Verde, and carried him along with him thorough the Straightes of Ma∣gellanes, to the Hauen of Guatulco in newe Spaine, where he let him goe a∣gaine.

NVno da Silua borne in Porto, a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia, saith, that hée departed out of his house in the beginning of Nouem∣ber in the yéere of our Lorde 1577.* 1.10 taking his course to Cabo Verde, or the gréene point, where hée an∣kered with his shippe close by the Hauen of the Island of Saint Iames, one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid, béeing the nintéenth of Ianuarie in the yéere of our Lorde 1578.* 1.11 and lying there, there came sixe shippes, which seemed to be En∣glish men, whereof the Admirall boorded his shippe, and by force with his men hée tooke him out of his shippe, bringing him in the boat aboord the Admirals shippe, leauing some of his best men aboord his shippe: and although the fortresse of the Island shot foure or fiue times at them, yet they hurt not the English men: who hauing done, se•• saile from thence to the Island of Braua, that is, the wild Island, taking with them the shippe of the saide Nuno da Silua: béeing there, they filled certaine vessels with fresh water, from thence holding their course inwarde to Sea, hauing first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas shippe on lande, onley kéeping Nuno da Silua in his shippe, as also his shippe with the wines that were therein, and Nuno da Silua saith, the cause why they kept him on boorde was, because they knewe him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia, that hée might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water.

Béeing put off from the Island of Bra∣ua, they helde their course to the lande of Brasilia, which they descried vpon the first of Aprill, vnder the height of 30. degrées:

and without landing or taking in fresh water, they held on their course to the ri∣uer Rio de la Plata, that is, the riuer of Siluer, lying vnder fiue and thirtie de∣grées, little more or lesse, where they went on lande, and prouided themselues of fresh water. From thence they helde on their course till they came vnder nine and thirtie degrées, where they ankered: and béeing there, they left two of their sixe shippes behinde them, and sailed but foure in companie (that of Nuno da Sil∣ua béeing one) till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas, that is, the Baye of the Islands, lying vnder nine and for∣tie degrées, where it is said, that Magel∣lanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight, which now holdeth his name. In this Bay being the twentie of Iune, they entred, and there ankered so close to the land, that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot, and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians, that were apparelled with skinnes, with their legges from the knées downwarde, and their armes from the elbows downward couered, all the rest of their bodies béeing naked, with bowes and arrowes in their handes, being subtill, great, and well for∣med people, and strong and high of sta∣ture, where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water, and before they leapt on land, foure of the Indians came vnto their boate, to whome the English men gaue bread and wine: and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke, they departed thence: and go∣ing somwhat farre from them, one of the Indians cryed to them, and saide: Magal∣lanes, Esta heminha Terra, that is, Ma∣gallanes, this is my countrey: and be∣cause the English men followed them, it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande, and béeing somewhat farre off, they turned backe againe, and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Ship∣pers, one being an English man, the other a Netherlander: the rest came backe a∣gaine and saued themselues in the boate, wherewith they presently put off from the shoare, and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August, vpon the which day they set saile, running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande, for there it is all faire and good ground, at twentie, and fiue and twentie fadome déepe, and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes, but because the winde was contrarie, they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred.

The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad, on both sides bée∣ing bare and flat land, on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires, but on the South side they saw no people stirring. The foure and twentie day a∣foresaide, they beganne to enter into the straights, with an East Northeast wind. This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long, and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight, and halfe way into it, it runneth right forth with∣out any windings or turnings: and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end, it hath some boughes and win∣dings, among the which, there is one so great a hooke or running in, that it sée∣meth to runne into the other land: and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other: and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe: And although you finde some crookings, yet they are nothing to speake of. The issue of the Straight lieth westward, and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end, then the Straight beginneth to be broader, and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight, for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land, as I saide before: and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea: and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde, (being entred) they passed along without any let or hinde∣rance either of wind or weather: and be∣cause the high land on both sides lay coue∣red with snow, and that all the Straight is faire and cleare, they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side, hauing nine and ten fadome déepe, with good ground, as I said before, where (if neede require) a man may an∣ker: the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées, some of the hilles and trées reach∣ing downe to the sea side, in some places hauing plaine and euen land, and there they saw not any great riue••s, but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande: and in the

country where the great Bough or croo∣king is, on the South side they saw cer∣taine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes, being such as they sawe first on the North side, but more people they saw not on the South side.

Beeing out of the Straight on the o∣ther side, béeing vpon the sixt of Septem∣ber of the aforesaide yeere, they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes, and the third day they had a north∣east winde, that by force draue them West Southwest, which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp: and because the winde began to be verie great, they tooke in all their sailes, and lay driuing till the last of September.

The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pin∣nace which was about an hundred tunne, then againe they hoised saile because they came better, holding their course North∣east for the space of seuen dayes, and at the end of the said seuen dayes, they had the sight of certaine Islands, which they made towards for to anker, but the wea∣ther would not permit them: and béeing there, the winde fell Northwest, where∣by they sailed West Southwest.

The next day they lost the sight of an∣other of their companie, which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes, for it was very foule weather, so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone, for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights, and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen & fiftie degrees, where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land, at twentie fadome deepe, where they staied thrée or foure dayes, and the winde comming Southward, they hoysed anker, holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes, and then they espied a small vnhabited Island, where béeing arriued, they stroke sayles, and hoised out their boat, and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues.

The next day they set saile againe, hol∣ding their course North Northeast, and North, to ••nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande, on the North side of the Straight, where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande, at twelue fadome water. This Island is small and lowe lande, and full of Indians, the Island being altogither built and in∣habited by them, where they hoysed out their boate, wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water, and to séeke for victu∣als, and beeing landed vpon the Island, the Indians in exchange of other things, brought two Spanish shéepe, and a little Mais or rootes whereof they make bread, and because it was late, they returned a∣gaine vnto their shippe, without doing any other thing for that day. The next day the said Captaine with the aforesaide twelue men being Harquebushers, row∣ed to land again, and set two of their com∣panie on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water, and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certaine Indians secretly hidden, that fell vpon the two English men and tooke them: which they in the boat perceiuing, went out to helpe them, but they were so assailed with stones and arrowes, that all or the most part of them were hurt, the Captaine himselfe béeing wounded with an arrowe on the face, and will, another arrowe in the head, whereby they were constrai∣ned to turne backe againe, without once hurting any of the Indians, and yet they came so neare the boate, that they tooke foure of their oares from them. This done, they set saile againe, running along the coast with a South winde, sailing so for the space of sixe miles, passing by the Hauen called Saint Iago, or Saint Iames, where they put into a Hauen, and there they tooke an Indian that lay fishing in a Scute or Canoa, giuing him linnen and Butchers chopping kniues, with other trifles, and not long after there came an other Indian aboord their shippe called Fe∣lippe, and hée spake Spanish, hee gaue the English Captaine notice of a certaine shippe that lay in the Hauen of Saint Iago, which they had left sixe miles be∣hinde them: with that intelligence the Indian béeing their guide, the next day they set Saile and put to the aforesaide Hauen of Saint Iago, and entring there∣in, they tooke the saide Shippe, wherein they found a thousand seuen hundred and 70. Bortigas of Spanish pots full of wine, & other thinges, which hauing done, they leapt on land, where they tooke certaine

sackes with meale, with all what∣soeuer they could find, they tooke likewise the ornaments and other Relickes out of the Church, wherewith they departed from thence, taking the aforesaid shippe, with two menne (that they found in her) with them, and so departed from that Ha∣uen, which lyeth vnder 32 degrées and ½. running along by the coast till they came vnder one and thirtie and thirty degrées: which was the place where they had ap∣pointed to méet, and there to stay for each other, if by tempest or foule weather they chanced to be seperated, and so loose each others company.

And comming vnder thirty degrées, they found a very good Hauen, wherein they entred, and ankered at sixe fadome deepe, the shotte of a great Péece from the Lande, which was right ouer a∣gainst a Riuer, where they tooke in sixe Pipes of fresh water, and to defend them that fetched the water, they set twelue men vpon the Land, and being busied in filling of their water, they espied a compa∣ny of men comming towards them, wher∣of halfe of them were Spaniards, being about two hundred and fifty horsemē, and as many footemen, but they had no sooner espied them, but they presently entered in∣to the Boat, and escaped away, loosing but one man.

The same night they set saile againe with both their Shippes, running along the coast about ten miles further, where they tooke in some fresh water, but be∣cause they perceiued certaine horsemen, they departed without lading any more water.

Frō thence they folowed on their course along the coast for the space of 30. myles, where they entred into a desert or vnha∣bited Hauen, yet they went not on Land, for euery day they sawe people vpon the shore, and there they made out a small pinnace, the péeces whereof they brought readye framed out of England, and hauing prepared it, they launched it in∣to the Water, wherein the Captaine with fiftéene men entred, with the cheefe Boatesman called Ian de Greicke, (being Maister of the shippe which they had ta∣ken in the Hauen of S. Iago,) wherewith they went to sée if they could finde the two Shippes that they had lost by stor∣my weather as I saied before, and like∣wise thinking to goe on Land to fill cer∣taine vessels with fresh Water, they durst not venture, for they sawe people on all side of the shoare, so that in the end they returned againe without hea∣ring of the other Shippes, being there, they tooke all the Ordinaunce out of their Shippe, and newe dressed and rig∣ged her, which done, they put a small péece of Ordinaunce into the Pinnace, wherewith they set saile againe, follow∣ing on their course.

Hauing sayled thirtéene daies, they came to an Island lying about the shot of a Base from the Lande, where they ankered, and there they found foure Indian Fishermen in two Canaos, who tolde them that on the Firme Lande they might haue fresh water, but they vnderstanding that there was not much, and that it was somewhat within the Lande, they would not spend any time about it, but set sayle againe, leauing the Fishermen with their Canaos, fol∣lowing on their course along by the shore.

The next day being somewhat fur∣ther, they espied certaine Indian Fisher∣men that were vpon the Lande in their houses, which the English Captaine perceauing, presently entered into the Pinnace, and rowed on Land, where hee tooke three of the said Fishermen, taking with him halfe of the Fish that lay pac∣ked vpon the shoare ready to bee laden, with the which Indians and booty, they came on boord againe.

The next day following, they sawe a Barke laden with Fish, that belon∣ged to the Spaniards, with foure Indi∣ans in it. This Barke with the Indi∣ans and the Fish, they tooke and bound the Spanish Shippe to their sterne, and so drewe it after them, leauing the said Indians within it, who by night vn∣bound the Barke, and secretly made a∣way with Barke and Fish, and were no more seene. The next day the Cap∣taine went into the Pinnace, and be∣cause hee sawe certaine houses vppon the shoare, hee made thither, and bee∣ing on Lande, hee found two menne in them, whereof one hee tooke, lea∣uing the other behinde, and there hee found thrée thousand Pesoes of siluer, (euery Peso being the value of a Ryall of eight,) and seuen Indian Sheepe, Hennes, and all whatsoeuer they found▪

wherewith they departed from thence, following on their course, and two dayes after they came by the hauen called Azijc∣ka, where they found two shippes, the one laden with goods and Spanish wares, out of the which, they tooke only two hundred Bottigas (or Spanish Pots with Wine) and out of the other seuē and thirty Bha∣ras of siluer, which are péeces of tenne or twelue pound each Bharre, and thinking to leape on shore (with two Barkes that they found in the said Hauen, with about seuen and thirty Harquebushes & bowes) they perceiued on the land certaine horse∣men comming towards them, whervpon they left off their pretence, and tooke with them a Moore that they found within the Barkes, with whome they retourned aboord.

The next day in the morning they burnt the shippe, that was laden with the Spanish wares, and tooke the other with them, passing forward with it on their course, the Captaine sayling along the shore with his Pinnace, and the Shippe keeping about a myle from him to Sea∣ward, to séeke for a shippe whereof they had intelligence, and hauing in that man∣ner sailed about fiue and forty myles, they found the shippe that lay at anker in a ha∣uen, who about two houres before had beene aduertised of an English Pirate or Sea-rouer, and had discharged eight hun∣dred Bharres of siluer out of her, and hid∣den it on the Land, which siluer belonged to the King of Spaine, of the which siluer the Englishmen had receiued some intel∣ligence, but they durst not goe on land, be∣cause there were many Indians and Spa∣niards that stood to guard it, and they found nothing in the ship but thrée Pipes of wa∣ter, the shippe they tooke with them, and being about a mile in the Sea, they hoised vp all her sailes & let her driue, doing the like with the Shippe that they had taken in Azijcka, as also the other of Saint Iago, which likewise they let driue, following on their course with their owne ship, and the Pinnace.

Being seuen or eight myles from the Hauen of Callan de Lyma, they espied thrée Shippes, and boording one of them, they tooke thrée men out of her, and so helde on their course towards Cal∣lan de Lyma, where they entred, being about two or thrée houres within night, sayling in betwéene all the shippes that lay there, being seuentéene in number, and being among the ships, they asked for the ship that had laden the siluer, but whē answere was made them, that the siluer was laid on land, they cut the cables of the ships, and the masts of two of the greatest ships, and so left them. At the same time there arriued a Shippe from Panama laden with wares and Marchaundise of Spaigne, that ankered close by the En∣glish Ship, which was while the English Captaine sought in the other Shippes for the siluer. As soone as the shippe of Pana∣ma had ankered, there came a Boat from the shoare to search it, but because it was in the night, they let it alone till morning, and comming to the English shippe, they asked what shippe it was, wherevpon one of the Spanish prisoners (by the En∣glish Captaines commandement) answe∣red and said it was the shippe of Michiel Angelo, that came from Chile, which they of the boat hearing, sent a man on boord, who climbing vp, light vpon one of the great Péeces, wherewith hee was a∣fraid, and presently stept backe againe in∣to the boate (because the Shippes that lay there, and that sayled in those Countries, vsed to carry no great shotte) and there∣with they were abashed, and made from it, which the shippe of Panama hearing, that was newely come in, shee iudged it to bée a Rouer, and therewith cutting her Cables, shée put to Sea, which the Englishmen perceiuing, shipped certaine men in their Pinnace, and followed her: and being hard by her, they baddde her strike, which they of the shippe refused to doe, and with a Harquebush shotte, killed one of the Englishmen, where∣with they turned againe into their shippe and presently set sayle, following after the shippe, which not long after they o∣uertooke: which they of the Shippe per∣ceiuing, hoised out their Boate, and lea∣ping into it, rowed to Land, leauing the shippe with all the goods, which the En∣glishmen presentlie tooke, and with her sayled on their course.

The next day they sawe a boat with sayles making towards them, where∣by they presentlie mistrusted it to bee a Spye, and not long after they percea∣ued two great shippes comming towards them, which made the English thinke they came to fight with them, where∣vpon they let the Shippe of Panama

driue, therein leauing Iohn de Greicke. With the two that they had taken the same day, they entred into Callan de Ly∣ma, as I said before, and presently hoised all their sailes, and sailed forward, not once setting eye againe vpon the afore∣said shippes, for they made towards the shippe of Panama, which the Englishmen let driue. From thence they sayled a∣gaine along the coast, following on their course, and hauing sailed certaine dayes, they met a Frigate that went towards Lyma, laden with wares and Marchandi∣ses of the Countrey, from whence the Englishmen tooke a Lampe and a Foun∣taine of siluer, and asked the Pilote being a Spaniard, if they met not with a Shippe, that they vnderstoode should bee laden with siluer, but the one Pilote said he met her not, and the other said hee sawe her about thrée dayes before. This Frigate came not to the shippe, but to the Pinnace, wherein the Captaine say∣led, for the Pinnace ranne close by the shoare, and the shippe kept a myle and a halfe from the Lande, wherewith they let the Frigate goe, following on their course.

Two dayes after they came to the Hauen called Payta, where they found a Shippe laden with Spanish wares, which the Pinnace boorded, and tooke it without any resistance▪ for as soone as the Spaniards perceaued the English∣men, they presently made to Land with their Boat, and two of them leapt into the Sea, none staying in the shippe, but the Maister, Pilote, and some Moores, out of the which shippe the Englishmen tooke the Pilote, and all the Bread, Hens, and a Hogge, and so sayled forward with the Shippe: but being about two Harquebush shotte to Seaward, they let it goe againe, not taking any thing out of it, and asking after the shippe which they sought for, they told them that about two daies before shee departed from that place, wherewith they followed on their course, and before night they met with a Shippe of Panama, which they pre∣sently boorded, but tooke nothing from her but onely a Moore, and so left it, holding on their course.

The next day being the first of Fe∣bruary, they met another Shippe that sayled to Panama, laden with Fish and other victuals, & fortie Bharres of siluer, and some golde, but I knowe not howe much, which they tooke, and sent the pas∣sengers (with two Friers that were in her) in a boat to Land. The next day they hanged a man of the Shippe, because hee would not confesse two plates of golde that hée had taken, which after they found about him, which done, they let the Shippe driue, following on their course.

The first of March towards noone, they espied the shippe laden with the siluer, bée∣ing about foure myles to Seaward from them, and because the English Shippe was somewhat heauy before, whereby it sayled not as they would haue it, they tooke a company of Bottigas or Spanish Pots for Oyle, and filling them with wa∣ter, hung them by ropes at the sterne of the Shippe to make her sayle the better, and the shippe that sayled towards Pana∣ma, made towards the English Shippe to knowe what she was, thinking it to bee one of the shippes that vsed to saile along the coasts, and to tra••ficke in the country, and being hard by her, the English Cap∣taine bad them strike, but the other refu∣sing to doe it, with a great Peece hee shot her mast ouer boord, and hauing wounded the maister with an arrowe, the shippe presently yéelded, which they tooke, and sayled with her further into the Sea, all that night and the next day, and night ma∣king all the way they could. The third day being out of sight of lande, they began to search the shippes, and to lade the goods out of her into their Shippe, which was a thousand thrée hundred Bharres or pee∣ces of siluer, and foureteene chests with Ryals of eight, and with golde, but what quantity it was I knowe not, onely that the passengers said that there was great store, and that thrée hundred Bharres of the siluer belonged to the King, the rest belonging to certaine Marchaunts, that done, they let the Shippe with the men sayle on their course, putting the thrée Pi∣lotes in her that they brought with them▪ so that as then they had none but their owne men aboord, being the sixt of March, and from thence they helde their course towards the Lande of Ni∣caraga.

The thirtéenth of March, either the day before or after, in the morning they de∣scried Land, not being very high, beeing a small Island two miles from the Firme

land, and there they found a small Baye, wherein they ankered at fiue fadome déep close by the Lande, and there they stayed till the second day. Vpon the which day there passed a Frigate close by the I∣sland, which with their Pinnace they fol∣lowed, and taking her, brought her to the English Shippe, which Frigate was laden with Salsaperilla, or Pocke-root, and Bottigas or Pots with Butter and Hon∣ny, and with other things. The English Captaine went on boord, and cast the Sal∣saperilla on the Lande, leauing all the rest of the wares in the Frigate, and then hee put all his Péeces into the Frigate, that so he might lay his shippe on shore, to new calke and trim her, which continued till the thrée and twenty or foure and twenty of March, which done, and hauing made prouision of wood & fresh water, they helde on their course along by the coast, sayling Westward, taking the said Frigate and her menne with them, and hauing sayled two daies, they tooke their men out of her, and set them in the Pinnace, among the which were two Saylers, that meant to sayle to Panama, and from thence to Chi∣na, whereof one they tooke with the Let∣ters and Sea-cardes that hee had about him, among the which were the Let∣ters of the King of Spaine, sent to the Go∣uernour of China, as also the Sea-cardes wherewith they should make their voy∣age, and direct themselues in their course.

And so sailing on till the sixt of Aprill, about euening they discouered a ship that held two miles to seaward from the land, and before the next day in the morning, they were hard by her, and sodainely fell vpon her while her men slept, & presentlie made the mē enter into their ship, among the which was one Don Francisco Caratte, which done, they followed on their course with the said ship, out of the which they tooke certaine packes and other wares, but I know not what it was. They like∣wise tooke a Moore out of it, and thrée dayes after they both let the Shippe and menne goe whether they would, setting therein the two Saylers that should goe for China, which they had taken in the Frigate, kéeping onely one saylor to shew them where they should find fresh water, to the which end they tooke the empty ves∣sels with them to fill with water, and so kept on their course to the hauen of Gua∣tulco, where they put in, being vpon mun∣day the thirtéenth of Aprill, and hauing ankered, they stayed there till the sixe and twenty of Aprill, and being about thrée or foure houres in the night, they set saile, holding their course Westward, and an houre or two before they let Nuno da Sil∣ua goe, putting him into another shippe, that lay in the Hauen of Guatulco. From thence forward the Englishmen passed on their voyage, to the Islands of Malu∣cos, and from thence they passed by the Cape De Bona Esperanza, and so to En∣gland, as it is well knowne, so that this is only the description of the voyage that they made, while the said Pilote Nuna da Silua was with them.

Hereafter followeth the Coppy of a Letter written by Sir Francis Drake (bee∣ing in the South Sea of newe Spaigne, in his shippe called the golden Hart, with the shippe of S. Iohn de Anton, which hee had taken) to his companions in the other shippes that were of his company, and by foule weather seperated from him, as I saied before, The Contents whereof were these:

Maister Wouter, if it pleaseth Godthat you should chance to méete with this shippe of S. Iohn de Anton, I pray you vse him well, according to my word and pro∣mise giuen vnto them, and if you want a∣ny thing that is in this Shippe of S. Iohn de Anton, I pray you pay them double the value for it, which I wil satisfie again, and command your men not to doe her a∣ny hurt: and what composition or agrée∣ment wée haue made, at my returne into England I will by Gods helpe performe, although I am in doubt that this Letter will neuer come to your hands, notwith∣standing, I am the man I haue promised to bee: Beséeching God, the Saui∣our of all the world, to haue vs in his kéeping, to whome onely I giue all honour, praise and glory. This I haue written, is not onely to you Maister Wouter, but also to Maister Thomas, Maister Charles, Maister Caube, and Maister Anthonie, with all our other good friendes, whome I com∣mit to the tuition of him that with his bloud redéemed vs, and am in good hope, that wee shall bee in no more trouble, but that hee will helpe vs in aduersitie, desiring you for the Passi∣on of Christ, that if you fall into

any danger, that you will not despaire of Gods mercy, for hee will defend you and preserue you from all daunger, and bring vs to our desired Hauen, to whom bee all honor, glory, and praise for euer and euer.Amen.

Your sorrowfull captain, whose heart is heauy for you. Francis Drake.

An aduertisement to the Reader.

ALthough at the first it was my on∣ly intent to set downe the voyages and courses of the oriental coasts, Islands, and countries of the East parts, with some other Nauigations, of the places ther∣abouts, with the situations thereof, as I haue already declared: notwithstanding, for that among other my Record, I haue found the Nauigations of all the Hauens, Riuers, and Points of the coast of Brasilia, and the voi∣ages of the Portingales vnto the same, toge∣ther with the courses, stretchings, and situa∣tions of the Antillas or fore Islands of new Spaigne, together with all the channels that runne betweene them, and the Hauens, as well of the aforesaid Islands as of the Firme Land of new Spaigne, and likewise of the o∣ther side of the coast of Angola or Aethio∣pia, I thought it not vnconuenient to set them downe in this place, although it bee much different, and from the matter taken in hand. Touching the orientall parts, ne∣uerthelesse, because it is vnknowne to our countrimen, as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards, whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe, it will not bee out of the matter, but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto, and as I thinke will bee wel accepted, and estee∣med off, insomuch, as that at this time, our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and tra∣uell into those countries, hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and aug∣menting of their trauels, to the honour, praise, and glory of the Gospell of Christ, and all Christian Princes, and to the enti∣ching and welfare of the Low countries.

The 65. Chapter. The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia, with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia, to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata, with the situation thereof.

SAyling from Cabo Ver∣de (that is, the greene point) to Brasilia, you must saile south south∣east, Southeast, and Southeast & by South, and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées (or wheresoeuer you bee, you shall take your degrées on the Southside, and lessen them as much as you can, and you must remember, that as soone as you haue the generall winde, blowing from the South-east, then you shall runne Southwest, and West Southwest, and if the winde bee South and Southwest, you must runne South-east, but not too farre, for it helpeth you not, for that the more you kéepe that course, the more way you loose, and you shall vse all the meanes you can, not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes, called Os Baixos de Sant Anna, for the winde will helpe you, in such manner, that you may sayle towards the Point of Bra∣silia.

And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco, It being from the Moneth of October forward, and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de No∣ronha, being vnder eight & eight degrées, and ½. You must runne West towards the Lande, and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées, they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side, from whence you shall put to the South, that is, from October forward: for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe, and if you bee vnder the de∣grées aforesaid, you shall see the said downes, and when you see the end of them on the South-side, and from thence not séeing any more, then you are by Capig••aramirini, and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles.

And so if you bee vnder eight de∣grées and a halfe, then you shall sée a flat Lande, till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe, and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare, which is called Capiragua, when you are East and West with this Lande, being the Countrey whereof I speake, at twelue fadome déepe, it beeing in the Moneths of October, or af∣ter Februarye, then you néede not

feare any thing, but take héed you put not southwards, for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine, and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d O∣lynda, where the Towne of Olynda lieth, and the coast of the same North Point, is sailed North and South.

If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine, then you shall sée a Hill in∣ward to the land, which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell, on the Southside ha∣uing thrée Houels along by the Sea side, and the coast will stretch North-east and Southwest.

From this point of S. Augustine, to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles. This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½. and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and ⅓. & Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées, this voyage is thus to bee sayled, when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember.

But when you saile from Lisbon in Fe∣bruary or March, then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées: for from y^e month of March forward, then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow, and if you chance to bee by the land, vnder the height aforesaid, you néede not feare any thing, but shall hold your course at seuen∣téene and eightéene fadome, for it is faire and cléere, and you haue nothing daunge∣rous but the riffes lying close by the land, whereon you sée the water breake: & run∣ning Northward, if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side, then feare not to run northward, for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine, This point li∣eth on the sea side, being euen stéepe land, shewing like the muzzell of a Whale, in the toppe hauing a round Hill, compassed with Trées: and being at the depth afore∣said close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus, From this Island to Cape S. Augustine, are fiue or sixe miles, and lyeth vnder 8 degrées & ¾.

The 57. chapter. The course and Nauigation to the Hauen, called A Bahia de todos os Santos, or of all Saints, in the coast of Brasilia.

IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos, that is, the bay of all Saints, then obserue the course aforesaied, taking the times of the yeare: From the Month of March forward, and from Oc∣tober as I said before.

This Bay of all Saints, lyeth vnder thirteene degrées, and being from Octo∣ber forward, then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½. and being in sight thereof, (which will bee white sandy strands, which shew like linnen that lieth too white) then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast, vntill you be at the end of the said strands, where you shall sée an Island (lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen) called Tapoon, From thence you runne along the coast West, and West and South.

And comming to this Bay, from the Month of March forward, then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1/••. South∣ward, and when you are in sight of Land, if it be not the aforesaid white strand, then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward, and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½. Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside, and if you chance to be so néere the lande, that you can find no meanes to get off from it, then you shall know the Land well, for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel cal∣led O Morro de san Paulo, from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles: along by this houell on the northwest side, there is a very great riuer called Tinhare, which is very good to put into if néed be, and is six and seuen fadome déep, and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées & ½. then put not to the Lande, for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous.

And if you desire to saile from the Bay of all Saints, to Pernanbuco or to Portin∣gale, then hold your course Eastward, and if the wind serue you, hold East, and East and by North, for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea, and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées, for if you be vnder 11 degrées, you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Bar••ys (that is, the Créeke of emptying of vessels) and likewise when you come from Portingall, hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées, then put not towards it to shorten your way, but rather holde your course Southward from it.

From this Bay of all Saints to Per∣nanbuco is a hundred miles, and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest. From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas,

or the riuer of Islands, the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast, and South∣west and by West, and Northeast and by East.

The 58. Chapter. The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas, that is, the riuer of the Islands, in the coast of Brasilia.

IF you desire to saile to the ri∣uer of the Islands (you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾.) séeking to finde them, from the moneth of March forward, then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½. and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2/••. you néede not feare: and séeing the land vnder these degrées, then you shall see certaine high hilles, called As Serras dos Aymores, when you sée those hilles, then you shall come along the coast Northwarde, not fearing any thing, for from thence North∣ward there are no shallows: As soone as you sée the Ilands (for there are no other) then on the same coast you shall sée a roūd hill standing along by the Sea side, on the North side whereof you put into the Ri∣uer, and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in, then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands, kée∣ping from them, and there by the said I∣slandes you may anker: and if you be in that country when the Northeast winds doe blow, then looke for land vnder 14. de∣grées, and if you see a flat land, then it is the Island called Camamu••, by the which you shall run southward, and being at the end of the flatte land, then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the o∣ther aforesaid, all along by the sea side.

In the place where this lande begin∣neth to shew high, there lieth a small ri∣uer called Rio das Contas, that is, the ri∣uer of Beads, but it is not to be entered, and hath a white harde stone for a marke. From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward, and comming where the a∣foresaid high land endeth, then you shall finde a great Créeke, and being West Southwest, you shall see another high land, at the foot whereof (which is almost in the middle way to the créeke) you shall see certaine white houses, which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Su∣gar is prepared: and being there, you shal presently see the Islands.

The 59. chapter. How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro, that is, the sure Hauen, lying in the coast of Brasilia.

IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro, in the time of the South∣east windes (which is in March and so forward) you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées & ½. for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos, which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea, and when you saile East & West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times, & being by the land & that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point, which is called Monte Pasqual, frō thence you shall run Northward, & west, the same hill is westward from you, then you must hold towards the land, yet with good regard and foresight. And when you sée the land, and that you perceiue a round Houell, then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand, on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro, and running along by the coast, aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro. This height is a white stonie rocke, and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally: when you are East and west with this stonie rocke, then Northward you shall sée the water breake, which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea, on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Se∣guro.

If you begin this voyage when the winds are northeast & come to 15. degrees and ⅔. not seeing any hills, then leaue not running along the coast, & when you are vnder 15. degrées, the first high land you shall sée, will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast, & if vnder that height you see a riuer, then make not towardes the land, for there it hath certaine dange∣rous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio, from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro, and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the o∣ther sand lying two miles further inward to sea, then you shall passe by it, kéeping to seaward from it, and when you are at the end thereof, then the towne will be Westward from you, you may well put to it, alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid.

Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro, then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands, lying by the riuer called Rio Grande, that is, the great Riuer, and when you are past Rio Grande, then make towards the land againe to know it, as aforesaid.

The 60. Chapter. How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia d•• Espirito Santo, that is, the Bay of the Ho∣ly Ghost, lying in the coast of Brasilia.

SAiling to the hauen of Spirito San∣to (béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos) vnder 19. degrées and ½. then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées, for in this coast you haue no monsons, or courses of certaine winds.

If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½. and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land, then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo, which is the land lying aboue Cri∣quare, and aboue y^e riuer called Rio Dol∣ce, that is, the riuer of Swéet or fresh wa∣ter, you shall holde your course along by the land, vntill the land beginneth to rise, hauing some Hilles, but trust not to the first that you shall sée, but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side, and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro.

And when you come to this Hill, on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos, that is, the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen, and on the South side, then the mouth of the Baye will pre∣sently open. At the end of the said hill on the South side, there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron, that is, the point of the Hedge: And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles, being there, you shall put right ouer to the Bay, and so run West∣ward.

If you should be in the same course vn∣der twentie degrées, then you shall sée many hilles, among the which standeth a high sharpe point, called Serra de Guara∣pari, that is, the hill of Guarapari: it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can, that is, the Hill of Peterwood: these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo. From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing a∣lone, called Guape, & when you sée it, then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither, on the south side whereof lyeth another small, round, & flat Island, and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye, where (if néed be) you may put in and anker: if you desire to goe into it, then you shall runne East and west with the hill, and so runne in, and then the round Island will bée on the North side. This Island is called Ilha de Repouso, that is, the Island of rest, it lyeth very close by the land, and betwéene it and the land you may well anker.

From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles, and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo, you shall sée another Island lying alone, which you passe, running to Sea∣ward by it, and being by it, you shall pre∣sently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo: this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées.

The 61. Chapter. To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo, to the Bay of S. Vincent.

SAyling from Spirito Santo to y^e Bay S. Vincent, you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it, to the point called Cabo Frio, that is, the cold point, vntill you come to it: in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador, the Baye of our Sauiour, which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles.

Before you come to Cabo Frio, there are two Islands, from the which you run to seaward, yet if néed be, or if you desire it, you may passe betwéene them and the land. Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it, which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side, where it is faire and cléere.

This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées, from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ia∣nero, that is, the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles: this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof: If you will enter into this riuer, you may well goe in, taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof: on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head.

When you are vnder the height of this riuer, you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles, which shewe like Organs,

which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer, and when you begin to goe néere the lande, you shall see a round, high, and bare Island on the South side: the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. de∣grées and ½. From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra, are fiftéene miles, and there are two riuers in the way, but being in that country, put not to the land, vnlesse you be compelled thereunto.

From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest, and Southwest & by West, you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian, which on the South∣west side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases, that is, the Islande of Seamewes: before you come at it, you must holde your course West∣ward, to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it, whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent, where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Mu∣da, that is, the Island of the Dumbe wo∣man: and to put into the Bay of S. Vin∣cent, you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side. The Bay of Saint Vincent ly∣eth vnder 24. degrées, and if you be to lee∣ward from it, then you shall sée many I∣slands, whereof some stretcheth outward, which are the best markes for this Ha∣uen, and being there, you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay.

The 62. Chapter. How to saile from Cabo Frio, or the cold point, to the riuer of Rio de Plata, or the riuer of siluer, with all the course thereof.

FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Iane∣ro or Ianuarie, are eightéene miles, and you saile East and West, and ly∣eth vnder 23. degrées, and hath these markes: First, inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs, but at this time most of them are falne down: and on the West Southwest side tow∣ards the Sea side, it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe, and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands, whereof one is high and round which is a good marke, as also the Sugar loafe, being a houell that is called so, lying in the Hauen, although you can not sée it when you are at sea: you may saile along this coast without daun∣ger, and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes. From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast, and West Southwest, and is in length two and fortie miles: and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes, but there you finde good Hauens for all winds.

Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande, or the great I∣sland, which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides, with very good fresh water, and great fi∣shing, it is a high lande with many trees, and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed: if you desire to put in there, you néed not feare to do it, for there is no danger.

From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles, and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos, that is, the Island of Hogges, are fourtéene miles: the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Ha∣uen, but it is too farre inward. Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles, which is a great high Island, full of trees, it hath a verie good entrie, as well on the one side as on the other, it ly∣eth Northeast and Southwest. From thence to the lande about halfe a mile di∣stant lyeth the Rode: Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases, or the Island of Sea-mewes. Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes, on the South side whereof lyeth an Island, which is a verie good marke, for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather, whereby you can not knowe it, but when you see this Island, then you may knowe where you are.

From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles, which is a pleasant way, and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga. From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles, which is a verie good & a deepe Hauen. Between the Islandes aforesaid & this Hauen lieth another roūd Island called Monte de Tri∣go, that is, the hill or heape of wheate, which is a verie good marke for such as de∣sire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga.

From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa, that is, the hauen of Steuen da Costa, are fiue miles: this is a good Hauen for great shippes, it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in:

and if you will not put into it, outwarde close by the land you haue an Island cal∣led A Ilha da Moela, that is, the Island of Chéese, where you may anker.

From this Hauen Southwestward, lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada, that is, the burnt Island, which is a flat Island all stonie, but along by it, it is faire ground, like South southeastward. From the Hauen, lyeth a Cliffe, which of many men is not knowne: it lyeth aboue the water, and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Quei∣mada: From thence to the Island called Canaueas, that is, the Island of Réedes, are thrée miles, & you run North North∣east, and South Southwest along by the coast. Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water, and li∣eth vnder 23. degrées and ½. on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands, whereof the one is somewhat long and round, and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea, where you may put in with small ships.

From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina, are 48. miles, and you run along the coast North & South: This is a long Island full of trées, it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South. On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands, and on the South side another Island called A Galle, that is, the Island of the Gally: on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships: but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships, it hath much fresh water, and great store of fish and wilde Deere. This Island lyeth vnder 28. de∣grees and ½.

From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles, and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos, that is, the Ha∣uen of Géese, by some called La Laguna, that is, the Lake: This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries.

From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata, there is not one hauen where you may put in, the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast. Say∣ling from the aforesaid Island of S. Cateri∣na to Rio de Plata, you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. de∣grees & ⅔. Then you must put to the land, & when you sée it, which at the first shew∣eth like an Island called los Castillos, then you shall run along the coast, which will lie Southwestward, Southwest and by West, and west southwest from you, and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria, for the land there is so flat, that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point, but there you shall sée certaine riffes, but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies: and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it, then cast out your Lead, and there you shall find 10.14. and 18. fadome déepe, therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground, and you are in a good way. Being there as aforesaid, then run as long as you can well discerne the land, & then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos, that is, the Island of Wolues, for there you sée many wolues: it is a flat Island all full of stones, on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe, but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies. This Island is distant from the Firme land a∣bout two miles and ½. towards the north∣west, & from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island, with a low wood close by the land, which hath a good hauen to anker in, if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest. If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side, then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande, which is a lowe stony point, and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it, and if you enter on the Northeast side you néede not feare any thing: and to anker, kéepe close by the Island, for there you haue fresh water, and great store of fish vpon the ground.

Béeing there, you must bée carefull, for there beginneth the first high Lande, and from it about eight or ten myles fur∣ther, lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous, and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande, being two myles in length: you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande, and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide, for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles, you must kéepe harde by the shoare, because of the sande aforesaide, and from thence with your Leade in your hande, with good watch and foresight, and if it bee not seasonable

weather to saile by night, then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day, the better to make your voiage.

And when you thinke you are past this sand, then you shal sée a hill called O mon∣te de Santo Sered••o, which is a rounde high hill, the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde: betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid, lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores, that is, the Island of Flowers, which you may passe about without danger.

And when you come into the salt or fresh water, which floweth fiue and twen∣tie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires, that is, the Riuer of good aire, where the water is verie fresh, then hold your course West, and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire, which is the best course you can holde, but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand, and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water, then saile no further if it bée by night, but in the day time you may sée whither you saile, which must be in sight of land, and so neere, that you may easily discerne the trées, holding two miles from the land, for you can not passe by the Riuer of good aire without séeing the houses that stand vpon the same. The most part of the land of the Riuer of good aire, is a thicke land like a downe, a∣bout thrée miles along by the sea side, as soone as you sée this lande, then you must make right towards the houses, yet som∣what more towards the south side, where there is a place where the shippes anker: but if you desire to runne on the North side, then you shall take your course from the Island las Flores, or from Santa Horo∣dio about a mile and a halfe from the land at three and ½. or foure fadome, to the I∣slands of Saint Gabriel, which are thrée smal Islands, but they haue no good Rode: and if you chance to anker there, goe not a shore but verie warily, because the inha∣bitants haue warres with the Spaniards and Portingales all along the riuer, but the best course is on the South side, from the fresh water inwards.

The 63. Chapter. How to saile from the Island La Gomera, one of the Islands of Canaria, to the An∣tillas or sore Islandes of the Spanish In∣dies, and from thence to the coast of the Firme land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios, as also the course from thence to the Hauana and the channell thereof, and so to the Flemi••h Islands, and from thence to Spai••ne, with the scituation of the places.

SAyling from the Island La Gome∣ra to the Island called La Dessea∣da, that is, the Desired Island, being one of the Islandes of the Spanish Indies, then you must holde your course South for the space of a mealetide, so to get out of the calme: from thence you must runne West Southwest till you be vnder 20. or 22. degrées, and beeing there you must runne West, and West and by South, till you come vnder fifteene degrées and 1/••. which is the height of the Island La Desseada: If (when you are there) you haue a West winde, then run Southwest as farre as you thinke good, thereby to get againe vnder fifteene de∣grées and ½. running on the wether side West Northwest, to bring all to one point whereby you shall find helpe, from North and South, East and West, be∣cause you are close by the lande, holding your course West and west and by north, because the compasse windeth a strike in∣to the Northwest, with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada. This Island lieth East and West, and sheweth like a Gallie with her tilt vp: on the east side it is a low land, in forme like a bore-sprit of a shippe or galley: from the West side it is high land, shewing like the sterne of a gally, and on the South side it shew∣eth like halfe an Island, the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe.

The Island called Ma••galante is a low and flat land, and reacheth East & West, being full of trées, on the East side beeing highest, and on the South side hauing cer¦taine white downes, & on the West side about halfe a mile from the Island it hath a blacke shining cliffe. This Island lyeth full vnder fifteene degrees.

The Island la Dominica is a great I∣sland and reacheth Northwest and south∣east, when you sée it first (beeing on the outside therof) it sheweth like 2. Islands, by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle, but when you are close by it, then you perceiue it to be all one Island, it is full of hils, on the Southeast side a lowe land, hauing a small or thin point of land

with a houell vpon it, on the North-west side it is thicke high Land, hauing a Hill that seemeth to bee seperated, and to stand alone by it selfe, although it is not alone. Vpon this hil there is a rock which shew∣eth like a clock house, & without the afore∣said thicke high Land, there is a Rocke or cliffe which runneth off frō y^e thick point. This Island lyeth vnder 15. degrées & ½.

The Islands called Los Santos, are four Islands which are not very high, lying in Triangle. Betweene these Islands and the Island La Dominica, there runneth a good channell to passe through.

Sayling from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa, lying from the Firme Lande, you shall holde your course West, and West and by South, vntill you bee by the point, and if you sée it not, then runne southwestward towards it, or Southward, vntill you sée it. This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land, run∣ning into Seaward, and within the lande it hath a rowe of Hilles, which are called the Oile Hils, which stretch along by Ve∣uansuela, where they end, which vpon the coast of the Firme land. From this Point you runne along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela, and betwéene these two Points there are two hauens, wher∣of one is called Bahya Honda, (that is, the deepe Bay. This lieth on the East side, and on both sides where the Sea beateth, it hath downes: The other Hauen lying on the West side, within it hath a high Land or Hill, which reacheth North and South. In both these Hauens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tunnes. All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is cleare and safe. The point Cabo de la Vela, is a high land like a suger loafe, and about half a mile from it, there is a cliffe, which she∣weth like a ship vnder saile, and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela, that is, the point of the saile. This Cliffe lieth Northeast and Southwest, with y^e Point aforesaid it is said you may well passe be∣twéene it and the lande, and if you depart from the saied Point, to saile to the Cliffe and Point called Cabo de la aguia, (that is, the Point of the Néedle) then you shall runne West South-west, by the which course you shall see it. They are foure Cliffes together, which shewe in forme like a Horse shooe, and the Lande that is right against it, is a high Land. Beeing inward to the Lande some what higher, which is called Las Sierras Neuadas, that is, the Snowe Hils, when these hils are Southward from you, then you are right against the foure cliffes.

And comming to the beginning of the foure Cliffes, hauing past the Riuer De Palomina lying by the last Cliffe, then you shall see the Cabo de La aguia. This Cape is a still Lande, descending downe∣ward to the Sea side, but not very high, on the toppe hauing a Dale, which shew∣eth like a saddle. It hath likewise on the out side (close by it) thrée blacke shining Cliffes, which the water dooth almost flowe ouer: they lye with the Cape afore∣said North and South. The saied Cape is bare, & sheweth blackish and shining.

All this coast reacheth almost East and West. From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward, you must runne along by the coast, alwaies looking to your course, be∣cause of the Billowes and streames that come from the Lande, which oftentimes fal vpon you. When you discouer the land of Charthagena, you shall sée two Cliffes, which lye by the Hauen of Charthagena, you must runne along by the first Cliffe, betwéene it and the Lande, alwaies with your Lead in hand, and you must not goe néerer then ten fadome to the Land, there you shall find white sandy ground, and be∣ing at fiftéene or sixtéene fadome muddye ground, then kéepe aloofe to the Southeast and South, and so runne in, for you shall sée the hole open before you.

Sayling from Carthagena to Nombre de Dios, (that is, the name of God) with the winds called Brisas (which are windes blowing from the East and North parts, generally called Brisas) then you must hold your course West, and somewhat West and by South, till you be vnder 9. degrées and ½. vnder the which heigth lyeth the point called Cantina, which are seuen I∣slands, whereof fiue stretch east and west, the other two Northeast and Southwest.

Being somewhat past these Islandes, you shall sée a low point of Land reaching into the Sea, called A Punta de Lambras, which lyeth on the West side, and West∣ward from it, it hath a Hill which is somewhat higher then the Point, which you may well discerne when you make to Sea-warde from it, and that the Point lyeth South-west-warde from you, the said Hill hauing on the South∣east side certaine lowe Lande, and

somewhat more Westward, the Lande beginneth to bee higher, which endeth at the Riuer of Francisco. At the mouth of this Riuer to Sea-ward from it, lyeth a stony cliffe, and from this Riuer to Nom∣bre de Dios, it is all ouer a flat and red shi∣ning Lande, to the houell called Niquea, which is about a myle from Nombre de Dios, you shall likewise sée the edifices or buildings of Capira, and if a man should ask you (when those buildings lye North∣east from you) where you are, then you may answere him, that you are vpon the coast of the lande North-east and South∣west beneath Nombre de Dios.

Sayling from Nombre de Dios to Car∣thagena, you shall holde your course East Northeast to the point, from thence you must runne East, whereby you shall dis∣couer the Islands of Saint Barnard, which are low and yet Hill Islandes, with very faire ground along by them, and if you should be in a Frigate, then you may passe betweene them and the land. Fiue or sixe miles further you shall see the Islands cal∣led Braua which are foure small Islands, whereof the furthest outward is the grea∣test, they are all lowe, and bare Lande, hauing by them faire and cleare ground, and with a Frigate you may passe in∣ward, but with a shippe you must not goe neerer then sixe fadome. From thence east Southeastward, you shall sée the Gally of Carthagena, with the markes aforesaied, & in the East and East Northeast bough, you shall see the Land Cariscos, which is a high and hill land. From thence you must runne along by the coast, vntill you begin to sée the Hauen, then you must put in, al∣waies shunning the sands of Carys, run∣ning along by the east point, being there, if night falleth vpon you, then you may anker betweene Carys and Baru, in the surest place you can finde, to defend you from the windes called Brisas, by the high Lande of Carys, and if you put out of the Hauen of Nombre de Dios, you shall la∣uere till you sée the buildings that are be∣yond it, and sayling into the Hauen, you shall doe as wind serueth.

Sayling from Carthagena to the I∣sland of Hauana, you shall hold your course North-west, till you come to thirtéene de∣grées and 1/••. and when you are vnder thir∣teene degrées, then you shall let your selfe driue South South-east and South, as the manner is, vntill you bee past the heigth, or bee out thereof, or in the depth, and when you are vpon the ground of the Serrana, then you shall sleepe towardes it as much as you can, and if it bee possible you shall hold Northward, for so you shall the sooner be there. From the point of Ca∣bo de Camaron to Cabo de Roncador, with the Sea strand that stretcheth from the one to the other, as also from Serrana and Serranilla, (being Islands and Cliffes so called) on the west side of all these sands is great sande, with Fish s••ales vpon the ground, and the least depth you find there, is fiftéene fadome wa••r, being all faire and in this depth you shall runne till you bee ouer it, and being ouer, you shall pre∣sently begin to multiply or rise till you bee at fiftie fadome deep and somewhat more. Serrana lieth vnder foureteen degrees and ½. and Serranilla vnder sixteene degrees. If you sée Serranilla on the West side, on that side it is a lowe sandye Island, stretching Northwest and Southeast. Sayling from Serranilla or Cabo de Roncador to y^e point of S. Anton lying in the Island Cuba, yu•• shall holde your course Northwest, and Northwest and by north, wherewith you shall discouer the Cape aforesaied, or the Cape de coryentes, (that is, the Point of the streames) which is a clouen Point to∣wards the sea side, being lowe Land, on it hauing some Palme Trees. From thence to Cabo de S. A••n, the Land beginneth to bée lower, & the coast stretcheth North∣west and south-east. The cape de S. Anton is a low sandy Point vpon it hauing two or three houels, and lieth vnder 22. degrees. If in this course you chaunce to see the I∣sland called Cayman Grande, that is, the great Cayman. You must vnderstand that it lieth vnder nineteene degrees, and is low land ful of Trees, stretching east and west, on the south-side hauing some white sandy strands. Sailing from the Point of S. Anton, with the windes called Venda∣val, (which are West and South windes, generally called Vendaua••es, as the East and North windes are called B••sas) to the Hauana, then you must runne North∣east to shunne the droughtes that runne out from this Point, which reach to the beginning of the hils called Los Organos, (that is, the Organs) and when you are past the sands, you shall hold your course along by the coast, for there you neede feare nothing more then that you see be∣fore you.

The Organs are certaine high Trées, which make manye openings and rents, whereof those on the South-side are cal∣led the point of Guanico, these Organs or hils reach to the Riuer called Rio de Por∣•• that is, the riuer of hogs from thence begin the Hils called the Cabinas, which are high and doubled, on the highest of thē hauing a playne or flat Lande, there you haue a Hauen called El Puerto de Caba∣nas, Eastward from this point to the field of Mariam, it is low flat land ful of Trees, where there is another Hauen: From thence to Hauana it is all lowe land with∣out any risings, except one Houell, lying right ouer against the Hauana, which is a clouen hill, vpon it hauing a sharpe point, called Atalaya, that is, a guard, and beeing North and South with the Hauen, with∣in the Lande you shal see two Hils, which shew like two teates of a womans dugs, and to put into it, you must keepe your course along by the houell.

If you depart from the Point afore∣said with the winds called Brisas, then you shall hold your course to the Cliffes called ••ortugas (that is, the Torteaux) as winde serueth, and you must see what depth you find: for if there you finde fortie fadome water, then you are on the South-side thereof, and finding 30. fadome, then you are East and West right against it, and being at any of these depths, you shal hold your course South South-west vntil you see the land, which you shall discouer from the field or Hauen thereof: and if you see a Land that is somewhat high, hauing some Hils and Dales that shewe like the fingers of a mans hand, then it is the land ••a••••d Narugo from thence you shal runne to H••ea••a, holding your course along by the coast.

Sayling out of Hauana to the Martirs, you shall hold your course Northeast, by the which course you shall see the Point, which is three small Islandes, whereof that in the middle is the greatest, the vt∣termost being the East coast, and the in∣wardest the North-east and South-west coast. From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canauerales (that is y^e point of Reedes) the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land, and being vnder fiue and twentie degrees, then you are in the mouth of the channel, which to passe through, you must hold your course Northeast, and if you see not the Cape de Canauerales being vnder 28. degrees and ••/2. then you are without the channell.

Sayling out of the Hauana (with the windes called Brisas) to the channell, you must runne outwards till it be noone, and after noone you shall make to Landward, that towards euening you may bee by it, and to vse the Windes called Terreinhos, (which are Windes that blowe by night from off the land) running in this manner along by the coast, vntill you bee North and South with the Houell called El Pan de Matancas, (that is, the loafe of Matan∣cas being North and South with y^e same loafe, you must runne Northeast, if the winde will permit, if not, you must put to the coast of Florida, where the winde will driue you doing your best, in that way to goe out of your course as little as you may, for the streames runne with great force towards that Lande, and when you thinke it time, then you shall put to the o∣ther side, as the winde will leade you, till you see the Lande, and when you sée it, then winde, in this sort running through, and being vnder 28. degrées and ½. then you are out of the Channell: hereof I ad∣uise that the strikes you make in lauering towards the land of Florida must be short, and those towardes the Coast of Minare long, for the streames driue you to the Lande of Florida. The Hils of Chupiona come out by the loafe of Matancas (and are certaine not too high and euen Hils) flat on the toppe, with certaine white shi∣ning houels. The loafe of Matancas is a high Houell, flat aboue, stretching north∣east and South-west, and on both sides as well North-eastward, as southwestward, it hath two low Points, lower then y^e said loafe, which shew like the heads of Tor∣teaux. On the North-east side the Lande stretcheth lowe, and from thence North∣ward it maketh a small Point. Behinde this Point lyeth the Hauen of Matancas, and to enter therein you must run North∣east and Southwest right against the said loafe, and then the Hauen will bee South from you, and you must runne southward to it, it is a great Bay, and there you haue no Road, but close by the Land, comming out you leaue the loafe on the South-side, and you must hold your course north-east, till you be out.

And being out of the Channell, if it bée in Winter, you shall run East, wherwith

you shall holde East and by North, by the winding or declining of the compasse: By the which course you shall passe on the South-side of the Islands and Cliffes of Bermuda, and this course you shall holde till you bee vnder the heigth of the Island Fayael, one of the Flemish Islands, which is a great Island, stretching North-west and Southeast on the Southeast side, ha∣uing a thicke Land, and on the northeast side somewhat lower land. To saile from thence to the Island of Tercera, you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George, east, and east & by North. The Island of S. George is a high Lande, stret∣ching East and West, as also Tercera, which on the Southside hath a clouen hill, called O Brasil, and a little eastward from thence, there lieth thrée cliffes. The Iland of S. Michael is a great high Island, stret∣ching East and West, on the West side being lowe, and on the East side high. It hath likewise a clouen hil, lying at the end on the East side. This Island lyeth vnder 38. degrées.

The 64. Chapter. The course and right markes from the I∣sland La Desseada, to the lande and coast of Carthagena, Nombre de Dios, new Spain, and from the channell of Hauana.

IF you desire to sayle through the Channell that runneth betwéene the Island La Antigua, & La Desle∣ada towards the coast, you must holde your course West to the Island of Mon∣tecerratte, running along by the Island of Guadalupe, which is an Island clouen through the middle, & higher on the West then on the East side. The Island La An∣tigua, (that is, the old Island) you shal find on the Northside of Guadalupe, stretching in length East and West, and hath Hils with outward shew like Ilands, and lieth vnder 16. degrées and 1/••.

The markes of the Island Montecer∣ratte are these. It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries, and hath some Hilles with certaine Water beakes. Sailing from this Island Monte∣cerratte, you must runne West North∣west, whereby you shall discouer the I∣sland Sancta Crus, but you must not runne too close by it, for there it is foule, and no cleare ground, it stretcheth East and West, and is Hilly, but not verie high, beeing higher on the West then on the East side, in the middlest hath a rent or partition, and on the East side there is a Roade where you may anker, for there it is faire sandye ground. To sayle from Sancta Crus to the Island of Pu∣erto Riquo (that is, the Iland of the rich Hauen) on the Southside, you must runne West Northwest, whereby you shall dis∣couer the hill called Sierta de Loquillo, and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sayle West and West and by North, keeping along by the land vntill you be by the cape aforesaide, which is the vttermost part of the same Island.

This point called Cabo Roxo, (that is, the red point) is a thin and lowe lande, on the sea side hauing certaine redde shining downes, and on the North-west side you sée the hils called I as Sierras de S. German, which are very high, but not so high as those of Loquillo. From this point of Ca∣bo Roxo, you must hold your course west, and west and by North, whereby you shal discouer the Island called De la mona, that is, the Island of the ape, and you must run along. by the southside thereof. The Island La Mona, is a low land, and reacheth East and West, on the sea side being a plaine land descending downward, on the north∣side it hath a Cliffe or small Island called Monica, or the little ape. Betwéene it and the Island you may passe. On the West side of Mona there is a Roade of faire and good ground, hauing likewise such another Roade by the Point that lyeth South∣west.

From the Island De la Mona to the Island De la Sahona, if that it be by day, you shall hold your course Southwest, and by night West, and West and by South, and you must vnderstand, that the Point called Cabo de Enganno, that is, the deceit∣full Point, is altogether like the Point of Sahona, hauing a clouen houell on the vp∣per part of the Island, being betweene the lowest Lande thereof that lieth on the Sea side. Betwéene Cabo del Enganno, and Sahona, lyeth a small Island called the little S. Catalyna, the reason why you must there runne West and South, is be∣cause the Streames runne towards the Créeke.

The markes of the Island Sahona, are these. It is a lowe Island full of Trees, so that as you come towardes it, you first sée the Trées before you perceaue the

land thereof, it stretcheth East Northeast and West Southwest, on the South side it hath certaine Riffes which run halfe a mile into the Sea: if you fall vpon this lande comming out of the Sea, and that ouer the Islandes you sée certaine hilles, then they are the hils of Niquea, which you shall likewise sée betwéen great San∣cta Catalina and La Sahona: this Island Sahona on the West side hath a Rode of eight or ten fadome deep, to saile from Sa∣hona to Santo Domingos, (it beeing thrée miles to seaward from Sahona) you shall hold your course Northwest, and North∣west and by West: From thence to San∣to Domingos it is altogither low land, on the sea side descending downward, and is the land which in that place reacheth fur∣thest East and West.

The markes of Santo Domingos are these, that when you are Northwest and Southeast with the old mines, then you are North and South with the riuer of Santo Domingos, and ouer the riuer you shall see two houels which shewe like the teates of a womans breastes, when those houels are North, and North and by west from you, then you are to loofeward from the riuer, so that by those teates you shall knowe whether you be past or to Loofe∣ward from it. On the East point of the entrie of the Riuer standeth a Tower, which serueth for a guarde or beakon for the shippes that come out of the sea. From this point aforesaide runneth a hidden cliffe which you must shunne, and so you must runne in, but go not to neere the Al Matadero, that is, the Slaughter house, for there it is shallow: and being within the aforesaid hidden cliffe, you haue foure fadome déepe, and so you shall holde your course to the Sandie strand, lying on the East side, shunning the Cliffes of the for∣tresse, and going from the Fortresse in∣ward, then you must let fall your ankers, right against the Admiraltie in the mid∣dle of the riuer, where the best place and Rode is.

From Santo Domingo being 4. miles to Seaward, you shall holde your course Southwest, and Southwest and by west, vntill you be North and South with the Island of Niqueo, and to goe from thence to the hauen of Oquoa, leaue not the coast, but run close by it with all your sailes, till you be past the riuer, for if you get off frō it without touching the Palma, which is a certaine banke so called where the ships vse to anker, then you must not anker: be∣ing in the riuer, you must looke wel before you, that when you anker to make your ship fast with an anker both out to Land∣ward and to Seaward, and then you are safe.

Sayling from this Hauen and Bay of Oquoa, you shall runne outwarde to the South vntill you be about the point and thrée miles into the sea, and then you shall hold your course Southwest, and South∣west and by South, wherby you shall dis∣couer an Island called De la Beata, that is, the blessed Island, which is a lowe I∣sland stretching East and west.

Two miles Westwarde from Beata, lieth an Island or cliffe called Altobello, which by night sheweth like a ship: when you are past Beata and Altobello, then you must runne West, and West and by North, to the point called Cabo de Tuba∣ron, that is, the point of the hedge. In this créeke are thrée or foure Islands or rocks which are called Los Frayles, that is, the Friers. Before you come to Cabo de Tu∣baron there is a Créeke, wherein lieth an Island called Iabaque, with more cliffes and Riffes lying about it, being foule ground. Behind this Island you see cer∣taine hilles called Las Sierras de dona Ma∣ria, otherwise Las Sierras de Sabana▪ when you are right against Iabaque, then you must run West Northwest. The Cabo de Tubaron is a blacke shining Houell, on the sea side being clouen, vpon it hauing certaine white places like water beakes. Within this point or Cape lieth a riuer of fresh water, where you haue stones for Ballast as you haue in the Riuer of Mynijcka. From thence to the point of Cabo de Crus, you must hold your course Northwest vntill you are past the Island of Nabassa, running on the North side thereof, and if the streames chaunce to driue you on the south side, then you must obserue certain times (if you be in a great ship) holding a good way into the North∣west from it, to shun the sands that sticke out from the point de Morante, and reach betweene this point and Nabassa, & there in some places you haue aboue foure fa∣dome déepe, and at the end thereof you may run from 15. to 20. fadome déepe.

Nabassa is a round and lowe Island, on the Sea side being all flat and plain land: running on the North side of this Island,

you shall hold your course Northwest, and Northwest and by West, and if you desire to passe along by the Cape De Crus, it is a point sticking out, which (as you come to∣ward it out of the sea) sheweth as if on the top it were full of Trées, but it is inward to Lande. On the East side of this Point lyeth the hauen of Cabo de Crus.

Now to sayle to the Island De Pinos, you must runne West Northwest, wher∣by you shall discouer the Island. This I∣sland De Pinos is a low land ful of Trées, so that as you come out of the Sea, you sée the Trées before you sée the land, it stret∣cheth East and West, and in the middle it hath thrée houels, whereof that in y^e mid∣dle is the greatest.

From this Island De Pinos, to Cabo de Corrientes, you must runne West North∣west, by the which course you shall sée it, This point on the sea side is a Lande run∣ning downeward, vpon it hauing some palme Trées, and on the West side a san∣dy strand, where there is a Roade where you may lye. Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill, which stretcheth further out thē all other points, when from thence you put in, you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you, a Lake of fresh water, where if néede bee, you may supply your want. To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward, you must runne West Northwest.

From the Island De Pinos, to Cabo de S. Anton, there are two great créekes: one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes, and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton, and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes, there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico, & behind the Land inward, you shall sée certaine Hils, called Las Sierras Guaniguanico. Cape de S. An∣ton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes, and from it there runneth a bank or sand, for the space of 4. miles northwestward. Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne, in winter time, y^t is, from August to March, then you must hold your course without y^e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward, with y^t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles, you shall find ground, which shalbe of shels or great sād. This you shal find til you be vnder 24. de∣grées, & if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course, then hold your course north northwest, & north∣west & by west, & when therewith you be∣gin to increase in depth, then turn againe to your first course of northwest, and whē you begin to lose land, then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West, wherwith you shall be north & south with the Island Bermeia. Frō thence you must saile south∣west till you be vnder 20. degrées, & if you sée not land, you shall run west, for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y^e heigth. Vnder this height & course you shal sée La torre Blanca. y^t is, the white tower, & if you chance to discouer y^e Riuer of S. Petro, & S. Paulo, then beyond y^e riuer you shal sée cer∣taine gréene hils, but not very high.

If you finde 35. fadome déepe, with muddie ground, with shelles in some pla∣ces, then from thence you shall hold your course South, and South and by East, vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria: if you come out of the Sea, you shall séeke ground lower, and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground, then you are East and West with the ri∣uer of Almeria, about seuen miles from the land: and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo, and that they run one within the other, then you are Northeast and Southwest from them. From thence you shall bolde your course South, and South and by West, whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues, which wil make two round hilles: you shall likewise see Las Si∣erras de Calaquote, which are certaine reddish hilles. This rowe of Hilles com∣meth out to the sea side.

If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa, that is, the rich towne, thrée miles from the land, you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe, muddy ground. The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées, and los Campos d'Al∣meria, that is, the fields of Almeria, vnder 20. degrées. Villa Risa la Vieya, that is, olde Villa Risa, lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2/••. Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils, whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side: they are not very high, but make many openings or rents, (like the hilles of Abano, called Organs) stretching North and South: if you chaunce to come out of the Sea, and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa, then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South,

and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West, you may know them another way, which is, that if you make Westward to∣wards them, comming close to them, they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn, which are greater and higher, as you passe along the Sea coast by them, and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa, you shall find ground, which by S. Martins you shall not find, although you were but halfe a myle from them. Lastly, although you should haue no knowledge of Lande, yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid. To Léeward from Vil∣la Risa lieth a Cliffe, called N. Bernards, which is in forme like a suger loafe. From Villa Risa la Vieya, or out of Villa Risa, to S. Iohn de Luz, you shall hold your course South, and South and by East, and you shal find ground of shels & muddy ground, at thirty fadome towards the Land. By the Riuer of Vera Crus, you shall find san∣dye ground, and in some places muddye ground.

If you were without, then you must knowe that from S. Christopher, to S. Iohn de Luz, it is all sandye strandes, and being East and west with the point called Pun∣ta Gord••, then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz, and be∣ing North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe to∣wards the Land, then you shall haue red∣dish ground, and in some places shels, and from forty fadomes forward white mud∣dy ground. If you come out of the sea, and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island, then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus.

And when you are East and west with this Houell, so are you likewise East and West with the Island, you must likewise vnderstande, that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada, (y^t is, the snowy hill) lieth West & west and by south from you, then are you likewise east and west with the Island a∣foresaid, & then you shall presently sée the point called Antō Niquardo, as also Men∣dano Montuoso, (or the high Houell afore∣said) and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medel••n, and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda, & if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen, then run at 18 & 20 fadome déepe, whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell, go∣ing close to the bulwark, yet shunning it, you shall anker on the loofe side, for to Lée∣ward it hath no great depth.

If you depart from the Point of S. An∣ton in summer time towards new Spain, then you must hold your course westward for 20 or 30 miles, wherewith you shall finde ground at 80 fadome, being shels. From thence you shal run west, and west and by South till you be at 30 fadome, and from 30 fadome west-ward to 30 fadome, with the which course you should sayle a∣long this Countrey. And being a greater depth, you shall run west and west and by south, wherby you shall come again to the former depth. By this course you shall passe through the Islāds of Ilha de Scono∣cida, & Ilha d'Arena, that is, the vnknowne Island, and the sandy Island. From the I∣land la de Sconocida to the Islād d'Arena, west, & west and by south, you shall descry the Hils Las Sierras de San Martin, which are two high Hils, in the middle hauing a great opening or cliffe. Sailing from these Hils, you shall runne West, by the which course you shal sée the stony rock, which is a clouen hil, you shall run Northwest, and northwest & by west, wherewith you shall sée the Riuer of Medelyn, which is a lowe land, & somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca, or the white Island, as also y^e Island Rio Riffias, which a farre off sheweth like a ship vnder saile▪ & then presently you shal sée the Island of S. Iohn de Luz, and from the riuer called Rio Varado, to the Riuer of Vera Crus. There is no high land, but only one black shining hill, lying aboue the aforesaid Hauen.

The 65. Chapter. How to sayle from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channell called De Passagie.

SAyling from the Island La Dessea∣da to the Island Puerto Riso, y^t is, the rich Hauen: Desiring to passe through y^e channel of De Passagie, that is, the thorow faire, you must vse all y^e means you can to runne betwéene the Islands of Moncerrate & Redonda, or to Loofeward, y^t is, betwéen y^e Island of S. Christopher, and the Islands d'Estacio, and from thence you shal hold your course Northwest, & some∣what more to loofeward frō the Islands of Estacio, which are 2. Islands, one greater thē the other, shewing almost like 2. loaues of bread, when you are by them you shall

find 10.12. and 25. fadome déepe, at the dep∣thes of 10. & 12. fadome, you haue white sandy ground, and at 25. fadome black sand, to sayle from this Banke to the Ilandes las Virgines (that is the maydes) you shal holde your course northwest (for there the streams draw Southwestward) to shunne S. Crus, which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast, and when you see las Virgines, the first poynt is the greatest, and therefore it is called la Virgin Gorga, or the fatte mayde: and presentlie after follow the rest, which are long & full of Houels, they stretch East and West, and runne one within the other, hauing certaine Cliffes and Rockes hard by them, running on the South syde: in the middle way frō them you shall sée a great Cliffe, two myles into the sea. This Cliffe hath for a marke, a grayish colour, and be∣sydes these there are manie other cliffes, and to know whē you are in the passage, running along by it to Porto Riso, as aforesaid: then you shal sée white cliffes, that a farre off shew like a ship vnder sayle: the whitenes of these cliffes procéedeth of birds filings, when you sée them you must make towards them, and desiring to run through the passage, you shall hold your course betwéene these Ilands & the Ilands las Virgines, & whē you are by them thē you must run northwest to a smal Iland, which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Ʋerde, that is, the gréen Iland, and be∣ing right against this Iland, thē you are out of the passage, or without the channel, and be∣ing ther, you shal presently sée the land of y^e I∣land Puerto Riso, the first point wherof, cal∣led la Punto de Loquillo, lieth East & west with the Iland Ilha Ʋerde: if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliffe, and that the winde scanteth, & y^t you can not passe to loofeward from it, then you shall passe to léeward of it, for it is also a good chānell of 18. & 20. fadom deep, with sand and shels vpon the ground, a∣bout a mile to léeward from it, to know whē you are out of the Channell with this course then this cliffe must lie Southeast from you, and being at 30. fadome déep, with white san∣dy ground, you shall presently (as I said) passe by the Ilande of Ilha Ʋerde, running by the point of Loquillo, along by the land of Puer∣to Riso, Westnorthwest, and if you desire to be in the hauen of Puerto Riso, and that you cannot get thether, then you shal lauere, or ly driuing to léeward, with the point of Loquil∣lo, Southeastward from you, and from mid∣night forward you shall follow your course, because the streames draw Southeastward: the marks you haue there are these that is o∣uer the hauē of Puerto Riso, standeth an her∣mitage, vpon a high hil, which is called San∣ta Barbara, and sheweth like a white patch vpon a hill, and passing along by it, you shall see the Cloyster or Conuent of Dominican Fryers, which is about a quarter of a myle from the hermitage, and then you shall pre∣sently sée the hill, that sheweth like a clouen Iland: these are the right marks of this Ha∣uen, and to put into it, you must goe néere the hill, but not too néer, to shunne a shallow place that lieth within the said hill: after that you must loofe asmuch as you can, vntil you comé wher you must anker, which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the hauen.

The 66. Chapter. The groundes and depthes by the coast and countrie of New Spaigne.

BY the Ilāds called Alaclanes, lying betwéen the Iland Cuba and the coast of New Spaigne right ouer against the poynt called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly: by the Iland called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slyme ground: by the Ri∣uer of S. Pedro & S. Paulo, from 40. fadom to the land, it is shelly ground, by the fields or playnes of Almeria called Los Islano•• de Almeria, at 40. fadome it is sandy ground▪ & from thence outwards shelly ground: by Ʋili∣la Rica, or the rich stone, at 16 fadome, it is; muddy ground, East & west with the cliffes & sands de Tortugas, of Torteaux, it is white sand: Northeast and southwest with the same Tortugas, it is blacke sand, and eastward frō it, reddish sand, by the riuer of Panuco, from 40. fadom outwards it is white and red sand, and towardes the land, muddy ground, by the riuer called Rio Hermoso, or the faire riuer, frō 30. fadome towardrs the land, it is white sand, •• outward towards y^e sea, muddy groūd: by the riuer called Rio de Palmase de Mō∣tanas, that is, the riuer of palm trees & of hils: frō 40. fadom towards y^e land you haue sand, but most white, and outwards muddy groūd mixed with gray sand.

The 67. Chapter. The course & right marke of the nauiga∣tiō from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues, to the riuer of Co••go in An∣gola, southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia, with the situation of the countries.

SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues, which lyeth full vnder 1. deg. on the south side of the Equinoctial line: in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia: the coast frō thence for∣ward stretcheth northwest & southeast, being a flat long land: you haue the depthes of 10.

and 9. fadome déepe water, towards the land, being all ground like sand of sand lopers, all through the country, except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina, where you haue great sand & some stones: if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage, then euery night you must anker, till you haue the Ter∣reintios (which are the winds blowing from off the land) holding your course in that man∣ner, till you haue the Viracoins (which are y^e winds out of the sea) therwith again to make towards the land, vntil it be calme, or that y^e are at 10. fadom déep, thē you must anker til the comming of the land winds, which come dayly at their times, as aforesaid: if the strea∣mes run w^t the wind, thē you may wind from the one bough to the other, holding to léeward as aforesaid: the coniunction or time whē the streames run with the winds, is with a new Moone, about 2. dayes before or after, and 3. dayes before it is ful: if you desire to run from one bough to the other, y^t must rule your selfe in such māner, that you be euery morning by the coast, to get before the winds that as then blow off the land: the marks of the long land are these, it hath certain great thicke houels, called As Sierras de santo Espirito, that is, the hils of the holy Ghost, and somwhat fur∣ther you haue 2 other houels, which are very easy to be knowne: in this country you haue muddy ground, & further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek, called Palmella, for that it is like to Palmela, the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval: you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke, a land which stretcheth North & south, as you passe along by it: close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel, which is called Cascars, be∣cause it is like Cascais by Lisbon: you must vnderstand, that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie, you must let fal your sayles, to see if the shippe may get out, and if it cannot get out, then lie still till you haue the Vira∣coins that blow out of the sea, for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea, wher∣by the shippe can hardlie get out, when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirin••a, that is the woods of Palme trees, then let your best anker fall, for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground, whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe. And when you are in the riuer of Congo, being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome: then you shall loofe the ground, & then you shall turne your howreglasse, and when it is runne out then cast out your lead, and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land, for otherwise you could not get into the riuer, by meanes of the great force of the streames, wherby many men are much trou∣bled, as being the greatest & strōgest streams, that are found in any place, and run aboue 12. miles into the sea. Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid, and being 35. miles on your way, you shal sée a high hill, by the which ther lieth an Ilād called A Ilha de Loanda, but if you be not very close by y^e lād, you shal not sée the Iland, for it is very low & flat: if you chance to be by the land at 6. & 7. deg. then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo: and 10. myles to seaward from it, you shal sée many tokens & signes thereof, as great streames, thicke réeds, herbs, with ma∣ny cutle bones, and whē you are by the land, at 7. & 8. degr. & ½, then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it: and in this country in e∣uery place at 18. & 20. fadome, you shal haue good ground, from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land, & on the sea side you haue white downes, which shew like sandy strandes, & the ground by it is sandy with some stones, that is from 7. to 8. deg. and you must vnder∣stand that the land from 5 deg. southwarde, is altogether high, all the ground being mud∣dy, and a mile from it, it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe, good ground, being a cleare and faire coast, with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes, that is from 7 to 9 deg. and the land from 8. degrees southward, is verie high, if you come out of the sea, to the land, vnder 7. degr. and ½, then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels, which stretch Northwest and southeast, called As sete serras, that is, the 7. hils: if you come to the land vnder 8. degr. & ¼, then you shall see a hie land, lying eastwarde from you, this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine, & comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or northeast, you shal sée the afore¦said point, hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea, but you need not feare them, for it is faire and cleare: and therefore you may fréely go neere the land, thē better to know it, being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg. then east∣warde to land, you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual, when the point aforesaid is northeast from you, then the other land shall stretch southwest, which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda, the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land, at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes, with certaine small trees, vppon it, which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine: now to runne within y^e land of Lo••nd•• you must hold your course right vpon the land, that lyeth southward: so you may go close co••t, about half a mile frō it

& being there southwestward, from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand, whereby you can hardlie see it, but when you are close by it, that is the hauen of Angola. This Iland of Loanda, is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns, lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Ma∣ria, in the land of Algaruen, vpon the coast of Spain, and from the same flat land it is high∣er, for it is 7. miles long, now to put into this Iland you must hold your course on the north¦east point, & being close by it within a stones cast, you néed not fear, for ther it is 15. fadom deepe, and within it is all faire ground, this is the road on the side of the Iland, close by if from this Iland to the firme land there is no more but a quarter of a mile, and you can∣not see the entrie, till you be hard by it, and if there be any ships within the hauen, you shall see them before you can discerne or know the Iland, which sheweth as if it were trees, y^t stand vpon the land the farthest point out∣ward on the northeast side of this Iland lieth vnder 9 deg. therefore deceiue not your selfe by the card, for some of them haue it vnder 9. deg. and others vnder 9 deg. and a halfe ther∣fore beleeue none but such as haue it vnder 9. deg. at the northeast end of the aforesaid Ilād.

Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal hauens, riuers, points, Ilands, & places of the Nauigations of the Portingals & Spaniards, in the countries by them dis∣couered, and part inhabited, each place with their right names and surnames, as they are by them called, and ordinarily named in their Seacardes.

First from the furthest point outward of Portingale, called Cabo de Finisterra, following along by the coast of Portingale, Spain & Barbary, to the line of Tropicus Caueri, and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctiall lyne.

The degrees on the north side of the line.

• ... CAbo de Finisterra, that is the point of the lands end, lieth vnder degrees 43
• The Ilandes of Bayona lie vnder 42.
• ... Porto de Portug. y^t is Porte port ly vn. 41
• ... As Berlengas, y^t is the Barles, ly vnder 40.
• ... Lisboa or Lisbō & y^t Ilād of tercera, vn. 29.
• ... Perseueira and the Iland of S. Michael, li∣eth vnder 38.
• ... Cabo de san Vincente, and the Iland san∣ta Maria, lie vnder 37.
• ... Trastalgar lying on the coast, is vnder 36
• ... Larache lyeth vnder 35
• ... Soneia lyeth vnder 34.
• ... Cabo de Canty & Porto santo, y^t is the holy hauē lying by the Ilād of Madera are vn. 33
• ... Rio dos saueis y^t is y^e riuer of faries is vn. 32
• The Iland of Madera or the Iland of wood, is vnder the same heights of 32
• ... Taffatama lieth vnder 31
• ... Mecca and Ilha dos Saluaes, that is the I∣land of the wilde men lyeth vnder. 30
• ... Cabo de non, and the Ilandes Palma and Lancarotte, being of the Ilands of Canarie lyeth vnder. 29
• ... A Ilha, or the Ilande de Forte Ventura lyeth vnder. 28
• ... Cabo de Bo••ador and the Ilandes of great Canarie and also A Ilha de Hierro, or Iland of Iron lyeth vnder. 27
• ... Angra dos Cauallos, that is the Hauen of horses lieth vnder 25
• ... Rio d'Ouro or y^e riuer of Gold lieth vnd. 24

The line or Tropicus Cancri.

• ... Angra or the open hauen of Goncalo de Sintra lyeth vnder 23
• ... Cabo das Barbas, or the point of Baerden, lyeth vnder 22
• ... Cabo Branco or the white point lieth vn. 21
• ... Rio de Sao Io••o, or the riuer of S. Iohn lieth vnder 20
• ... Furna de Santa Maria, or the caue of S. Marie lyeth vnder 19
• ... Sete monte or seuen hils vnder & the Ilands of S. Anna, S. Vincent, S. Lucia, and S. Nicolas lieth vnder 18
• ... Ante Rotte, and Ilha de Sal. or the Iland of Salt vnder. 17
• ... Rio or the Riuer of Canaga and the Iland Ilha de Ma••a, vnder 16
• ... Cabo verde, or the gréen point, & the Ilāds of S. Iago, and Ilha do Fogo or of fyer vnder 15
• ... Rio or the riuer of Gambia, vnder 14
• ... Rio das Ostras or the riuer of oisters vn. 13
• ... Cabo Roxo vnder 12
• ... Buguba vnder 11
• ... Rio do Pichel or the riuer of y^e Can vnd. 10
• ... Rio or the riuer of Cachecache, vnder 9
• ... Rio de Serra Lioa, or the riuer of the Lions hill, vnder 8
• ... Rio das Palmas or the riuer of Palms, vn. 7
• ... Cabo de monte or the point of the hill vn. 6
• ... Cabo dos Baixos, or the point of sands and the myne of S. George vnder 5
• ... A Ilha or the Ilād of Fernando Poa & Cauo dàs Palmas or point of Palmes, vnder 4
• ... Rio de Campo or the riuer of the field vn. 3
• ... Rio de Princepe or y^e riuer of y^e prince vnd. 2
• The Iland of S. Thomas. vnder. 1

From the Equinoctiall line to the south side following the coast of Congo, An∣gola, and Ethiopia, to the cape de Bona Speranza.

The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial lyne.

• ... CAbo, or the point of Lopo Gonsalues vnder deg. 1
• ... Cabo, or the point of Catharina vnder 2.
• ... Angra da Iudia, or the hauen of the Iewe, vnder 5.
• ... Praya de San Domingos, or the strād of S. Dominico vnder 6.
• ... Rio or the riuer of Congo vnder. 7
• ... A Ilha d' Ascention, or the ascention vnd. 8.
• ... Rio or the riuer of Angola, and the Iland of Loanda vnder 9
• ... Cabo Ledo vnder 10.
• ... Rio, or the riuer of S. Lazaro vnder 11.
• ... Cabo de Loubos, or y^e riuer of wolues vn. 12
• ... Monte Negro, or the black hill vnder 14
• ... Serra Parda or the gray hill vnder 15
• ... Angra das Aldeas, or the open hauen of the villages, & the Iland of S. Helena vnd. 16.
• ... Manga das Areas, or the sandy sleue vn. 17.
• ... Cabo Negro, or the blacke point vnder 18.
• ... Os Mendoins vnder 19
• ... A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro vnder 20.
• ... Praya or the straight of Ruy Pires vnd. 21.
• ... Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Colume vnder 22.
• ... Praia Fria, or the cold strand vnder 23.

The lyne or Tropicus Cancri.

• ... Ponta da concepsao, or the conceptiō vn. 24
• ... Praya das Ala-goas vnder 25.
• ... Feiaco da Boca, or the māner of the mouth vnder 26.
• ... Angra, or the hauen of S. Anthony vnd. 27
• ... Angra, or hauen of S. Thomas vnder 28.
• ... Angra or the hauē of S. Christopher vn. 29
• ... Rio do Infante, or the Riuer of the Kinges sonne vnder 32.
• ... Angra, or hauen of S. Helena vnder 33.
• ... As Ilhas, or Ilād of Tristan de Cūha v. 34.
• ... Cabo de Bona Speranza, or poynt of good hope vnder 34. ½.

From the cape de Bona Speranza north∣wards, along the coast to Soffala, Mo∣sambique and Melinde, to the Equino∣ctial lyne, all being on the south side of the same lyne.

• ... CAbo das Agulhas, or the poynt of the Compas full vnder 35.
• ... Cabo de Infante, or point of the kings sonne vnder 34. ½.
• ... Cabo Talhado. or the clouen point vnd. 34.
• ... Cabo das Vaccas, or point of cowes, & Baya Fermosa, or the faire bay vnder 34.
• ... Cabo de Areciffe, or the point of the Cliffe vnder 33.
• ... Rio de infante or point of y^e kings son v. 32.
• ... Ponta Primeira, or the first point vnder. 32.
• ... Terra do Natal vnder 31.
• ... Ponta or the point of S. Lucia vnder 28.
• ... Terra dos fumos or the lād of smok v. 27. ½.
• ... Rio d' Alagoa or riuer of the lake, and the I∣land of Ioan de Lisboa, & vttermost south point of the Iland of S. Laurence vnd. 26.
• ... Agoa de Boa Pas or y^e riuer of peace vnd. 25
• ... Cabo das correntes, or point of the streame vnder 24. ½.
• ... Rio, or riuer of Mataca or monument, & the Iland A Ilha do Mascharenhas vn. 21. ½.
• ... Os Baixos da Iudia, or y^e Iewes sands vn. 22
• ... Cabo, or the point of S. Sebastian vnd. 21.
• ... Rio, or the Riuer of Quiloan or Quiloane, vnder 20. ½.
• ... Soffala and the Iland of Diego Rodrigues vnder 20.
• ... Porto, or the hauen of Bango vnder 19. ½.
• ... Rio, or the riuer of Cuama vnder 18. ¼.
• ... Os Baixas dos Gara••aus or sands of Sea∣mewes vnder 18.
• ... Rio dos bons sinais, or of good tokens v. 17 ¼
• ... A Ilha, or Iland of Brandao vnder 17.
• The Iland A Ilha Primeira, or the first I∣land vnder 17. ½.
• ... A Ilha or Iland of Iohn de Noua vnd. 16. ½.
• ... Rio or riuer of Angoxa vnder 16.
• ... Mosambique vnder 15.
• ... Rio de S. Antonio vnder 14.
• ... Rio dereito, or the straight line vnder 12.
• ... Ilha do Comoro vnder 11.
• ... Cabo del Gado, or thinne point vnder 10.
• The towne of Quiloa vnder 9.
• ... A Ilha de Monfia vnder 7.
• ... Ilha de Sansibar vnder 6.
• ... Ilha de Pemba vnder 5.
• ... A Ilha dos tres Irmaos, or Iland of three brethren vnder 4.
• ... A Ilha do Almirante, or the Iland of the Admirall vnder 3. ½.
• ... Mombassa, or riuer of Tacharigo vnder 3.
• The howne and hauen of Melinde vnder 2.
• The towne and hauen of Pate vnder 1.

The Equinoctial lyne. The heigth and degrees of the Hauens, points, and riuers, of the Equinoctiall lyne, to the straights of Mecca, other∣wise called the red sea, on the North side of the Equinoctiall. The degrees on the north side.

• ... Barra Boa, or the good hauen vnder 1.
• The town and hauen of Braba vnder 2
• The town & hauē of Magadoxa vnder 2. ½.
• ... Zarzella vnder 6.
• ... Cabo, or poynt of Guardafu, and the Iland a Ilha de Sacotora vnder 12.

From the point of Guardafu, inwardes to the red sea, on the south coast.

• ... MIte or Barbora vnder 11.
• ... Zeila vnder 12.
• ... Ilha Dalaca vnder 15.
• ...

• Ilha Soaquen vnder 18.

From the North side of the red sea or the straight of Mecca.

• ... TOor vnder 27.
• ... Gida and the hauen of Mecca, where Mahomet lieth buried, whereof the straight taketh the name vnder 20.
• A Ilha de Zeyban vnder 15.
• ... A Ilha Camaram vnder 15.
• ... Adem a fortresse of the Portingales, which in times past they held but not at this time vnder 13.

The coast of Arabia to the straightes or Sinus Persicus, and the Iland of Ormus.

• ... FArtaque lieth vnder 15. degrees.
• ... Diufar vnder 16.
• The Iland of Curia, Muria, vnder 17.
• The Iland a Ilha de Maeira vnder 22.
• ... Cabo de Rosalgate vnder 22.
• ... Curiata and Masquata vnder 23.
• ... Hoor vnder 24.
• ... Cabo Mocandao vnder 27.
• The Iland and towne of Ormus vnder 27.

From Ormus or Persia along the coast to to the cape de Comoriin.

• ... CAbo de Iasque vnder 25 & ½.
• ... Rio do Sinde or Indo vnder 24.
• The towne and Iland of Diu vnder 21.
• ... Goga and the Towne within the Créeke of Cambaia vnder 33.
• The towne and hauen of Chaul vnder 19.
• The towne and hauen of Dabul vnder 18.
• The Iland and towne of Goa & the Ilandes of os Ilhas Queimados vnder 16.
• The fortresse of Honor and the Ilandes of Angediua vnder 14.
• ... Baricala and the sandes of Baixios de Pan∣dua vnder 13.
• The fortresse of Mangalor and Monte de Ly vnder. 12.
• ... Cananor and Calecut vnder 11.
• ... Cranganor and Çochiin vnder 10.
• The fortresse of Cay Coulao vnder 9.
• ... Cauo de Comoriin being the vttermost point of the coast called India vnder 7.

From the Iland Seylon on the East and south side about to the West.

• ... TRincanamalle vnder 9
• ... O. Capello de Frade or the Monkes coule vnder 8.
• ... Rio de Matacalou vnder 7 ••/3.
• ... Ponta de Gualle vnder 6.
• ... Cloumbo a fortresse of the Portingales vn∣der 7.

From the Cape de Gomerin along the coast of Coramandel, Orixa, Bengala, Pegu, & Malacca, to the point of Sin∣gapura.

• ... CAbo Negapatan vnder 11. degrées.
• ... Pouoacao de Saint Thomas, or towne of Saint Thomas vnder 13. 1/••.
• The towne and hauen of Muselepatao vn∣der 16. 1/••.
• The point of Guadouariin vnder 17.
• ... O Pagode de Iorganate, or Idoll of Iurga∣nate vnder 20. ¼.
• ... Rio de Puacota vnder 19.
• ... Rio Palura or Calauor vnder 19. ⅓.
• ... A Derradiera terra alta or the last high land vnder 19. ⅔.
• ... Rio Cayegare vnder 21.
• ... Rio de Ganges otherwise Porto Pequeno or the small hauen vnder 22
• The hauen and towne of Aracan vnder 20.
• The hauen and towne of Martaban vnder 16. ¼.
• The vttermost end on the north side of the Iland Andeman vnder 16.
• The vttermost end on the south side of the same Iland vnder 11.
• The hauen and Towne of Tanasseriin vn∣der 11
• The hauen and towne of Gonsalan vnder 8. ½.
• The Iland Pulo Cuto vnder 6 ⅔.
• The towne and hauen of Queda vnder 6 ½.
• The Iland of Gomespola, and the Iland Pulo Batum vnder 6.
• The Iland Pulo Pera vnder 5 ⅔
• The Pulo Pinon vnder 5, 2/4.
• The hauen and towne of Pera vnder 4. ½.
• ... Pulo Sambillao vnder 4.
• ... Pulo Parcelar & the Iland as Ilhas d'Aru vnder 3.
• ... Cabo Rachado, or clouen point vnder 2. ½.
• The towne and fortresse of Malacca vnder 2. ½.
• ... Cabo de Singapura vnder 1.

From the Iland of Samatra on the North side of the Equinoctiall line.

• THe hauen of Achein vnder 4. ½.
• The hauen of ••eder vnder 4.
• The point of Taniamburo vnder 5.

The place on the south side of the Equi∣noctiall in the same Iland & els where.

• ... Terra d'Arruen or land of Arruen vnder 2.
• ...

• Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo, or the gold land of Manancabo 3
• The hauen of Campar vnder 4.
• The straight betwéene the Iland Sumatra and Iana Maior vnder 5. ½
• ... A Ilha Iaua Maior in y^e midle way vnd. 6
• ... A Ilha do Iogo or Fire Iland vnder 7.
• ... A Ilha Solitaria, or the solitarie Iland vn∣der 7
• ... A Ilha Banda vnder 5
• The Ilandes of Cloues of Maluco are vn∣der the Equinoctiall lyne.

From Cabo de Singapura following the coast to Sion, Camboia, Champa, and China, to the riuer of Liampo, & Nan∣quyn, with some Ilandes all vppon the North side of the Equinoctial line,

• THe Iland Pulo Timao vnder 2. ½
• The hauen and towne of Pan. vnder 3. 1/••
• The hauen and towne of Patana vnder 7. ⅔
• The Hauen and towne of Sion vnder 14, ½
• The point of Cuy vnder 12. ⅔
• ... Enseada de Lion, or Creeke of Lyon vn∣der 12 ½
• The hauen of Varella vnder 13
• The Iland Pulo Condor vnder 8 ⅔.
• The towne and Hauen of Camboia vnder 10.
• The Iland Pulo Seci•• from the land vnder 10. ⅓
• The Iland Pulo Caton vnder 15. ⅔.
• The Iland Pulo Champello vnder 16 ⅔.
• The vttermost South point of the Island Aynon vnder 18. ½.
• The Northeast end of the same Iland vn∣der 19. ½.
• The Ilands of Sanchoan vnder 21. ⅓.
• The towne & Iland of Macau vnder 22. ⅓.
• The towne of Canton vnder 24. ½.
• ... Ilha Branco or white Iland vnder 22. ½.
• ... Ilha Fermosa, or faire Iland vnder 21. ¼.
• ... Ilha de Lamon vnder 23. ¼.
• The hauen of Chabaquea vnder 23. ½.
• The hauen of Chincheo vnder 24. ½.
• ... Enseada dos Camaroins or Créeke of Gra∣naet otherwise called Cayto vnder 25. ½.
• The Iland Lequeo Pequeno vnder 25.
• ... A Ilha dos Cauallos or Iland of horses vn∣der 25. ⅓.
• ... Ponto or Cabo de Sumbor vnder 28. ¼.
• The Ilands as Sere Irmaas or seauen fifte as lying in the way to Iapan vnder 29. ⅓.
• The Ilandes of Sionglean lying on the coast vnder 29. ⅔.
• The Ilandes called Liampo lying on the coast vnder 31.
• The middle of the Iland Meaxuma vn∣der. 30. ••/2.
• The Iland of Tanaxuma vnder 31, ⅔.
• The riuer of Nanquiyn vnder 34.
• The Ilands of Iapan in all hauing in Lon∣gitude 130. miles, and the furthest eastward lieth vnder 32.

From the Ilandes of Phillippinas, other∣wise the Lusons, or Manillas on the North side of the Equinoctial line.

• THe entrie of the channell betweene the Iland Luson, and the Iland Tandaia vnder 12.
• The Iland Capuly, and the Iland Ticao vnder 12. ¼.
• The Iland Masbate vnder 12. ¼.
• The Iland of Banton vnder 12. ⅔.
• The Iland Rebuian on the north side vn∣der 12. ½.
• The Iland de Vireies vnder 12. ¾.
• The Iland Marinduque vnder 12. ¼.
• ... Cabo de Dumarijn in the Iland Mindoro and the Ilandes of Luban vnder 13.
• The mouth or entry of the bay of Manilla the chiefe towne of the Iland of Lucon vnder 14. ¼.
• The towne of Manilla vnder 14, ½.
• The cape of Samballes in the Iland Lucon vnder 14. ⅔.
• The Cape Bullinao in the same Iland vn∣der 16. ⅔.
• The Cape de Boiador, which is the fur∣thest point on the north-side of the Island Luson vnder 19.
• The furthest Iland east and north from the Iland Lequeos vnder 29.
• The Iland a Illas de las Velas otherwise de los Ladrones vnder 13.

The countrie of new Spaine lying ouer a∣gainst the Islands of Iapon.

• THe Iland of Saint Agustine lying on the coast vnder degrées 30. ¼.
• The Iland de Sedros, or of Ceaders vnder 28. ¼.
• ... Cabo de saint Lucas, the beginning of the land of California vnder 22.
• ... Cabo de las Corrientes or point of streams vnder 19. ⅔.
• The hauen of Acapulco vnder 17.

From the straightes of Magellanes along the coast of Brasilia to the Equinoctiall line on the south side.

The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctiall.

• THe straight or passage of Magellanes vnder 15. ⅛ degrées.
• ... Basy•• de las Islas, or the bay of the Ilandes vnder 49.
• ... Rio de la Plata, or riuer of Siluer vnder 34. ⅔.
• ...

• Arreciffe or the Cliffe vnder 34.
• ... Bahia Aparcellada, or the bankie bay vn∣der 33.
• ... Cabo da Ponta vnder 32.
• ... Rio dos Negros or the riuer of the Mores vnder 31.
• ... Angra Onde Seuio o Battel, that is the hauen where the boate was séene vnder 30
• ... Ilha da Bahya, or Iland of the bay vnder 29.
• ... Ilha de Santa Caterina vnder 28. ½.
• ... Bahia do Repairo, or bay of defence vnder 28.
• ... Rio do Estremo, or riuer beyond measure vnder 27.
• ... Rio dos Dragos, or riuer of Dragons vn∣der 26.
• ... Ilha de Cananea, or Ilands of Réedes vnder 25. ½.
• ... Ilha Doropica vnder 25.
• Bay of Saint Vincent vnder 24.
• The riuer of Canane vnder 24
• The Rio or riuer d•• Ianero vnder 23. ⅓.
• ... Cabo Frio or cold point vnder 23.
• ... Bahia do Saluador, or bay of our Sauiour vnder 22.
• The sands called os Baixos dos Pargos vn∣der 21.
• ... A Bahia do Espirito Santo, or the Bay of the holy Ghost vnder 120.
• The Iland of saint Barbara vnder the same height of 20.
• The riuer of S. Luci•• vnder 19.
• The riuer of Saint George vnder. 18.
• ... Porto S••guro or the safe hauen vnder 17.
• ... Rio das Santos Cosmos the riuer of Saint Cosmos and Da••ian vnder 16.
• The Iland of S. Helena also vnder 16.
• ... Rio da Praia vnder 15.
• ... Rio dos Ilhas the riuer of small Ilāds vnder 14. ½.
• ... Porto Real, or kingly hauen vnder 14.
• ... Bahya de Todos os Santos vnder 13.
• ... Rio Real or kingly riuer vnder 12.
• The riuer of Saint ••••ancis vnder 11.
• The riuer of Saint Michael vnder 10.
• ... Santo Alexo vnder 9.
• ... Cabo or point of S. Augustine vnder 8. ¾.
• The towne of Olinda vnder 8. 3/••.
• ... Pernanbuco, and the Iland of the Ascention vnder 8.
• Saint Domingo vnder 7.
• ... Artapica vnder 6.
• ... Santo Roque, & Santa Maria d' Arribada vnder 5.
• The bay of Saint Lucas vnder 4.
• The bay of das Tartarugas vnder 3.
• ... Rio de Arreciffe vnder 2.

From the Antillas or sore Islands of the Spanish Indies, & some places lying in the Firme Land, al vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line.

• ... Isla la deceada, or desired Iland vnder 15. 1/••
• The Iland Marigalante vnder 15
• The Iland la Dominica vnder 15. ½.
• The Iland la Antigua or old Iland vnder 16. ¼.
• ... Cabo de Cantina vpon the Firme land vn∣der 9. ½.
• The Iland la Serrana vnder 14. ½.
• The Serranilla or little Serrana vnder 16.
• ... Cayman Grande, or the great Crocodile vnder 19.
• ... Cabo de S. Anton in the Iland of Cuba, vnder 22.
• The riuer of S. Peter & S. Paul vnder 21.
• ... Los Cambos d'Almeria vnder 20.
• ... Villa Rica la vicia, or olde rich towne vn∣der 19. ⅔.

The hauens and places lying vppon the coast called India, with the distance & situation of the same, beginning from the North side along the coast south∣westward, as the countrie stretcheth.

And first you must vnderstand that the coast called India hath his beginning from the creeke called a Enseada de Iaquetta, at a place called Espero, &c.

• FRom Espero to Mangalor are 8. miles.
• From Mangalor to Patana are 8
• From Patana to the point called Punta de Diu are 12.
• Frō Diu to the Iland a Ilha do Bette are 9.
• From the Ilha do Bette to Goa a towne ly∣ing in the creeke of Cambaia are 20.
• From Ilha do Bette to the towne of Da∣man are 26.
• From Daman to Surratte a towne lying in the creeke of Cambaia are ••.
• From Daman to Danu on the outward part of the coast are 7.
• From Danu to as Ilhas das Vacas are 7.
• From as Ilhas das Vacas to the towne of Baccain are 3.
• Frō Baccain to the towne of Chaul are 12
• From Chaul to Danda are 5.
• From Danda to the creeke called a Enser∣da de Pero Soares are 3.
• From Enseada de Pero Soares to Siffar∣dao are 3.
• From Siffardao to Dabul are 10.
• From Dabul to Sanguiserra are 6.
• Frō Sanguiserra to the riuer Be••cele are
• ...

• From the riuer of Bettele to Seyta Por are 3.
• From Seyta Por to Carapam are 11.
• From Carapam to the chiefe towne of Goa are 14.
• From Goa to Angediua are 12.

From this place forward beginneth the coast of Malabar, which is contained within the coast of India.

• FRom Angediua to Batecala are miles 12.
• From Batecala to the fortresse of Barcelar, are 5.
• From Barcelar to the Ilands called Prime∣iro are 6.
• From Primeiro Ilandes to the fortresse of Mangalor are 6.
• From Mangalor to Monte Fermoso are 4
• From Monte Fermoso to Monte de Lin are 10.
• From Monte de Lin to the fortresse of Ca∣nanor are 6.
• From Cananor to Calecut are 8.
• From Calecut to Coulette are 2.
• From Coulette to Chale and Parangale are 7.
• From Parangale to Tanor are 3.
• From Tanor to Panane are 6.
• From Panane to Cochiin are 15.
• From Cochiin to a place called Arbore de Porca, or the tree of the Sow or Hogge are 9.
• From Arbore de Porca to Caule Coulao are 9.
• From Caule Coulao to the fortresse Cou∣lao, are 6.
• From Coulao to the Barreiras are 4.
• From the Barreiras to Briniao are 8.
• From Briniao to the Ilandes called Ilha de Tarauancor are 6.
• From Tarauancor to the Cape de Como∣ryn are 6.

There endeth the coast commonly called (in the Orientall coast) the Countrie of In∣dia wherein is contained the coast of Mala∣bar as aforesaid, all the rest of the Orientall coastes haue their particular names seuerall from India, as I haue sufficiently declared, and all the miles aforesaid, as also all those in the description of the voiage to and from In∣dia, are all Spanish myles, whereof 17 and ½ are one degrée, which are fiftéene Dutch miles.

Hereafter followeth an Instruction & memorie of the yeelding or decli∣ning of the compasse, in the Na∣uigations and courses of the Portingales into the East Indies both outward and homeward, & in what places, and how much they yeeld northwest, & northeast, that is, how much the needle of the compasse windeth or turneth, to∣wards the east or west, all perfectlie set downe, and truly marked by the Portingale Pilots that saile ordinari∣lie.

SAyling from Lisbone almost to the point of Cabo Verde, thē the néedles or lines of the compasse doe yéeld northeastward, that is towards the east) two 3. parts of a strike and more.

From thence about 4, or 5. degrées fur∣ther, on the north side of the Equinoctiall be∣ing 70. or 80. miles from the coast, then the néedle of the com••••sse windeth Eastward, that is, northeastward halfe a strike, & if you be 100. or 120. miles from the land, then it windeth northeastward ⅓ part of a strike.

Running along by the coast of Brasilia to 7.8. & 10. degrées, on the south side of the E∣quinoctiall, then the compasse will winde Northeastward, or to the east ⅓ part of a strike, that is when you sayle close by the coast of Brasilia: from 17. & 18. degrées, vn∣der which height lieth the sands called os Ba∣ixos dos Abrolhos, then the compasse will winde Northeastward ¼ or ⅔ partes of a strike, that is when you run not aboue 100. or 120. miles from the coast of Brasilia.

Running along by the Iland of Martin Vaaz, thē the compasse windeth northeast∣ward a strike or more.

From thence forward till you bee vnder 33. degrées, the compasse windeth north∣eastward a strike and a halfe, to seauentie or eightie miles beyond the Iland of Tristan da Cunha.

From thence to the Cabo de Bona Spe∣ranza, then the compasse beginneth againe to winde lesse, and if you marke the compasse well, & that it windeth halfe a strike, to the northeast then you are hard by the Cape de bona Speranza, not aboue 30. or 40. miles at the furthest frō it, for when you are north & south with the cape, then the compasse wil winde northeastward ⅓. part of a strike.

Sayling from thence forward, if you mark the compasse, & find it euen, then you are 80. miles eastward from the cape das Agulhas. Sayling

the Compasse, if it windeth Northwestward ⅔. parts of a strike, that is towards the west, then you are North & South with the point called Cabo das Correntes, and being vnder 25. and 26. deg. till you come vnder 20. de∣grées, and that the Compasse yéeldeth ¼. of a strike, and more Northwestward, then look out for the Islande called S. Laurence, for you shal presently sée it, & when you are right ouer against Mosambique, then the Com∣passe yeeldeth a strike or somewhat lesse to¦wards the northwest, & hath y^e same differēce til you come to the Equinoctial line, towards India. Being 200. miles East and West with the hauen of Goa, or the coast of India, to Cabo de Comorijn, then the Compasse, windeth Northwestward a strike and a half, and vpon the coast of India a strike and ⅓.

Sayling from Cochiin to Portingal, vn∣till you haue past the Ilands Maldiua, south and southwestward, then the Compasse will wind Northwestward a strike and a half, till you be vnder 8. and 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall line, and if you find it lesse then a strike & a halfe, then you are on y^e west side of the sands called A Saya de Mal∣ha, that is the dublet of Iron rings, because they are like it.

And when you are vnder 27. or 30. degrées, holding your course west, then you shall find that the Compasse yéeldeth a strike and ¼. Northwestward, and when you find it so, thē you are North & south with the point of S. Roman, lying on the furthest end southeast∣ward from the Iland of S. Laurence.

Being north and south with the sands cal∣led Os Baixos de Iudia, making towardes the land called Terra do Natal, til you bee vnder 30. and 31. deg. then the Compasse wil yéeld Northwestward ¾. of a strike, or some∣what lesse, & then you shall be North & south with the point called Cabo das Correntes.

Comming vnder 32. & 33. degr. forward, and finding the Compasse euen, not winding Eastward nor westward, then you are right vnder the Meridian, you must vnderstande that to marke the Compasse well, that it saileth not any thing at all, you must alwaies haue your eye vpon if in the Peylen the bet∣ter to looke vnto it, for if you sayle therin, you shal hardly gesse right, nor make any good ac∣count. Hauing past the Cape de bona Spe∣ranza, sayling to the Ilande of S. Helena, then the Compasse windeth Northeastward 1/••. part of a strike, & in the Islande of S. He∣lena, halfe a strike, and from the Iland of S. Helena to the Iland of Ascention, then the Compasse windeth Northeastward ⅔. parts of a strike.

When you sayle from Portingall to Bra∣silia till you bee vnder the height of the point of Cabo de S. Augustin, & this Iland of As∣cention, then you must vnderstand that the more the Compasse windeth northeastward or eastward, the further eastward you are from the said point, therefore you must haue great regard thereunto, for that if you bee comming in Peylen you shall find it there to be euen as I said before.

From the Islande of Ascention to the cliffe called Penedo de S. Pedro, about 20. or 30. myles eastward from it, then the com∣passe is scarce halfe a strike Northeastward.

From thence 17. or 18. degrées further, you shall find the Compasse euen and alike, by North and South with the Ilande of S. Marie.

From thence forward if you haue a large wind, so that you see the Ilande of Flores, northwestward from you, thē the Compasse will yéelde ½. strike. And when you are 70. or 80. miles beyond the Iland of Flores, thē the Compasse is euen.

In the Island of Fayael, and from thence to the Island of Tercera, one of the Flem∣mish Ilands, the Compasse will yéeld ⅓. part of a strike Northeastward and, from Terce∣ra to Lisbone from ⅔. to ¾. parts of a strike.

Now to know the wreaking, winding or declining of the Compasse, you must vnder∣stand, that when you are vnder the Meridiā, that is vnder the line or strike, which is pla∣ced in the compasse of the firmamēt from the one Pole to the other, y^t is right in y^e middle crosse wise ouer the Equinoctial line, then e∣uery Compasse (that is true and good) will be euen, without declining either East or west, and being vpon the one or the other side ther∣of, then the néedle of the Compasse declineth on the one or the other side, that is when you are on the East side, then the néedle windeth Westward, which we call Northwestward, & when you are on the West side of the Me∣ridian, then the Compasse declineth East∣warde, which wee name Northeastwarde, which shal suffice to let you knowe what it meaneth, & how to gouerne your self therein.

Certain questions & answeres very profi∣table & necessarie to be knowne by all Saylers.

IF a man should aske you how ma∣ny degrées are in the Compasse of the whole world: you may answer, there are 360. degrees, each degrée being 15. Dutch miles, and 17. Spa∣nish miles and a halfe.

Question. What are the Poles of the world?

Answer. Two points that are imagined or thought y^t the world is born or hangeth vpon.

Q. What is the Equinoctiall line?

A. A strike or line placed from East to west, about the compasse or roundnes of the worlde, which is the seperation or middle be∣tween both the Poles, and when the Sunne is vpon it, which is the 21. of March, and the 23. of September, (stilo nouo) then the day & night are of a length, and therefore it is called the Equinoctiall line.

Q. What is the Meridian?

A. A strike or line placed in the Com∣passe of the world, from the one Pole to the other, and when the shadow is in the middle of this line, then it is your Meridian.

Q. What is the Parallel?

A. All things or places that lie right east and West from you are Parallel.

Q. What is Tropicus?

A. A strike or line imagined or placed in the compasse of the firmament, which is the fixed place, how neare the Sun goeth to the line, & turneth back againe, which is the 21. of Iune (stilo nouo) it cōmeth vpō the north side of the Equinoctiall, to 23. degrées and ½. which place is called Tropicus Canc••i, and the 21. of Decemb. it commeth on the south side of the Equinoctiall, to the like height of degrees, which place is called Tropicus Ca∣pricorni.

Q. How farre is it betwéene the Equi∣noctiall line, and any of the two Poles?

A. 90. degrées, which is the fourth part of the compas of y^e whole world or firmamēt.

Q. What is the Horizon?

A. It is the compasse you can see round about you, as farre as till that you think the earth and sky meeteth together, which is 90. degrees from you and that is the Horizon.

Q. What is the Zenith?

A. All that part of the sky that standeth right ouer your head, is the Zenith.

Q. What is the longitude & the latitude?

A. Longitude is the length, and Latitude the breadth of the way you make.

Q. If you be vnder the Pole Articus or the North star, whether as then your Com∣passe can shew you & guide you right in the course you are to hold?

A. No, for being in that countrey the née∣dle of the Compasse where it is lined, will be drawne vpwards towards the glasse, wher∣by it cannot worke or shew his nature, but being somewhat from it, in such manner that the Pole hath no more place or power ouer it, to draw it vpwardes, then the Compasse will presently worke and shewe her effect, whereby you hold on your course.

Q. If vpon the 2••. of Iune (stilo nouo) you be by the hauen of Hauana, in the coast of Florida, & new Spaine, how much height shall you find in the Astrolabe, in taking of the Sunne.

A. That vpon that day you shall haue the Sunne for your Zenith, that is right ouer your head, and then you shal find no shadow on eyther side, then you must looke vppon the declination of the day, and all that you finde from the declination, so much you are distant from the Equinoctiall line towardes the sun, and that is your height.

Q. If you be in the same place vpon the 23. of December (stilo nouo) what heght of the Sunne shal you then haue in the Astro∣labe.

A. At that day the Sun is distant from the Equinoctiall line 23. degrées and ½. wher∣vnto adding other 23. degrées and ½. they make 47. degrées, and then there wanteth 43. deg. to make vp 90. degr. these 43. de∣grées shall you take in the Astrolabe, for the height of the Sunne.

Q. What is a degrée?

A. Of 360. degrees or parts, wherewith the world is deuided & measured, a degrée is one parte, so that one degrée is 360. parts of the world.

Q. If two men were distànt North and South from each other in equall proportion, whether as then should they haue equall de∣clination of the sunne?

A. I, but they must be one vppon the North side, & the other vpon the South side, of the Equinoctial line, which is to be vnder∣stood vpon the 22. of March, and the 23. of September (stilo nouo) when the Sunne is in the same line.

Q. If you were vnder the height of 10. degrees, hauing 5. degrées of declination, the Sunne and shadowe being gone, how much shall you take in the Astrolabe?

A. 75. degrees and fiue for of declina∣tion are 80. degrées, then there wanteth 10. degrées, to make the 90. degr. & that is the Equinoctial line betwéene you and the Sun.

Q. If you haue the Sunne and shadow vpon one side, being vnder 20. degrées, and haue 10. degr. for declination, what shal you then take by the Astrolabe?

A. 80. then there wanteth 10, to make vp 90. and 10. for declination are 20. which is the height that you are vnder.

Q. If you chance to take the height of the sunne for 4.5. daies or more together at 90. degrées, how many miles shall you haue sai∣led all that time?

A. All that the sunne hath gon forward, so that all the degrées & minutes that you find your selfe vpon the same dayes to bee distant

from the declination, those are the miles and the way that you haue sayled, that is, if the Sunne be risen or descended 6. degrées more or lesse, so haue you likewise so much furthe∣red or gone on your way.

Q. If you were by y^e land in any place, vnder one degrée, on the Coast lying East & West, holding your course 89. miles from thence West, & west & by North, vnder what height and how far shal you as then be from y^e land?

A. Vnder the height of two degrées and 15. Dutch, & 17. Spanish miles and a halfe from the land.

Q. If the Sunne were in the one Tro∣picus, & you in the other, what height should you then make in taking of the Sunne?

A. The sunne is as then distant from y^e Equinoctiall line 23. deg. & ½. with 23. deg. and ••. more that you are distant from it, which make 47. degrées, then there wanteth thrée 43. degrées to make vp 90. deg. those you must take by the Astrolabe, those you shall compare or ad to the declination which is 23. deg. and ½. it maketh 66. ½. then there wanteth 23. 1/••. degr. to make 90. and that is your height.

Q. If you were in a place, & knew y^e height thereof, but not the declination of the day, how would you know it without your book?

A. Take the height of the Sun by your Astrolabe, and that you find you must adde to the height that the place lyeth vnder, and whatsoeuer it amounteth vnto aboue 90. de∣grées, or that it wanteth of 90. degrées, is the declination of the day.

Q. Which are the places of y^e world, wher∣in it is 6. monthes day, & 6. monthes night?

A. Vnder the Poles of the worlde.

Q. What is the height?

A. All that the Sunne riseth from mor∣ning to noone, likewise the height is the de∣grees, that you haue from the Pole to the Horizon: also the height is all the distance you haue from the Equinoctiall line.

Q. How shall you know the declination of the Sunne?

A. You shall take the height of the Sun vpon the 21. of Iune Stilo nouo, and then stayed till the 23. of December after, vpon the which day again you shal take the height of the Sunne, which done, you must subtract the least number out of the greatest, and that which resteth you shall deuide in the middle, & in this sort you shall find the declination.

Q. What is the greatest declination that the sunne maketh in one day?

A. Foure and twentie minutes.

Q. How many degrees doe account for a strike or line of the Compasse?

A. Eleuen & ••. for 32. times, 11. ¼ ma∣keth 360. degrees, which is the Compasse of the world.

Q. How far is the southstarre distant from the Pole?

A. Thirtie degrees keeping neither nee∣rer nor further off.

Q. What doth the Compasse signifie?

A. The Horizon with the Compasse of the world deuided into 32. degrees.

Q. What is the Sea Carde?

A. The land and the Sea.

Q. What is the Astrolabe?

A. The 4. part of y^e world, which is 90. deg.

Q. Wherefore are the lines of the Com∣passe, or in the nauigation euen and alike, and passe altogether through the Center of one length, without difference in greatnesse, or compasse of roundnes, & wherefore thē doe you recken more miles vpon one degree and line, then vpon the other, for y^t by order they should haue as many miles as the other.

A. The great circles, or compassing lines, which y^e Equinoctiall naturally hath, that is, the 32. deg. are altogether euē & alike, ech be∣ing 15. Dutch, & 17. Spanish miles, and ½. but the smal circles or comparing lines haue some more, some lesse, according to y^e eleuati∣on of y^e Pole, in such maner, y^t the nearer you be to y^e Equinoctial line, so much longer your way wil be, & the nearer you go to the Poles the shorter will be your way, for the Pole ri∣seth or descēdeth one degrée, & running along by the line, it neither riseth nor declineth.

Q. How shall you at noone time knowe, how much the sunne declineth Northeast in Northwest, in any place of the world, what∣soeuer you shal be.

A. You shal make a rounde circle or Ring vpon the ground, & set a néedle, or any other thing in the middle thereof, & so stay the rising of y^e Sun, & in the first comming out thereof you may mark where y^e shadow lyeth, which hauing marked, you shal stay til euening, vn∣till the Sun goeth down, & thē looke where y^e shadow of the néedle is, & marke it as before, whereby you shal make your account in this sort: you shal measure how much there is frō the one marke to y^e other, & so deuide it crosse wise in equall distance, which shall bee your North & south: now when the shadow of the Sunne commeth vpon those lines or strikes, then it is noone, now to know how much the néedle of y^e Compas lieth northeast or north∣west, set the Compasse by, & thē you shal pre∣sently sée where the needle declineth, whether it be eastward or westward, and how much, whereupon you may make your account.

Q. Where is the needle of the Compasse euen and alike?

A. Vnder the Meridian, or at noone time?

The end of the 3 Booke

Notes

• * 1.1

  1585.
• * 1.2

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 Dom. 1585
• * 1.3

  15••••.
• * 1.4

  1585.
• * 1.5

  1585.
• * 1.6

  1585.
• * 1.7

  1582.
• * 1.8

  1584.
• * 1.9

  1579.
• * 1.10

  1577
• * 1.11

  1578